This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned

by Google as part of a project

to make the worlds books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge thats often difcult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this le - a reminder of this books long journey from the
publisher to a library and nally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the les We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these les for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Googles system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google watermark you see on each le is essential for informing people about this project and helping them nd
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we cant offer guidance on whether any specic use of
any specic book is allowed. Please do not assume that a books appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Googles mission is to organize the worlds information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the worlds books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at http://books.google.com/
1
Standard Gennan -Works.
mm
w
(toUege
FROM
Mrs.. Wln . C .. Lane.
__ .... 3_ .......... & ....... "'_ .... -.. ...... -----# - .... ---- ----.... -.. ----.
164 pages, . 90
CEhl8chlager'. Pronouncing GerInan Header. To
which is added" Method of Learning to Read and understand the
German without a Teacher. 12mo. 2M pages, 1 25
Igilz 10 Coogle
Standard. SpaDish W-orks.
Onendo"". Ne_ lftedlot of' Learnlnc to :Bead.
Write, and Speak the German Language. By G_. J. ADLU,
. .A.M. l2mo. 610 pages, 1 16
KEY TO J:XEBCISES. Separatl volnme,
Few boob bave maintained tllelr popularity In the lIChools for SO
loDg a period 81 the Ollendorlr serite. 'Flie verdict prononneed In their
favor, on their lIrat appearanee iDEorope, baa been lIgnaIly conftnned
InAmerlCL
GI'aIIlDlIln f'or Teaehllllr Englbla to Gel'llllUUo
Ollendorlr'8 New Method f. Germane to Learn to Bead, Write.
and Speak the EugIIah Iaguage. Arranged and adapted to
8chooll and Prlvate.A.cadlm1ee. By P. G.ume. 121110. 699
pages, 116
KEY TO THE EXERCISES. Separate volnme,
PolJlflo& Bea.cler. /I vola. l2m0. CcmaIaUng of
a SerIes of EngllBh atrecta, translated Into French, German, .
SpanIBh and Italian _pettively. The seVeral volnmea designed
.. mutnal Ke18 to each. PrIce per volnme, 1 \!II

Spanish Text-Books.
Alan'. Spanl.1a Being a New, and
Eur Method of the SpanIBh Language; after the STI'
tem of A. F. AD, Doctor of Phfioaophy, and Proteaaor at the
College of N81l8II. Flat AmerIcan EdItion, reviled and enlarged.
121110. 1411 pages, 16
KEY TO THE EXEROlBES. Separate volnme, 16
Spanbh"eaeher and (lonoqalal PbraM-
Book. An Eaay anC Agreeable Method of AeqnIrIDg a SpeeklDg
Knowledge 9f the IfIlanIah Language. 18m0. 298 pagea, _ 60
De Vere'. of' the Spanbla LIlJlC1IIlP.
With a Hfatory of the Language and PlllCtleaI ExereIHs. 121110.
IITS pagel, 1 00
1II0ral_ ProgJIMIIlve Spanbh Reader. With an
Analytical Study of the Spllllleh Language. By AsV8T[X JOaK
MOB.u.D, A.M., H.M., Professor of the Spanish Language and
IJterature In New York Free Academy_ 121110. 1 00
8BB nn O. TBU VOLlIJIlI.
DigitIZed by Coogle.
J

Dlgit,.ed by Coogle
DigitIZed by Coogle

DigitIZed by Coogle
I
.
/ ,
,'"r" //
.'
"
AN
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR
01' TDB
ITALIAN LANGUAGE
PROGRESSIVELY ARRANGED
lrOB ~ J I . VI. Olr
S'CHOOLS AND COLLEGES.
BY
G. B. FONTANA

NEW YORK:
D. APPLETON 4; CO., 448 & 44-1S BROADWAY.
1864.
Digitl&ed by Coogle
fuu',T
lIIItencl ..... kI .&Ill II eaa.r-, III tile ,..... 1811, _
G. B. I'OKT.A.K.A.,
la tile Oledr. .. Ollloe II tile DIIIrIa& Ooan II tile DIIIrIa& II M=_" 1111
DigitIZed by Coogle
PREFACE.
THE study of languages offers to a discriminating
observer not only a collection of words and idioms,
but the knowledge of customs, tastes, and national
pe'culiarities. It is true that there are general prin-
ciples which may be applied in common to all lan-
guages,-the system of ideas h8.ving everywhere
the same foundation, - but these are, in their appli-
cation, subjected to conditions peculiar to each peo-
ple. The formation of words; the construction of
p ~ e s , and the modulation of sounds, are but
the results of the national charaoter pervading the
minutest details of a language.
The Italian language, like all others, has national
characteristics. The strength of its' metaphors, the
conciseness 'Of its phrases, its flexible adaptability to
thought, its sonorous terminations, expressive articu-
lation, and musical prosody, are the living monu-
ments of a people eminently artistic, and endowed
with a high organic sensibility. Their early oppo-
sition to foreign despotism, and triumph over bar-
barism during the political struggles of forty Italian
DigitIZed by Coogle
r . ~ ' ' ' ) ., ~ : ' .
IV PREFACE.
republics, created an elegant, energetic, and express-
ive language, possessing an innate nobleness and
beauty.
A logical and philosophical method is therefore
necessary to impart the Italian language, as well as
intelligence, memory, and a musical ear, on the part
of the learner. The latter attainments are often to
be found, but there is no Italian grammar within
my knowledge which combines all the requisites of
a clear and concise treatise; some aiming to teach
the classical tongue of the thirteenth century, others
to give the mechanical translation of words and
phrases, without rules and precepts.
The object of this work is to present the elements
of theianguage as it is spoken to-day, in its simplest
garb, both theoretically and practically.
The grammar is divided into two parts, embracing
sixty lessons and sixty exercises. The first part is
exclusively given to rules indispensable to a general
idea of the language; the second is framed for
those who are desirous of having an insight into its
theory, and consists of synonyms, maxims, idioms,
and figurative expressions. The student will thus
be enabled to observe the distinctive features of
the two languages: the strength and gravity of the
English - man, in his foll vigor; ~ softness and
elegance of the Italian - woman, in her pArfect
beauty.
G.B.F.
DigitIZed by Coogle
INTRODUCTION.
To begin a course of lessons in Italian with the arti-
cle, and, after having stated that il is used for the mas-
cnline gender, and la for the feminine, to caU upon the
pupil for an exercise, is not at aU logical. The pupil
must first know that libro, a book, is of the masculine
gender, because ending in 0, and taoola, a table, of the
feminine gender, because ending in a; and then he can
properly apply the article, and say illibro, la taoola.
The method adopted in this grammar consists in not
introducing any part of speech, except a few cODJlecting
words, without having first given its appropriate rule.
The first lesson is therefore exclusively given to gen-
ders of nouns. As the pupil knows nothing but the
genders, he can write no exercise; hence, no exercise is
attached to the first lesson.
In the second lesson the pupil finds the article, the
personal pronouns, and the auxiliary verb to M'U6.
These, together with his previous knowledge of the
gender of nouns, give him material enough to write a sea-
tencej consequently, he is furnished with an exercise.
The third lesson embraces the plural of nouns: not
aU the rules for the formation of the plural, but simply
those necessary to one commencing the language. The
remaining rules are introduced after things more import-
ant and useful to a beginner have been considered.
DigitIZed by Coogle
p

VI lftBODlJOTION.
Progressing thus gradually and methodically, the
pupil becomes familiar with the language in a short
time, and much effort.
The irregular verbs, which in other grammars occupy
,one third, and sometimes half of book, have been
simplified and reduced to rules, which are given in a
single lesson. '
The indefinite pronouns have been placed in three
classes: those used for persons, those for things, and
those for persons and things.
In Italian dictionaries some English words are found
with two or more corresponding Italian words, which
would naturally lead the pupil to use indiscriminately
the one or the other i yet no two words have, in Italian,
precisely the same import. The directions for the proper
use of these synonyms have been given, in the course
of the lessons, under the head bearing that caption.
No definitions have been given for, the various parts
of speech, as it is presumed that no one studies the
grammar of a foreign language without first knowing
that of his own.
Several rules common to both languages have not
been noticed, to avoid complicating the work. In such
cases the pupil can follow the precepts of his own
language.
Particular pains has been taken to finish the lessons
in pages, so that the vocabulary is always found on
the same page as the exercise.
DigitIZed by Coogle
I1I1TBODUOTION.
m
In the arrangement of the vocabularies, the English,
and not the Italian words, are placed alphabetically;
for, knowing the Italian word, the pupil has no need of
looking it out.
The exercises contain words and expressions in com-
mon use on topics which constitute daily familiar con-
versation. The .forty exercises of the first part are pre-
ceded by their corresponding vocabulary, so that the
pupil can proceed in his study without the aid of a dic-
tionary. But if he feels the need of a dictionary, he
should procure a good one. Pocket dictionaries' are
only useful to travellers.
When the pupil has acquired a sufticient knowledge
of the language to allow him to pass to the second
part, he is left free, in applying the rules previously
learned, to select those expressions which he thinks
mast fit to convey the English idea. Oonsequently, no
vocabulary is attached to the lessons.
The exercises of the second part are more difticult
than the preceding ones. Some of them contain extracts
from celebrated poems, translated into plain prose, so
that the pupil may compare his Italian translation with
the original, which has been inserted for that purpose at
the end of the book. Others are biographical sketches
of the most prominent among the Italian writers i by
which means the pupil, whilst acquiring the language,
may become familiar with the life and works of some
of the classic Italia.n authors, such as Manzoni, Alfieri,
Tasso, Petrarch, and the father of the Italian language
and literature, Dante Alighieri.
DigitIZed by Coogle
,
DigitIZed by Coogle
ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
PRONUNCIATION.
THE pronunciation of a spoken language can only
be acquired perfectly from the voice of a native.
An attempt to represent the sounds of one language
by the written approximate sounds of another,
would fail to give a perfect idea of its peculiarities.
It would, therefore, be impossible to give rules and
exoeptions for the various shades and almost imper-
ceptible gradations of some of the Italian sounds.
But, as a native Italian teacher is not always to be
procured by those desirous of acquiring a knowl-
edge of the language, a few general remarks are
here given on some of the letters whose pronuncia-
tion differs essentially from the English.
There are but twenty-one letters in Italian, viz. :
A., B, 0; D, E, F, G, H, I, L, lI, N,
... bI.. chi. ell. .. er, st. Ihk'bb, '. eI, -. ....
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
0, pl. GOO, Qrl'. ... tI. 00, vi. 4sI&a.
g- Wand 11 do not beloDg to the Italian alphabet, nor haTe they
&D'1 oorrespondiDg IOUDd In the laugaage. The k and tie are II1lpplied
111 cA, ~ , or ,; .. , Keel, cAigliG; euep&, ecc.; expreIII, 'lpr_.
The letter j Is almoIt en&irelyl'flieotAld by modern writerB, and is repre-
IIIlfled by , at the beginning or in the middle of WOrdB, or by ii at the
ad ; .. , Wri, Giato, principii, notjm,lIjato, priMipJ.
DigitIZed by Coogle
PBOlIUNCIA.TIOlf.
VOWEIB.
The vowels are pronounced 88 follows:
.A. like the a in father; as,fame, pane.
E like the e in met; 88, penna, metto, except at
the close of a syllable, when it is somewhat more
prolonged and open; 88, pena, 11e1UJ.*
The usual way of teaching that the Italian e has,
beside the close sound of the e in met, an open
sound corresponding to that of the a infaJe, h88 led
pupils, particularly in. singing, to mispronounce
this vowel, giving to it the closing sound of the
i. This is an error which should be care-
fully avoided. Prolong the e 88 much 88 you like,
. but always give the same sound from the beginning
to the end. Say pe-e-e-e-nt, but never pe-e-e-i-ne.
I like the ee in feet; 88, fine, 'Vino.
0, as pronounced in English, has a terminal sound
of the Italian u; thus, no is really pronounced in
English fW-U; or, expressed in English sounds, fWoOO.
The Italian 0 is pronounced precisely like the first
part of the English 0, without the terminal sound of u.
Pronounce roU, and stop on the middle of the word,
and it is precisely the Italian 0.*
IT When 0 is preceded by i or .. it is alightly JD01'e prolonged and
open. but has never the oloeing IIOUDd of the " ; as.jitw c:uor ,now.
U like the 00 in root; as, fune, rupe.
CONSONANTS.
o or 9 followed by a, 0, or u, are pronounced 88
in English; but, when i>llowed by e or i, c has the
*.or "orela w\&h a doable -..bIg. "hoIe nIIl ........ _ IlIdeD1U1ed bJ the
pronamI'UoD of l1li1 -mreI, -11M, lI3I.
DigitIZed by Coogle
PBON'DNOLU'IOll. 3
sound of cA in: cMrry i as, omc&, cMna, and g the
sound of g in gem i as, gemma, giro.
g- The hard II01lJ1d of CG, co, ctI, anel fIG, flO, IfII, beoom.1Oft b1
the iDation of an i j .. the 10ft II01lJ1d of c., ci, and get gil beao_
hard 117 the iDIertioD of all A. Thus. thl1 an
The hard IOIIDd b1 CG, cAe, cli, co, ctI; fIG,gAe, IJIri, flO,,,,
The 10ft II01lJ1d 117 cia, c., rio N, cit; gia, get gi,p, git.
On always fol'lDB one syllable, in Italian, and has
the sound of ni in poniard i as, ignaro, Signore.
Gl is pronounced as in English except before I,
when it has the sound of 11 in brilliant i as, figlio.
goo Oli h .. the EniliBh IOWld in mgligefillG, AfI{Ilia, AfllIlicGrIO.
H has no sound in Italian; it is only used, 1. To
harden the soft sound of c and g. 2. To prolong
the sound of the inteljections; as, aA I aAime I
3. As a mark of distinction in the present of the
verb avere, to have.
D and t have the English sound, with the differ-
ence that in Italian they have a softened character,
while in English they both are strongly and mark-
edly associated with a somewhat explosive force.
Tt or dd have the sound of single English" or do
R has the same sound as in English, but at the
end of a syllable it is always heard as a distinct letter,
being aspirated with a slight snap of the end of the
tongue. The two words darao and dado can never
be. mistaken in ..their pronunciation, as is the case in
Ep.glish with the and JatMtr, because,
while in. English the r is often pronounced without
a ringing close, in Italian it receives its full sound,
distinctly showing its prese.ce.
S, at the beginning of words, has the hissing
Bound as in English; as, Bano, Beno, sino, BOno, BUao
DigitIZed by Coogle
PBOIroNCU,TIOlJ
B between two vowels, or followed by h, a, f', or 11,
is pronounced with a soft sound, somewhat like II;
as,base,
IF 8 retaiDa the abarp. billling IOUDd. 1. In ClODlpound words
whOll8 primiti ... e Is word commencing with '; &I. ri-lafto. 2. In
words with the pronoun .i afIlxed to them; &I. dtcHi. credwi.
8. In adjectives ending in 010. 014. 0Ii. Ole; &I. glori030. glorioatJ.
Be followed by e and i, like Bit i as, 8ceNffo, 8cismc6.
Z, like az in all words which have I in the English
word; as, ZOM, zone; galletta, gazette.
It is pronounced like til when preceded by l or f',
or followed by two vowels, and in nouns ending in
ZIIO, or in verbs whose infinitives end in zzare i as,
calza, lorza, aziime, ragazzo, spazza.
It has nearly the sO'Ulld of 8 in all words ending
in anza, enza i as, speranza, penitenza.
Single consonants are generally pronounced soft;
as, lato, COIrO, pena.
Double consonants are pronounced in one sound,
but stronger and more marked than when single, by
dwelling on the preceding vowel, and pronouncing
it with an accent; thus, latta, carro, penM, though
forming their syllables lat-to, car-ro, pen-M, should
be pronounced as if written Id-tto, cd-rro, pe.nM.
DIPHTHONGS.
Diphthongs are short and long; in each of them
the vowels must be distinctly heard, with the
ence that in the long diphthong each vowel is dis-
tinctly articulated, as if making a syllable for itself;
as, E-u-ro-pa i in the short diphthong both vowels
are pronounced unitedly and quiokly; as, guancia.
DigitIZed by Coogle
ACCENT.
ACCENT, in its common acceptation, is but a sign
placed over syllables to show that they must be
uttered more forcibly than the others. The Italians
have but one accent, the grave ('), which is gene-
rally used to mark the distinction between words
otherwise written alike: as, amo, I love; amd, he
loved; and also in words which in their origin were
written with an additional syllable; as, bonta, tJirlu,
instead of bcmtate, tJirlu.te. This accent is limited to
vowels at the end of a few words; yet every word
has, in Italian, its unwritten accent, because every
word has a vowel on which the voice must chiefly
dwell. This inflection of the voice, this rhythmic
accent, being the most marked and the most varied
in Italian, is, of course, the most difficult to be
acquired by foreigners who are not in immediate
correspondence with natives, because harmony can-
not be expressed by written words, and yet har-
mony is to a language what color is to a picture.
It is true that the vowels have, in Italian, an
expressive significance: that the open sound of the
. a and 0 naturally expresses strength and gravity;
the meagre sout;ld of the e and " meekness and
feebleness.; the obtuse sound of the ", something
sad and disagreeable; and that these vowels, prop-
erly modified by the sounds of corresponding con-
sonants, make the language eminently expressive,
DigitIZed by Coogle
8
A.COD't.
and 10 ftWble as to give to the worda a diatinctiV8
character, and eltablish an immediate analogy
between the 10und. and the ideas; but thia power
of expression, as in the words rimOOmbare, ululare, .
,-u,gire, luZmilM, could not be brought to its height
without the necesBary proportion of measure in the
modulation of articulated sounds.
The rhythmic accent should be considered under
two different aspects: 1, as a means to give lignifi.
cance to a word; 2, as a meana to give harmony to
a word. Take, for example, the word ~ , and
pronounce it, giving to each syllable the same qwm-
tity, and you find that the word has neither meaning
nor harmony; pronounce it as if with an accent on
the first vowel, raise the voice on the first syllable,
and dwell upon it during the time occupied by the
other two (oo-,pHo), and you have given to the word
a pleasant modulation, and the meaning of I amw.
Change now the accent from the first to the second
syllable, give to it the quantity of the first and
third (cap-i-to), and you have changed, not only the
harmony, but also the meaning of the word, which
is now under8tood. Then pronounce the last vowel
as if it were accented, give to the last syllable the
quantity of the two others (ca-pi-tO), and you have
given to the word a new harmony and a new mean
ing; viz., He arrived.
To the above example another may be added, in
the w o r d ~ . Pronounce it with the accent
on the second a, as ca.;pWd-no, and you have
expressed the word captain. Pronounce it with the
accent on the first a, as o o ~ , and you have
changed the meaning of the word into they am".
DigitIZed by Coogle
AOCBl!l'1'.
.,
From these practical illustrations, it may be seen
that the purity of pronUDciation, in Italian, is based
on the principle of giving to the accented syllable a
certain pause, ocoupying in utterance nearly the sam.e
length of time as that given to the others together,
as if the meaning of the word were contained in
that single syllable. This is obtained by dwelling
on the accented vowel without much prolonging it,
and emitting the others rapidly and less foroibly.
The accented vowel must, therefore, receive more
or less quantity, according to the number of sylla-
bles oontained in the word. Thus, the syllable cd
is properly shorter in cd1Mo than in ~ ,
because in the former there are but two follow-
ing vowels, while in the latter cd is more pro-
longed, because followed by three syllables, which
must be pronoUDced in the same length of time as
the first.
Monosyllables and dissyllables cause no embarrass-
ment. Polysyllables are divided into four classes:
1. Parole troncke (trunoated words), ending with
acoented vowels; as, sckiatJitu, Uberld.
2. Parolepiane (smooth words), with the rhythmio
accent on the penultimate. This olass is the most
numerous in the language, comprising all the infin-
itives ending in are and ire, and the first, second,
and third persons singular, and the first and second
plural of the past and imperfect tenses of aH verbs ;
as, perdorw, cantare, partire, camava, cantai.
S. Parole 8d'r'UCCiole (sliding words), with the
rhythmic accent on the antepeuultimate, comprising
the third person plural of the past and imperfect of
all verbs; as, folgore, amavatW, perdeUero

DigitIZed by Coogle
8 ACCDT.
4. Pf1IIVil6 biBdrucciole (lQore sliding words), with
the accent on the last syllable but three; as, dite-
melo, ordinano.
The predominance of words belonging to each
of these classes, according to the ideas the writer
wishes to convey, gives to. the expressions a flowing
smoothness, or a solemn gravity.
The two following stanzas from TaB80 are given
with the object of exemplifying the different influ-
ences produced by their rhythmic construction. .
Teneri sdegni e placide e tranquille
Repulse e cari vezzi e liete paci,
Sorrisi, parolette e dolci stille
Di pianto, e II08pir tronohi e molli baci ;
Fuse ta.i COIle tutte, e poecia unille,
Ed al Cuoco tempro di lente faci,
E ne formb quel si mirabil cinto
Di ch'ella aveva il bel fianco mcointo.
Genu lilJ., amto 16, S-, 25.
Chiama gli abitator delle ombre eterne
n rauco non della tartare&. tromba ;
Treman Ie spaziose atre caverne,
E l'aer cieco a quel rumor rimbomba.
Ne stridendo giammai dalle superne
Regioni del cielo il folgor piomba ;
Ne Hi IICOI!8a giammai trema 1& terra
Quando i vapori in sen gravida Berra.
G/Jf'UI lib., canto 4, SlIG, 3.
The number of the vowels e and i, and the liquid
sound of the l, make the first stanza smooth and
flowing. The predominance of the a, 0, and r, makes
the second stanza powerful and terrible. The first
stanza represents the girdle of a beautiful maid; the
second, the effect of the Bound of a trumpet to call
the demons to council.
DigitIZed by Coogle
READING EXERCISE.
LA ITlLIA.
QUAL bani terra che il s6le illmnini con Idce pit&
serena 0 cbe risc&ldi con pih d61ce I DcSve un
pm vivido, un pih pliro, un pih spirabil &ere Hi esp&n.de r
DcSve s6rgono ruine pih f8mcSse e pita atte a congidn-
gere, ad ornare, a rinforzare la presente bell'zza colle
im&gini della passata potenza, di un' antica maesta,' di
un Umpo glori6so invano dai p6steri ai 16ro padri inn-
diato r A. quaI parte del m6ndo fu conceddta una mag-
gi6r OOpia d'ingegni, ed a questi una maggi6r attitddine
a1 ragionare prof6ndo e a1 delicato. sentire r D6ve si
parla una lingua che Bfa pih ricca di chi&re pareSle e di
m6di e1ettissimi, e che sfa, c6me la n6stra 10 e mirabil-
mente, id6nea ad espnmere i pih subHmi pensieri e gli
atretti pin teneri, arrendevole a ad 6gni deside-
rio, ad 6gni bis6gno, ad cSgni volonta, dOOile a trasOOr-
rere per una sc&la d'infinlti gradi, dalle armon1e pih
tenui alle pih gravi e soMnni, dai pih' d61ci su6ni ai pita
conciUti e veem'nti, dnico vincolo che tuttavia. con-
gidnge Ie n6stre membra divise, Ultima reHquia di una
fratell&nza temdta e spenta r QuaI m&i ham terra,
DigitIZed by Coogle
10
come la IUlica, bagn8.ta da due man, incoronata dalle
Alpi, irripta da mfile fonti, frequente eli citta magn{-
fiche e di amenissime v1lle, ora sUsa in verdi, feconde,
imlnense pian1ire, ora sorgente in c6lli ridenti per ogni
vagMzza, ora eretta in caUne eli monti, ehe nel
loro isUsso selftggio orrore mostrano. infinite belIezze,
e neUe foreste sterminate, e nei gioghi variamente diru-
pati ed aggruppati, e nelle v&lli fortunate, e nelle acque,
o scorrenti in rlvi fresehi e molli, 0 romoreggianti nei
torrenti,o percateratte balz8nti, od inlUnpidi l&ghi ehidse
e riposate 1 0 ltali&ni, prostr&tevi, venerate questa
sacra Urra che vide s6pra se c6rrere tanti nemici, tanti
stranieri, tante emde1i fazicSni, e tante guerra combat-
tersi, e tanti incendi, tante morti, tanti tradimenti, tante
rapine eommettersi, e pur sempre rimase bella, vagheg-
pta, desiderata t Ma baciando questa c1&ssica Una,
cercate in essa con Ie vestigia che i v6stri
maggiori v' impressero, e segditele.
SF" The AIllowiDg words should be canfu1JT p1"OJlO1IJUleC and c0m.-
mitted to memory.
Ug17





Brutto. Not .




No.
WbJ



Clai. Poor.




PHeTO.
HoUle




Cua. POII8ible


Poui6ile.
So. .




Coil or d. Looldng-glaaa.

Speccldo.
Siater-ia-law



Cognata. &me



SU.IO.
Brother-in-law.

OGgfUJlo. Dear



Oaf'O.
Easy.



PacUe. TolplDd

Pu.aTe.
Handkorohief


Fauoletto. Nut.




J7m1uTO.
Wide.




La"fIO
As. .



Poiclal.
Huband


MarUo. Good morning

Btulft gioNIo.
DigitIZed by Coogle
~
PARTS OF SPEECH.
~
LEBBOll' :t.
NOUNS.
1. NoUNS, in Italian, have two Genders,-the
:Masculine and the Feminine.
2. Nouns ending in a are feminine; as, Doona,
woman; penna, pen.
Ex0l!:P1'10lll.
1. Proper DIoIHI. and n01lll8 u.preaai.ng rank. title8, and prot..
IIloDa of men; as Petrarca. Petrarch; Papa. Pope; Duea, Duke ;
Profeta, Prophet.
2. N01lll8 ending in..,. deri:,ed from the Greek; u, Oli.a, cli-
mate ; idio_. idiom; poems. poem.
N: B. - See list of mascaline n01lll8 ending in a. page 228.
3. Nouns ending in 0 are masculine; as, Uomo,
man; o1JJero, tree.
ExOl!:P1'1Ol'I8.
. 1. Pr.opern&mell of1fOJDen; as, SqJfo. Sappho ; OaliplO, CaJnIeo ;
A"tID. AIeoto.
2. The words .co, echo. and mano. hand.
S. N01lII8 abbreviated in poetry; u. Dido, Dido. inatead of
Didoae; imago, image. iDatead ofimagi1Ul.
4. Nouns ending in 6 are either masculine or
feminine. Nouns appropriate to women, and those
ending in ie, tone, dine, and gine, are generally
DigitIZed by Coogle
12 NOUNS.
feminine; as, Nutrice, nurse; IfUperjicie, surface;
leJione, lesson; Cl'lW'Udine, anvil; origine, origin;
colaaione, brea.kfa.st.
5. N OUnB ending in me, re, ente, are masculine.
ExmIPr!olll.-FllmI, hunger; IJItme, hope; ,eMr" teftl'; col-
"'e, coverlet; pol""", dust; 'Cflre, axe; torre, tower; ".", pe0-
ple; mente. mind; aorgcflle. spring; correflle, current.
. OllSDV.A.TION. - Pupill acquafnted with Latin or French will8nd
no di1Iioulty in aacerta.ining the gender ot n01lllll ending in e. ThOll
which come 1IJlCler no given rule will be tound in the eDmplel ot the
illlowing leeaou, with the article prelixed.
6. Nouns ending in i are feminine.
ExCBPlIOllB. - Bllr6agianni, owl; eccliari, eclipae; pari, peer;
6rindisi, tout; Tllmigi, Thames ; eli, day, with its oompoundL
7. Nouns ending in 11 are feminine.
ExmIPr!Olll. - (Jeri, J'e8\18; Perfi, Peru; raga, ragout.
OllSDVAflON.-NolUI8 ending in a and tl retain their teminine
gender when to these terminations are added d, in prose, Qd te in
verse; e. g., Bonta, virtil, are always or the teminine gender, eva
whell written 6ontate, virtute, or 6ontlJtle, virtude.
N. B. - No nolUl8 in the Italian language end in unaccented u.
Pupile should commit to memory the ilUowing n01lllll, and aaoer-
tain their gender by the above rules.
VOCABULARY.
Axe Scare. G1aea (drinking) Bicc1&ier,.
Braee

.
Bllm,. Heart
euor,.
Butter
.

Barro. Knife ... . . ColteUo.
Candlestick Cantleli,r,. Oil . . ... Olio
Chair

Sedill. Spoon Cu.cc1&iaio.
Cheese CIICio. Sugar Zvcc1&ero.
Coat . . . ./l6ito Table Tllt/ola.
Fever


:

. Fe66re. Vinegar ./lceto.
Flower

Fiore. Water ./lcqva.
Fork .


.

. lIbrc1&etta. Wine Pino.
DigitIZed by Coogle
DEFDllTE ARTICLE. 18
LEBBOK II.
THE ARTICLE.
8. THEBE are in Italian, as in English, two Ani
cles,-the Definite and the IIidefinite.
OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.
9. The definite article, which in English is em
ployed only to limit the noun, has, in Italian, two
uses :-1, It limits the noun; and, 2, It shows the
gender and number of the noun.
10. The article is expressed in Italian
by il, la, and lao
11. n is placed before nouns of the masculine
gender beginning with any consonant except I or
B impure, i. e., B followed by a consonant; as, n
libro, the book; il vino, the wine; il Bole, the salt. .
12. Lo is used before masculine nouns beginning
with I, 8 impure, or a vowel, in which latter case it
drops the 0 and takes an apostrophe; as, Lo IW,
the unQle; la spirito, the spirit; l'amioo, the friend.
13. La, is used before feminine nouns; as, La,
tpada, the sword; la carla, the paper.
OBSEaVA.nOJl. -This feminine tbrm loses the IJ and takes an apo
trophe when the noun begins with a TOwel; as, L'IJlaimlJ,Z',rblJ.
N. B.-The TOWel is retained betbre names of countries and kiDJ-
dome; as, LIJ AmericIJ, lIJ .llIJZiIJ.
DigitIZed by Coogle
DDDlITB AB'l'ICLB.
PBBSOIUL PRONOUNS.
10 L
2'W no..
B,li. . Be.
Ell She.
.. Be or It.
..
.NW We.
Yoi You.
B,lillO. Thef."
BU.,.". Thef./.
Baal ... The1'
Al7XILIARY VBBB .6. VBRB. ro BA. VB. .
PBamft'
Ho I haft. I
1lIIi Thou bait. I
H Uehu.
.6.66ialo. Wehaft.
.6.... Y OIl haft.
HllltllO The1' haft.
N. B. - Let the pupU here oommlt to III8IIUII7 the 00D,j1Iptl0D. of
the entire "erb. (Bee page 197.)
14. In an affirmative sentence the verb follows
its subject, and must agree with it; as, 10 ho, I have;
vol amete, you have; erili am, he shall have.
15. To form a negative sentence, f'Um is placed
before the verb; as, 10 f'Um ho, I have not; vol non
at1ete, you have not; egZi f'Um am, he shall not
have. - .
16. To form an interrogative sentence, the sub-
ject, whether a noun or a pronoun, must be placed
after the verb; as, Eo loP Have I?-.Ame wi P
Have you ?-.Avrd egZi P Shall he have?
17. An interrogative negative sentence is formed
by placing non before the verb, and the subject
after it; as, Non ho lo P Have I not? -Non awls
wiP Have you not?-Nonavrd egliP Shall he not
have?
DigitIZed by Coogle
DliII'IlUTB ARTIOLE. 16
VOCABULARY.
And
.
E.- Odloua Odioto.
Bread

PGne. Or

O.
But
.
JIl .. PuaioIl Paricme.
Co&e

CqffI. PeDblte
.
2ftIperino.
RODor

0-.
::tr. ...
Pipe.
Madam 8igrwr .. t 8ale.
Milk . . La.I;W. Soldier .
.
801dGto
Mill
..
8igftori_ Star

....
8IdltJ.
Mr. or Sir 8igMre. TM.
.
...
Tf.
No.

..
NO. Yea
...
Sf.
If ftIIIon4 ." II 'fW8I, .I:L
BLUIPLBS.
H .... e you the tea !
No, Bir, I have not the tea.
Has he the milk !
He haa the milk and the oo1IiIe.
He baa DOt the pepper.
H.ve you the aa.lt!
No, Bir, I have not the salt.
H .... e you not the bI1It f
Yea, Bir, I haft the 1miiII.
10 AD ilJlt'ne.
... "'" woi il 'I ,
No. Sigrwre, io film lao U ta.
H. egli U Ia& , .
Egli laG ill.". l il cqTi.
Eoli flO" laG U pepe.
... "',. fIOi U 1.,
No, 8igrwre, io _ AD U ,IJI,
No" ."'" tIOi il coltello'
8l, Sigrwre, io AD U coUelIo.
EXERCISE I.
Have you the bread'll have the bread. Have you Dot the
butter? No, air; I have Dot the butter. Has he the cheese?
He baa Dot the cheese. Have you Dot the water? YeB, air; we
have the water. Have they Dot the.wintI? No, Bir; they have
Dot the wine. Hast thou Dot the tea? I have Dot the tea.
Have you the oofree? No, Bir; I have Dot the 006ee; they have
the ooft'ee. Have they the lugar? They have not the sugar.
Have you Dot the milk? I h.ve not the milk. Has he the
pepper? He has the pepper and the salt. Has he Dot the vin-
egar? No, he baa not the vinegar; we have the vinegar. Have
I the spoon? No, Bir ; you have not the spoon. Have you not
the knife? YeB, Bir; we have the knife and the tOrk. Have
they the water or the w i n ~ 'I They have the water and the
wine.
DigitIZed by Coogle
16 1'0BJUTIOll OF 'IJIB PL11BAL.
LlIBBOlf III.
FORMATION OF THE PLURAL.
PLURAL OF NOUNS.
18. MAscuLINE NOUNS form their plural by chang-
ing the final vowel of the singular into, i 88,
Pf1tlIG Pope. I Papi...... PopeL
VitlO WiDe. Yi,,'. . . . W"'m ..
Sal. Br.lt. Sali &lta.
19. Feminine nouns ending in a form ~ e i r plu-
ral by changing the a into e i 88,
Dota.. . . . . . WomaD. I Donu..... Womea.
P'A. Pen. PI"U PeIiL
20. Feminine nouns ending in 0 and 6 form their
plural by changing these vowels into i i 88,
MaflO Hand. I MaA' Hands.
Mlldr.. Mother. Mad" Mothers.
21. Monosyllabic noUDs, and nouns ending in ti, ie,
or with an accented vowel, are invariable. Their
plural is determined by the article; as,
n r. The king.
n barilagillAAi. The owL
La .peel. . . . . The kind.
LII llinil The virtue.
La ciltA The city.
Ire ..
1 ilarilagillAA'
Leapecie
Le virtil
Le cifta
Thekinga.
The ow1&
Thekinda.
The virtues.
The cities.
DigitIZed by Coogle
FOmUTION OF TIlE PLURAL. IT
22. The following nouns are irregular in their
.. .
\} plural:
UO/AO Han.
.. "'\ Dio . God.
UOlI&iA4. 1(eD.
Dei Goc1&
Buoi Oxen.
'.
i
; ~
. ,
Bue ... Ox.
Mogl;' Wile. Mogli. Wives.
J/allt Thousand. MilG..... Tho1l8&Jlcla.
23. When several nouns of different gender and
number follow each other, the appropriate form of
the article must be placed before each; &8,
n ",ar" lG mtUir" i/Gtadulli , "/Gtadulle.
The lather, mother, boys ad girl&
PLURAL OF THE DEFINITE ARTIOLE.
24. The plural of il is i; as,
llibri The boob. I hin;..... The wIDee.
25. The plural of 10 is gU; as,
Lo 6,eel&itlO The sequiD. I Gl16,eeAin4 ,The sequiDa.
Lo apirito The spirit. Gli IpirUi The spirits.
N. B. - Befure DOUDS commencing with an i, gli 10le8 the i, and
takes an apostrophe; as,
GZ' idiot;. The idiota. I GZ' igtlOTGnU The ignorant..
26. The plural of la is le, which drops the e when
the D:,oun following it begins with an e; as,
I.e 1J'ade. The swords. I I.e carte The papers.
I.e GAime The 8011ls. L'w", The herbs.
N. B. - This vowel ie, however, retained in the plural of in.....nable
D01IIII commencing with '; thlll,
L'., l'netlita, are alngular DOUDS.
I.e eta, I. ,retiita, are plmal D01UII.
2
DigitIZed by Coogle
18 I'OBIIATION OP THE PLURAL.
VOCABULARY.
B1rd
.

.
UcceUo. IDk . IlIClicJdnI.
Book

.


Lilwo. IDbtand

Cal_io.
Boot
.
Btinlc. :Man
. .
U-.
, Cat
.... GaUG. Neither

.NIHI, tII.-
DictioDar1' .m.iourio. Nor ...

HI.
~ ......
Ca,.,. Umbrella.


O.mllo.
EDglillb. 1,.".,. Paper

CII"'"
Frencll Fra,.ce_. P8Il


Pen ...
GramJpar


Gr __ tica.
Shoe.
..
ScaTJlllo
Bat.

.
.

Cllppello. Slipper

PiaaeUa.
If_ ..... &be ftdI, after I'-
ELUlPLES.
Bave :JOu the biftl ,
I haTe neither the biftl nor the
bb.
JIu the EDgJi.
hmaD
the pD-
lmiII r.Dd the peDS f
He hal the penlmife, but he hal
DOt the peDL
BaTe ;you the glua f
No, air ; I haTe .Dot the gJaas.
I have the boot.
A..,. .. i coUelli ,
Io ROta Ao til 'coUelU til I. lor-
cMIIt.
:sa I'I,.,lot il '-perillO Ie
pea .. '
Egli ha il _perillO, .. "Ii!lOtl
la I. pea""
A..,. .. il bicclier.'
No. rigllOTej Io _10 il 6icclic,...
10 10 10 Iffnlc.
EXERCISE. IT.
"Have you the books? I have not the books. Have you the
pens? I have the pens. Has he not the paper' He has the
paper and the ink. Have you not the knives ? We have the
knives, but we have not the forks. Have they not the tables'
They have neither the chairs nor the tables. Have I the look-
iDg-glaas? .You have the looking-glaas. Hast thou the hata'
I have not the hata. Have I not the oil? Yes, air; you have
the oil. Has the Frenchman the paper or the ink? He has
neither the paper nor the ink, but he has the knives and the
forks. Has he the glaas' He has neither the glaas nor the
water. Have you the coata? No, air; we have not the coata.
Have you the umbrellas? Yes, air; we have the umbreUaa.
Have the English the boota and aUppers? They haVe the boota
and the shoes, but they have not the aUppers.
D'gitozed by Coogle
P088JiI8SIVE PBOl!1'OUD.
18
LEBBON IV.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
27. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS are preceded by the
definite article,' and agree in gender and number,
not with the possessor, as in English, but with the
object possessed.
II no libro {::. =.
{
llilpea.
La lUll p8'lf'lI Her pill.
POSBm!8IVE PRONOUNS.
JUSOULlNE.
BlDgal&r. P11ll'&l.
Ky n mio I mMi.
Thy. n tuo I tuoi.
HiI, her. n no I not
Our. n taOII1'o llIoatrl.
Your n tJOdro I tIOItri.
Their n loro Iloro.
I'ElIlNINE.
BlDgular. Plual.
La ",ill
La lull
La ....
La _trll
La eo"rIJ
Laloro
IA tAi
IA tuI.
IAne.
I.e taOII1'
IA tIOItre.
IA lorD.
28. Possessive pronouns take no article (loro
excepted)'when immediately followed by a noun in
the sil)gular expressing rank or kindred.
your 8011. '. vostro Jiglio.
, HiI brother Suo /r4lello.
Your lordahip, 8l1li rigIIoriIJ.
Their brother. n loro /rlJtello.
N. B. - The article must be 1lII8d if the pronoun iblloWl the noun i
it the noun ie 1lII8d in the plural, or in a diminutive ibrm ; if pre-
eeded by the 'Words BigIIore. 8igftOTIJ, 8ignorillIJ, or by any adJeo-
tiTe; II, '
My brothers
Your brethers.,
My little brother.
Mybrother
I tAwi /r/JleZZi.
I wodri /rlJtelli.
n tAio /rlltellillO.
n /r/JUllo ",iD.
DigitIZed by Coogle
POS8IIII8IVE PBOliOUNB.
VOCABULARY.
AmericI.D.
Brother
Daughter
Enemy.
Father
Friend
Glon
Hol'88
Italian
LUll ,
AtUrlcIlM.
FrGtdlo.
Figliflo
.Mmico.
PGtlT'.
Amico.
GvtJRIo.
Cllt/GUO.
lIaliGflO.
y-.,..
Has mylllster her boot f
Mylllster baa her book and her
pen.
Han your friends my dog f
No. sir; they han Dot YOUl'dog.
but they haTe your flowers.
Has my brother their birds f
He has your oat. but he baa Dot
their birds.
Mother
MooD.
Nation
Peacil
Picture
Rich
B.emone
8iater
Scm
. Work
MGtlT'.
Lvfl ..
oMuiolll.
IApU. IIIIIIitG.
QuaclTO.
Rieco.
Ri_ao.
&wei""
Figlw.
IAtIOf'O. optf'fIo
HG miG _ilia il no lillTO 1
.MiG 'Of'ella fIG il nolillTO la lUG
jIIBfIIJ.
Ea"no i tIOdf'i IImlei il tAW ell'" 1
No. rigMre; uri _flG"flo il tIOdf'o
eane. fAIl "Ii fIG"M i tIOIITi .ftori.
Ell mw /Tatello i 101'0 ucellU.
Egli fIG il fHITO ga,tto. .tAG ,gI.
till" fIG i 101'0 tM:eelli.
EXERCISE m.
Have you my pen? No, sir; I have not your pen. Have you
Dot my book? I have neither your books nor your pens. Have
I not your pencil? No, sir; my sister has my pencil. Has my
mend 'your penknife? He has not your penknife. they
Dot his They have not his handk8rchlef. Have
your brothers my ftowara? No, air ; they have Dot your ftowers.
Has your sister my gloves? Yes, sir; she has your gloves and
your pencil. Has he my paper? He has not your paper. Have
they your chair? They have not )'our chair. Has your mother
my birds? Yes, miss; she has your birds. Has my sister your
picture? No, sir; she has not your picture. Has he not my
hat? Yes, sir; he has your hat and your gloves. Have your
mends my horse? No, sir; they have Dot your horse, but they
have your dog. Has my mother your pencil? Yes, sir; she baa
my pencil, your dictionary, and their grammar.
DigitIZed by Coogle
ABTIOLES AFFIXED TO PBEPOSITIONS. it
,
LESSON V.
ARTICLES AFFIXED 'fO PREPOSITIONS.
29. THE Articles are affixed to certain preposi.
tions, with the change, omission, or addition of some
letters. .
SO. The prepositions most commonly joined to
the articles are, di, of; tI, to; da, from; per, for;
oem, with; in, in; BU, on, upon.
1!IDgaJar. P1ur&I.
IU801JLDIL
WDIIIIIm.
JIUoI7ULIIIL
-
Of the
{ Dot
del dello deZltJ dei degU delle
lliil llilo iii 10 llii lligli
iii ,.
! ~ } theL,O'
al alkJ alltJ ai ag7i. alle
.il .14
.,.
.i ,Ii .10
From tha{ Dot ::
dallo dalJ4 d4i dagli dalle
AI.
d.'.
Ai d.gli Alo
{ pel
pello peUa pei peg7i. pelle
For the Dot per il
perl. per 10 peri per ,a per 10
With tha{ .. ::
collo
colla coi cog7i. colle
_10 _10 _i
_,a
_10
In the
{not ~
nello neUa nei negZi nelle
ita 10 i.1o itai itagli i.'.
aui
On the S aul aullo auUa
~ D ~ .. 11 .. 10 .v 10 .vi .. ,a .. 10
N. B. - The abo",e prepoeitiona may be aeparated from the artiole,
ucept CO" iI. eon I. - WheD. the art.iale I1I8pua&ed from ptf'.10 azul
,Ii must be 1II8d. azul nner iI or i ..
DigitIZed by Coogle
POI!I8EIiIIlVE P&ONOmrs wrm NOun.
1(1. our } {n tAio, il "'''0
Of'll11, of our book. Del tAio, tid ROdf'O
To m:r, to 0lIl' Al taio, III I11III1'0
ll'rom m1, from our DIll tAio, tItalllOllJ'o
Mr, our } { 1 tAlei., ROdri
Of'll11, of our boob. Dei fAiri, dri Aottri
To '1111. to our Ai _it 'tli ..tri
ll'rom m1, from our . Dtd tAiei. dill tIOIIri
}UMa
}-
31. The name of the thing possessed, followed by
the preposition di, always precedes the name of the
possessor; as,
1ohn's book, n lib"o di GioIltJAAI.
AUXILIARY VERB E88ERE, 'TO BE.
PJUIIIJIlIT.
10 10M I am. I Noi ritJ_ We are.
Ttf rri Thou art. P'oi ride. You are.
EgZi I He i&. Eglino 10M The7 are.
N. B.-The pupil is nquired to be thoroughlJ aoquamted with
the ... oouJuptlon oftbis 'feria. (See page 197:)
DigitIZed by Coogle
ARTICLES AFFIDD TO PBEPOBmONBo
VOCABULAB.Yo
Bed . . . . . . LeIIo. Boom BIa .....
Dish .... Piaito. Boee 0' 0 ROI/I.
Earth . . . . Ten-/I. Salad. o 0
I_lGIa,
Handkerchief
'":colello.
Scourge FltIgeUo.
Humanity 0 . .
U_aaa. Ston BaU.egtJ.
Hubandman AgrieoUtwe. Bun . . Bole
Key 0 Chiafll. True Vero.
Mea, CGrflt. Tyrant 0 fir.a.o.
Napkin 0 BGlpietta. Uncle Zio.
Pianoforte PiaM/Orte. Uaetul .. . . . VIii
Is the b7 on the table t B IG eAia .. aullll IaIlOl& ,
The mea' is in the room. La eGrae , ",U. elaO/l.
M,y Mend haa my brother'. piano- n II&io GlAieo hIS il piaaqfort. tli
fone. , mio /rtdAllo.
Is the paper in the book t E IG ellrtG aellilwo)
Yea, sir; the paper is in the book. S), .ignore; III ellrla , ulIUwo.
EXERCISE IV.
Has my brother your friend's book? He has neither your
triend's book nor your sister's paper. Have I your keys? No,
sir; you have not my keys, but you have my 1iI.ther's penknife.
Have they not my daughter's handkerchiefs? No, sir ; they have
not your daughter's handkerchiefs. Has my siater your nap-
kin? Your siater has not my napkin, .An the books on the
table? The books are on the table in your room. Your enemy
has my brother's knife. Have they my key? No, sir; they
have not your key, but they have your friend's key. Is my
brother in your room? No, sir ; your brother is in my brother's
room. Have you the aalad? 1 have n81tner the salad nor the
vinegar. Haa your daughter my glovea? My daughter haa
your glovea and your handkerchief. Have you the water or the
wiue? I have the water and the wine. Has my brother the
bread? My brother has neither the meat nor the bread. The
paper is in my brother's book, and the book is in my siater's
room on the table. Have y o ~ n o t their piotures? Yes, sir; I
have their pictures and your pencil.
DigitIZed by Coogle
QUALII'l1lIG AD.JBO'I'lVI8.
LJl880ll' VI.
ADJECTIVES.
82. ADJECTIVB8 in Italian are variable, and agree
with their noUDS in gender and number.
QUALIFYING AD.JE0TIVJj5.
83. Adjectives ending in 0 are masculine; ~ ,
UOJIIO vimolO ttl 0fIUI0. :MaD 'rirtuows and honeR.
34. Adjectives ending in a are feminine; as,
Dota .. bell Ii_,.. Woman beautital .......
35. Adjectives ending in 6 are of either gender; as,
UOIIO """" ttl qfa6iZe JrIaa"tIe ad atI'able.
Dotau geUil. ttl lffftt.6il. Woman pnt1e &Ild atI'able.
36. Adjectives ending in 0 become feminine by
ohanging the 0 into a; as,
Uomo viriuolo. powro. Do" .. viriuoN. JIOH''''
PLURAL OF ADJECTIVJ!S.
37. Adjectives ending in 0 change this vowel
into i; as, Uomini virluo8i, poveri.
88. Adjectives ending in a change this vowel into
6; as, Donne virluoBe, porere.
39. Adjectives ending in 6 change it into i; as,
UOIIO or do" .. eor1ae. Uoal"Ior don", corleri.
40. Adjectives ending in ca and ga have cAe and
gke in the plural; thus, lunga, r&cca, make lungke,
ricc1&e.
DigitIZed by Coogle
41. Adjectives of two syllables, ending in co and
go, take eM and g. in the plural; thus, ricco, Iut'lgO,
make riccAi, lu/nghi.
42. Adjectives of more than two syllables, ending
in co and go, take no h, except antico, ancient, and
solingo, solitary, which become anticki, soling
N. B.-The ibllowiDg acijectiTes may insert or reject theA:
P1Wblico, publio ; pratico, akilful ; fIIIndico, begging ; aruUogo, anal-
ogou; 1OjUIico, 1IOphiItioaI.; ul"atico, wild ; ,",ico, pee-riah.
4:3. The adjectives bello, grande, santo, lose the
last vowel, and take an apostrophe when followed
by a noun commencing with a vowel, and drop the
last syllable when followed by any consonant,
except II or impure . '
Bello IJHCcAio
Bell' anello
Bel li6ro
Grande atorico
G1'4ntl'uomo
O1'4A baZlo
8anto 8te/4no.
84n" Antonio.
8aA Vinceuo.
N. B. - The plural of bel fa lin ; that of lIeUo is IItgZi: Bei li6ri;
i 1pICeAi. GraA is ued tor both JDaIIC1Iljne aacl 1lmIiDine 1iDgu-
--
. Buono, good; drops the 0 when the following
noun begins with a consonant, except II or 8 impure.
45. Adjectives may follow or precede the nouns.
46. Adjectives of two syllables generally pre-
cede the noun.
47. Adjectives of more than two syllables, and
adjectives expressing nationality, color, shape, and
taste, or those preceded by molto, much, generally
follow the noun; as,
Lilwo lI'rGnce".\ CtJf1PIZZo lIi1lnco'l T4tHJlG rotonda., UN dolc&
I'rmch book. White hat. Bound table. Sweet grapes.
DigitIZed by Coogle
VOCABULAlLY.
Beadtal.

.

Ihllo. Mach, ""7 Mollo.
B1aclt
.

. Nero. Need BiMJgfto.
Coach
....

CGrroIlIlG. Nun.



MofIGCGo
Courteou.ldnd,

eone.e. Bed .
.

.
B_.
Dn.
.

Vatc. Boman



BotuIlD.
~ t . .

Odoroao. SleeTe

..

MGllieG.
..
QiartlillD. 8weet


Dole
Good

.


Buono. Virtue

Vint.
GreI.t, large. GrGfIIU. White Bwru:o.
Green V".de. Yellow.

GiGlio.
EXAMPLES.
I haTe your good &ther big 10 All U FGA 10,1'0 del tHJICf'o
book. buOfl padr,.
My brother hu the white hat. Mio/rattllo 1aa il cappello biallco.
My friend hu my I!iater'. beauti.- II mio amico lG U bel callGllo Ili
tal horae. mia rorellGo
Have you the Englilb dictionary T .Ivett "ol il tlillil)llario I"IIZ- 7
They haTe my Bilter'. dreIa.' Em lta"lIo I. t1atc lli!"W aorellGo
EXERCISE V.
Have you your good father'. black coat? I have not his
black coat. Are your sisters in my brother's coach? They have
my father'. beautiful horses, and they have no need of yonI'
brother's coach. You are very kind, sir. Is your dictionary
very large? No, sir; my French and English dictionary is not
very large, but my friend's dictionary is '!fery large. Is your
sister's dreaI green or white? My sister's dreaI is not green.
Have you the white gloves with you? No, sir; my white gloves
are on the bed in my brother's room. Have they not my red
slippers? Yes, sir; they have your red slippers and your yellow
shoes. Is my friend'. red wine on the table? No, sir; your
friend'. wine is not sweet, and we have no need of his wine ; we
shan have my good friend's white wine. My mother's yellow
roees are not fragrant. .Are the roees of your garden white or
red T \The roees in illY garden are red; but they are not fra-
grant. Has not my friend your sister's beautiful picture? My
lister'. picture is not very beautiful.
DigitIZed by Coogle
TEBBS. 21
LBBBON VII.
VERBS.
48. ITALIAN VERBS are divided into three classes
or conJ\lgations, which are known by the termina-
tion of the infinitive.
49. Infinitives end in are, ere, ire.
N. B.-A few infinitiTell which do not end In either of theae
termiDa.tioDs are contractions; as.
Porr,. from poner,. to put; conliurr from coMue,r to conduct.
50. Infinitives in are belong to the first conjuga-
tion; as, amare, to love; cantare, to sing.
51. Infinitives in ere belong to the second conju-
gation; as, perdere, to lose; ardere, to burn.
52. Infinitives in ire belong to the third c9njUga-
tion; as, partire, to depart; swire, to hear.
53. Regular verbs are conjugated by changing
the terminations are, ere, ire, of the infinitive, into
the various terminations assigned to each person of
all the tenses of each conjugation.
INFLECTION OJ!' A REGULAR VERB OJ!' THE FIRST CONJU.
10 cao
2\& Cia'
B,li allla
GATION
.8.M.8.RE. TO LOVE.
PIII:8BIIT.
I love. I JVbi afltUlIllO
Thou loTellt. Yoi alllld.
He loves. Em allGno
Bee page 199.
We love.
Yelove.
Thqlove.
DigitIZed by Coogle
64. The verbs of this conjugation are tegularJ
except the four following and their compounds:
Gndare, to go; dare, to give;/are, todoi Blare, to stay.
66. Verbs ending in care, gare, take an 1 after the
c and g, whenever consonants are followed by
i and e, in order to preserve the hard sound of these
letters; thus,
.iIlGrlCGr,,} make .. 1tClet"II,} and not _me
Prf//Gr" pr,p" pregAnll, prIgS, pr".rll.
56. Verbs ending in oiare, gi4re, suppress the $
of. the root before e and i; thus,
Baciar., } make {baci, } and not {hacii', bacierll
.iIlGngiar" "rags, .. ngerll, "-,n, .G"""'O.
57. Verbs ending in gUGre, ckiare, and gkiare,
drop the i only before another i; thus;
Vegliar" } {."gli' fltglierO,} {.",lil, ","ro
.Piecliar" make piecid,piec1&iero, and not piecAU,piec1ero.
RGwAiar" raggl&i, rsgglierll, raggAii, raggAero.
58. The past participle joined to the verb Gvms
does not change its termination to agree with the
subject, but joined to the verb essere it always
agrees with the subject .
.MiG IOf'dlG All Gnlo. H1 aiater has hid.
EN _ellG a attdG. . H,11i1ter hu bal.
59. There is in Italian but one present tense
which expresses both a present action and the
habit of repeating the same action; as,
I am writiD" or I write, fa a.preIII8Il by' 10 ,crivo.
DigitIZed by Coogle
Tooa1l

Haughty
Proud
Beeerred
To sing
8ma1l
To speak
To atod7
VBB1I8.
VOCABULARY.
CAiIIlRIW'.
LiflgUllo
"NIIOJIioIo.
.. "iero.
Orgoglioto.
RberWito.
CaRtdr,.
Piccolo.
Parlan.
Studiar,.
That CAl.
To-morroll' Doman ..
To think P_r,.
Truth VeriIa.
Undoubtedly.
Voice. Voc,.
When Quatatlo.
Where Dow.
Well B,,,,.
Wh)' f beoa1l88 PercAa 1 perclal.
EXAMPLES.
Is Brf 1IiIter'. Toice Terf harmo- E la woe, tli .iII rorella IRIIlIo
ni01lll f af'tllOnioM r -
Where IIhall you sing to-m0rr01l' f DotH! caRter,t, tlomon; r
Do you Btudy the French or the Btutliale 141 lillgua Frallc, .. 0 la
EDr;lIsh language! lingua 1"111 .. , r
Why do you not apeak FreDoh! PercAa AM pGrlal, Franca, r
Beoa1l88 I haTe not studied much. P,rcAa 71011 10 etwliato mollo.
EXERCISE 'VI.
Why is your Biater 80 proud? Becauee ahe sings very well.
When will she Bing? To-morrow. Where? At my father's
house, undoubtedly. Why? Do you Bing? Yea, I Bing, and
my voice is good; but I am not proud. Do you call my Biater
proud because she is reserved? No, I do not call your Biater
proud becauee she is reserved, but becauee ahe thinks that her
voice is rich and harmonious; and the truth is that her voice is
Dot very harmonious. Have you studied the French language?
Not much. Do you apeak Italian'1 No, Bir. Is not your room
very amall? My room is not very amall. Do you study the
EngliBh language? Yea, Bir; I study the Engliah and French
Jangaagea. Is my father in the garden? He is in the garden
with my siBter. My triend's little bird Binga vf!lr1 well. Where
are my gloves? Your glovea are in my brother's room on his
table. Is your brother in his room? No, Bir; he is not in his
100m, and I have not the key. When will he be at my tiiaD.d'.
house? He will be at your friend'. house to-morrow.
DigitIZed by Coogle
DDO:R8TBATIVB ADJECTIVES.
LBBBOll' VIII.
DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES.
60. DOONSTBATIVE ADJECTIVES point definitely to
one object, or to several of the same kind.
QtIuIo, thI&
CotuIo,} that.
Qu",o,
I
00, thiI or that thiDg.
8tellO, }
Mederimo, lUll.
61. Questo determines an object near to or
named by the person speaking or writing.
62. Ootesto, an object near to the person spoken to.
63. Queilo, an object distant both from the per-
l!Ion speaking and the person spoken to.
o-VAUOlf.- QlUIllo is 1J8ed only with DOUDS oomDleDcing with
" or impure " or when it is at the eDd of the sentence. Before any
other OODllODloDt It makes pel, and before a TOwel quell'.
QIUIIIo rpeccAio. That IooJdng-gluL
Quulo libro 0 quello This book or that one.
QlUIll' amico. That friend.
Quel libro That book.
N. B. - Querto and !luello are often 1J8ed .. relative pronoUDS. in
the BeIII8 of the latter and the tormer. In this _, """to invarlab17
points to the lut-mentioned object; .. , Voi a1lft, il coltello, ell il
temperino; !llUleta lhono, !llUlllo a calt;tIO. Here """to baa re1'ereDoe
to temperino, and not to coltello.
64. (JiO (invariable) is used instead of quuta,
fJ.'IUlla, or cotesta coBa, this or that thing, or what; in
which case it is always followed by eke i thus,
Cw CM io ecriflO, what I write, mean. que.t" co.a CM io ecriflO.
Cao CM ttl .crim, what thou writeet, mean. cote. cOla CM tu .crim.
ca; CM .gii ecri"" what he writes, means !llUllla cOla CM 'fiJi .criw
DigitIZed by Coogle

DEI[ONSTBA.TIVE .AD.lBO'1'IVI8.
81
VOCABULARY.
AOIIdem7
A. T&rialolUl
....
Cloee, narrow
Coward
nay
DiflicuU
To lind
Happy.
Bow.
Acc"'iG.
AlHJro.
2'appefo.
BirtUo.
C0d4rdD.
Giorno.
Difficil
TrofJI1.r,.
Felice.
Come.
IndutriOlUl Indulrioeo.
F&18ehood Mm.ngna.
Large Largo.
:r-m. . L .. iofte.
Morning. MatliM, fAlJllillO.
Never. Noll; 1AIIi.-
Bong CI1.uo ...
Time Tempo.
To-day Oggi.
WhilDllioal CI1.priccioMJ,lria6elico
--,-
EXAMPLES.
:r. this your grammar!
Have you studied the T
Bhall you Bing this lOng T
II that pencil your brother'. T
I have this book, not that.
E querIG '11. flMtrl1. grl1.",matiCl1. 1
oS_ 1IOi ,tutlitdo ll1. leno .. 1
CI1.nterele fJOi querIG 1
.E quel 1l1.pia tli _Iro Irm'lo 1
10 lao quato libro, non quello.
EXERCISE VIT.
Is this my brother's dictionary? Your brother does not study
Italian. Thill is not hill >book. This is my Italian dictionary.
Is that man your good Cather's mend? My Cather has never
spoken to that man, and he.haB never been his Do you
find your French lOng di1Iicult? Yes, sir ; I find the French lan-
guage very di1Iicult. When will you Bing the Italian lOng?
To-morrow. I am poor, but you are avaricious and whimsical.
Is your carpet narrow or wide? My carpet is-neither narrow
nor wide, because I have no carpet. Have you studied your les-
lIOn? I have not studied myJeeson, because I have had no time.
Shall you wig with my sister to-:day? Not to-day. Why not?
Because I never Bing when she Bings. When shall I speak to
your Cather? To-morrow. Where shall I find my hat? You
will find your hat and your black glOvel! in my iather's room, on
the little table. I have no need of my black gloves. Is this
your Cather's piano? Yes, sir; this piano is my Cather's. How
does your mend speak the French language? He does not apeak
the French language very well. Shall you Bing this or that
lOng' I shall Bing this BOng, not that.
DigitIZed by Coogle
PBBSOIUL PBOBOUD.
L1I880lf IX.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
65. PusOlfAL PRONOUNS are words used instead
of noUDS, and serve to designate an object as belong-
ing to the first, second, or third person. They are,
Io tu egli eUa noi 1X>i eglino eUeno eao.
I thOli he ahe we 1011 thef, m. thef,/. h. 01' It.
which make, in the objective case,
Me te lui lei noi wi loro e880
me thee him her 111
66. Personal pronouns have the objective form
in the relations of possession (genitive), attribution
(dative), and derivation (ablative).
I, 10. He, EgU. She, Ella.
Otme, DI me. Othim, m lui. Othenelt, Di".
To me, .I/. mil. To him, .I/. lui. To heneIf, .I/. ".
From me, DG me. From him, DG lui. From henelf, DG If.
67. To give force to the expression, personal
pronoUDS are often followed by the demonstrative
adjectives ste880 and medesimo.
10 ""10 :pa.rlGi G tIOdro padre I myseJt spoke to your father.
BUG mederima. m a . n ~ il libro She henelt I!IeIlt the book.
N. B. - No pronoUD ill pre&xed to the word "lI .. in Engliah.
10 1IuIO. I 1IIllt. aDd not 10 mafeao.
68. Be is used only for the third person, and has
reference to the subject.
Egli :pa.rlG IIi .11 .. He speaks of himIe1t
Ella. "OR Gma. eM ., She loVell but herIel!
DigitIZed by Coogle
PIIBSONAL PBOIIOmm.
69. The pronouns fM, te, 86, where preceded by
the preposition oon, should be transposed and united,
with the elision of the n. Thus :
~ : :'} make { : : : ~ .
Coa.. -.
N. B. - Noaco. tI08CO. instead of "CO" flOi. CO" ,fIOl. are oblolete.
70. Loro in the dative takes no preposition, if
placed before the direct object; as,
Data loro 9",,10 libro. Give them thi8 book.
Loro in the genitive is elegantly placed between
the noun and the article without the preposition j as,
n loro libro. Their book. or the book ottha.
71. Instead of ella, la ca.n be used.
LA mi wol bttat. She 10". me.
72. Eg'l' and ella are often used as expletives in
the sense of U.
Egli a ""0. It ill true.
EUG a ilApouUrilI. It is impcllBible.
N. B. - B, 1II8d in BDgliah as an ezpletlve, ill gaera1l7 omitted
in Italian.
E ..,.0. It ill We.
E impoaribilt. It is impollllble.
73. E880 is moreover used for animate and inani
mate objects; and, with its feminine and plurals, is
elegantly written de88o, after the verbs eBBere, to bel
and parere, to seem. "
Egll a tlulO. It is he.
" Ni par 111-. It II88IIIIJ to be ahe.
ErG" d_, pGl ,,, iii. lUI "","iflO dell' eta.
They were, as thou art. in the momiDg otlilt.
DigitIZed by Coogle
Aaute
To 88IUl'8
Blow
Tobum
Cloth
To coat
Daughter-in-law
Father-in-law.
Howmuch
I..a:rge
PEBSONAL PBONOUD.
VOCABULARY.
AcvIo. Lut night
ADieur4r.. To look
Colpo. Mother-in-law
Brueiar.. N_
PIII&ftO. Prudent
CoeI4r.. 8hnnrd.....
JVUora. Bilk.
Svocero. Bon-in-law....
QuaRto WhiteD..
Largo Word
EXAMPLES.
r.n .". ..
Gurtlar ..
S.ocera.
Naao.
PnMlente.
Accorto.
Sela.
Genero.
BiancA ... .I'1I
Pllroill.
I have not BUIlg the Italian lOng,
'-_ it is toO long.
10 1&01& lao cantllto III CIII&.I'OII' 1la-
lillfUJ, 'pwcAi , .. olio I.",..
Your book is good for nothing.
I have spoken to my brother, not
to your frieDd.
n -iro libro 1&01&' 11.01&0 4 I&al14.
10 lao ptJrlllto II miD JrlltUlo, fIOI&
41 -'TO _ico.
EXERCISE VITI.
When shall you atudy your lel!l!On? I Bhall study my lel!l!On
when your aiater Bings her lOng. Will ahe sing the l&IDe lOng?
Yes, ahe will sing the same lOng with me. Why do you not
Bing the Italian lOng? Because it is difficult, and my voice is
not very harmonious. Will your voice be harmonious when yOu
sing with her? Undoubtedly. Do you speak to my father?
I speak to you, not to him. How much does this c10th COBt ?
Not much. Where is your father-in-law? He is in my broth.
er's garden with my good mother-in-law and his friend. .Am I
not very shrewd? Why do you think IO? Beca.uae I am prudent.
I have burnt their boob because they were good for nothing. Ie
it pot!Bible? Yes, it is pot!Bible. Who is with your mother?
Her IOn-in-law is with her. Is that man with the big nose your
mother's IOn-in-law? It is he. Where is my brother? He is
in my friend's room. Where is your friend's book? It is in my
father's room. Is your father in the room? No, sir ; my father
is not in the room; he is in my brother's garden with your good
sister's friend. My aiaters have been with your friends, and I
have been in my room with my mother. lIaa your mother been
with you? She baa been, and is always, with me.
DigitIZed by Coogle
DlDEFnnTE ABTIOLE.
LEBBO. X.
INDEFINITE ARTICLE.
74. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE is 'Uno for the mas-
culine, and 'Una for the feminine; as,
Uno '1*ekio. a lookiDHlaaa. UIIG dotallG. a WOIII&D.
75. Uno drops the 0 when followed by a conso-
other than 8 impure or I, or by a vowel; as,
UII UOIIIO, a man. UII libro, a boot.
76. The indefinite article must be repeated with
every noun; as, .
UII UOIIIO, tllIG dollllG till rGf/UflD. A. IlIAD. 1fODI&'D, and boy.
77. The indefinite article is omitted:
1. Before the adjectives pochi, a few;
moUi, a great many; as,
10 laD {POCki lilwi. I haTe {a fe" boob.
molli libri. a great lllADy boob.
2. Before a noun in the predicate after a verb
passive or neuter, and before a noun placed in appo-
sition with a noun or pronoun, unless it be con-
nected with some qualifying word or phrase; as,
.Mio fraJ.ello l mereGrate My brother is a merohant.
Egli l FrGlleue . He is a FrenchlJlAD.
JlfiD Jratello a till ricco mereGrate My brother is a rich merchant.
3. After the adjective, qualifying a noun, which
follows the words cosi, so or as; troppo, too; as,
COIl FGM' UOIIIO So great a maD.
7'roppo perieolOiG apeeollJlliotae Too dangerous a speculaticm.
DigitIZed by Coogle
88
Ilml!lFDlI'U ABTICLE.
4. After eL, or any other word expressing ad-
miration or surprise; as,
Clt.e lIel catlGllo I. Wha.t .. be&utiful hone I
QvGl aatIo I Wha.h fbol !
78. The indefinite article precedes the word 10k,
such; as,
Un tal fAIJtto Such .. fooL
Un tal cat/allo. Such a home.
79. The definite article is used instead of the
English indefinite article before nouns of measure
and weight:
Due tlollari la liblwa. Two dollars a pound.
Tr. IC.Uini la lIoItiglits. Three ahilliDga a bottle.
80. Uno is often used without a. noun, and is
sometimes suppressed.
Egli a "flO cAe cal.nnits ntH Be is a maD who ahmdeza eTer1-
indiaHntGtAIftte. b o d ; y ~ .
Egli a tIOrAO di catHfIIJ jafl&(l. He is a man of bad reput&tioD.
PARTITIVE ARTIOLE.
81. The partitive article is expressed in Italian
by the preposition di and the definite article:
10laodelpaM,4UI'inclaioCro,tkllo Ih&va bNlod, iDk,I1Ipl",pa.per,
.cuccAero, dellacarlll, dei zwri. and books.
82. The partitive article is omitted in a negative
sontence, or when we wish to make prominent the
object and not its quantity:
AfIIte del pane t . Ha.ve you Idly brea.d !
10 non lao paM. I h&va no bread.
10 lao fIlno ell acqU/J. I h&va wine and water.
DigitIZed by Coogle
D1DD'ISIT1I ARTIOLE. 87
VOCABULARY.
To uk .,. DOrAIIDdar,. Lolli.... Lu'll{/O.
Dendo8Ilt. Bmejic,taI& Modeety... ModaHG.
:Bitter. .II._ro. Mouth Bocctl.
To commence ClnAiDciar,. Night.... NotIc.
Condotl&. Odd miat&b Sproporilo.
To aonte. Con/_ar,. On the contrar,y .11.1 t:OfII'rario.
Gentle Gentile. To praiee Lodar,.
Hammer M"rullo. Short. Cono.
Te hope. Sperar,. Subject. Suddilo.
IndiapeDaable ltatlilpmlalriU. Then .II.llor", dtlllftl'.
HaTe you any friends !
I haTe no friends.
Ia me not a Tffr11ieautitul woman !
When did you apeak to my Biater!
.11._ coi ugli "mit:i1
10 DOD 110 "",ici.
Non i ,IIG tlM_M ulo kllG.
Q.ando pari .. " ",ill lOf'ellG 1
EXERCISE IX. "
Is not this a beautiful book ? Why do you call this a beau-
tiful book? Because it is a very IY&8Y book. On the contrary,
this book is not very 1Y&8Y. What a beautifUl picture! Has
your friend any good boob? Yes, sir; he has a few good boob.
How many? Noh great many. Have your brothers any birda?
My brothers have some very beautiful birds, but they do not
sing. When will you begin your French lesson? To-morrow.
Shall you begin your lel!llOn with my sister? Your sister has
studied the French language with my friend. With your mend!
where is he? Is he not a good man? I ask where he is. He is
in my brother's room. Do they study their English lesson?
They do not study their English lel!llOn; they sing an Italian
1ODg. Have you any good pens? I have a great many pens,
but they are not very good. Where ahall I study my lesson?
In your room. It is not very IY&8Y (d;) to study my lesson in
my room . Why? Because my brother, his friend, and his
friend's ugly sister, their'French lesson in my room.
Why do you call your mend's sister ugly? Because she has a
very short nOBe, aDd a very big mouth. Is she rich? Yes, she
is very rich. Then she is not ugly; on the contrary,she is beau-
tifUl. What an odd mistake! /1
DigitIZed by Coogle
8S
FOBKATIOlf OF THE PLURAL.
LESSOlf XI.
FORMATION OF THE PLURAL, continued.
83. N OUlfB ending in ca and go, require an h in
the plural to preserve the hard sound of the singu-
lar; as,
Duell. fAOIIIJrclI,l'iagtJ. make duclai. fIIOftIIrclai.l'iagM.
84. Nouns ending in cia and gia change ia into
e, if this termination is a diphthong; as,
BilllllCilJ. apiIIggia, make iila"c,. lpia.gge.
N. B. - OllfAicill. shirt. mikes CllfAici, in the plural. to diatba-
gaiah it from the singular. CAfAic a priest'. Teltment.
85. If the termination of the cia and gia is not a
diphthong, the general rule is applied; as,
Regia, 6ugia.. make regie. 6ugU.
86. Some nouns are used only.in the singnlar; as,
Bclaialta. race ; ""ie. descendants; FOf/CfIie. progeny;
Ma"" morning; Fole. ofFspring; .tirpe, stock ; c,,,to. hundred.
Others are used only in the plural; as,
Eleqv.ie. t a n ~ obsequies; MU', marriage ; """,,i. wings.
Bpomali, nuptial ritss ; 10riici.lICiaso18 ; pantalorai. panta.lOOD8.
87. Proper names of persons are, by antonomasia,
used only in the plural; as,
Gli ,sleall"dri; gli ,s""i6ali.
88. Names of metals in the plural express objeots
made of the same metals; as,
n I,rro. iron; 1lerri. iron took
DigitIZed by Coogle
I'OBKATION 01' THE PLUBAL. 89
89. Names of virtues in the plural express the
practioe of them; as,
L' elnwiu. the virtue of r.lmIgiYiDg.
I.e ,lnaoai,... practical r.lmIgi"riDg.
90. To proper names another name or a quality
is added when might be confounded with
others of the same family; as,
Errico prilAoglailo. Errico cfUllllo.
Pietro padre. Pidro.Jiglio.
91. Proper names of distinguished families are
often used in the plural; as,
I Medici. I Fa6lrii. I PiIoai.
MONTHS.
GennaJo January.
Luglio .
July .
Fe1Jbrajo February.
Ago8to
August.
Marzo March.
8eltembre
September.
Aprile April.
OUobre .
October.
Maggio . May.
Novembre
November.
Giugno June.
Dicembre
December.
DA.YS.
LunetA . Monday. Giovedl
Thursday .
Tuesday. Venert.R
Friday.
Mercoletn Wednesday. Babalo
Saturday.
Domenica Sunday.
SEASONS.
Primawra
Spring.
I Aulunno
Autumn
.Beta
Summer. Inwmo
W'mter.
('. :
- .
..
DigitIZed by Goog Ie
I'OBJUTlOlI OP TIIB PLUJUL.
VOCABULARY.
Beall . .




FA_
Butta .


BoIIMtt.
Couapudou



C_ptIgaO.
CcIIlTflDt


eo. ....
Coarap

Ctwtl{/f/io.
~ ....

EgUiArao.
Famil7'

F_igliG.
I'ralt . ' 1'rdD.
lIiBtorr


bIoriG.
m1l8trioul




Bl.",.,.
Haft 701l bmaght m7 BhirtB!
Haft:rou m7 am-018!
I have nel.ther IIOiIIOlI lUll' lmives.
Haft ;you the DIoIDe of this vege-
table! '
Baft 701l 871eatila!
Lentil


Ladt.
Name




Noae.
Naaue



Narll.
OripL




0ril'_
Pea





PUell&.
Projeot

.


ProgdI&
Slaft



SchiAfJo.
8ucoa.



8taec_
'me

.4llJero.
Vegetable IAp_.
A .. tIOi porlGlo " .w CGMU ,
.4"'" tIOi " tIIie Jorlriri ,
10 _10 III Jorlliri. III colIeUI.
.4"'" tIOi il .-. Iii fINIIo le-
pm,'
A"", tlelle 1m" ,
EXERCISE X.
Where is your brother? My brother is with my sister. Ale
not your sisters in the convent? No, they are not in the con-
vent; they are not nUDS. Where are your tools? In my broth-
er's room, on the chair. The Roman soldiers were husb&nclmtlll.;
the muts and vegetables which they had in their ga.rdeDa are the
origin or the DaDles or some illustrious Ca.milies : the Lentuli, from
lentils; the FaliJii, from beans; and the PilOfl6, from peas. The
wives are the companions, and not the slaves, or their husbandB.
The stars and the oxen were among the god8 or the 'Egyptians.
The sleeves or my coat are very short. Have you the 1ICiama?
I have the buttons or my pantaloons. Where are your daugh-
ters? They are in their rooms. Are your brothers in their
ltores? Yes, sir; they are in their ltores. Have they many
boob? No, sir; they have not many boob, but they have &
great many pictures. Have they a great many beautiful pic-
tures? They have many pictures, but they are not very fine.
Where are your shirts? They are in my sister's room. I have
a great many trees in my garden. Have you many books ill
your room? I have a few boob, but they are good.
DigitIZed by Coogle
/
IBBEGULAR VEBBS, FIBST OONJUGATION. 4:1
LEBBO. XII.
IRREGULAR VERBS, FIRST CONJUGATION.
.IlND.IlRE, TO GO. D.IlRE, TO GIVE
PJIlII8Bl(T.
V lido or tJO



I go. Do




I give.
VIri .





Thou goeat. Dai



Thou givest.
Va . .



He goes. Da



He gives.
.Iltulia1llo



We go. Diamo



We give.
.6.ndale



You go. Dale.

." .


You siva.
Vallno



Thq.go. DIJllno



Thqgiva.
N. B. - For the remaiDing teDaes, aee page 20L
92. The verb andare requires the preposition. a,
when followed by an infinitive, or when it expresses
going to some as,
VIIdo a parlIJre. I am. going to speak.
Vado al mercalo. I am. going to market.
If we of!going to any person's house, da is
used; as,
VIIdo dal medico. I am. going to the phyaiolan'L
.Iltulra u1IIio Iratello. I shall go to my brother'L
93. The following nouns require the preposition
di afte.r them when used before an infinitive; as,
Coraggio Courage.
Dau.rio . Desire.
YOSI'iG. Wish.
JliJgiMI.e Right.
Paura Fear.
VerflO!lfl4. Shame.
Tempo Time.
Torto .,...... Wl'OJlg.
94:. The adverbs prima, before, and dopo, after,
are followed by the preposition di, and take the
infinitive instead of the gerund * as in English; as,
Dopo di a"," parlato. After having spokeD.
Prima di allure. Be1bre going.
'DIe pIIIIMllII DaUaa to the preMIIi puUoIple III .......
8
DigitIZed by Coogle
42 IBBEGULAB VEBBS, FIBST CONJUGATION.
VOCABULARY
.Aar-ble. .8.fllTtJdeflOle.
Always Setllpre.
ComiDg. Venturo.
Company Compagnia.
Compliment Complimenlo.
Custom COllum,.
Evening SWfJ.
To fix. TUlare.
To le&m Imparare.
Memory Memoria.
Morning
Neighbor
Other
Pleasnre
TO,preeent
Probably
Reward
V'lIIit
Week
Yesterday
MaUifUI.
PrOlrimo.
.8.ltro.
Piacere.
Praentar,.
Probabilmmk
Ricompen%fJ.
V"lrilfJ.
S,," nfJ.
leri.
EXAMPLES.
I hQpe to go with you.
Have you &Dy good boob I
I have very good boob.
He has never had a great many
triendl.
Spero tli awr, con fIOi.
.8."" fIOi dei huoni Ziin 7
10 Ao delli6ri molto 6uotai.
Egli non I&a fAIIi awlo fIlOlt,
amici.
EXERCISE XI.
When shaIl I have the pleasure or your company? My oom
pany is not very agreeable; but I shaJl go to 8p8Ild an evening
with your brother-in-law next week, and then I hope to present
my oompliments to you and to your dear mother. Have you
:&xed the day? No, I have not:&xed the day; but I hope to be
with my to-morrow morning. He will probably go with
me to visit a few friends, and I think that we shaIl be at your
brother's house next Tuesday. Did your friends speak of me to-
day? They spoke of you, but not much. : Have your brothera
oommenced their French 18l!8On? They their French
18l!l!On yesterday, but they did Jlot study much .. Shall you go in
my carriage? I shaJl go to my friend's garden. My Cather has
not a very good home. On the oontrary, I think that your
Cather has always had some very good h01'l!8B. Have you any
good books? Yes, sir; I have some very good books. Where
are they? They are on the little table in my mother's room.
Have you studied your 18l!l!On? I have studied my French les-
son, but I have not sung my Italian song. Have you not a good
memory? I have a good memory, but my voice is not very good.
When shall you go to your Cather's? To-morrow. / ..
DigitIZed by
CONJUNCTIVE PRONOun.
LHSSON XIII.
CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS.
95. WHEN the personal pronouns are governed
by a verb, and employed ill the dative and a.cC11S&o
tive, they take a new form. of the dative
and accusative,
AmJ'
Me
AMi
Noi
A Ie.

A'IlOi
Voi
A lui
Lui.
A lsi
Lei
A loro
Loro
tome
me
rfti is used.
to us.
us
to thee
thee .
mi .
ci or ne
ci or ne
n.
n.
to you vi
you. vi
to him gli
him. 10 or il
to her Ie.
her. ltJ..
to them loro.
them. . . Ii m., Ie f.
II
II
II
II
"
"
"
"
"
II
"
A 8e to oneself . ai. . II
Be. oneself . ai. . II
96. These pronouns, thus used, are called con-
junctive; as,
10 gli parlt1.i. I spoke to him. LIMnII7. I to him spoke.
10 I' t1.1IIO. I lOTe her. I her loTe.
97. Conjunctive pronouns follow or precede the
verb.
They follow the verb, and, with the exception
of lora, are united to it:
DigitIZed by Coogle
OOll.roNO'l'IVII PBOlilOmrs.
1. In the affirmative imperative, except the third
person; 88,
Bcri_' '..,.,.11 . Write to me. and hope.
BcriwlM:i ,..,.,.ate . . . . . . Write to 1111, and hope.
2. :rn: the gerund,' affirmatively; as,
BcriWftdogli. dirlllll NriIa. WritiDg to him, I will tell the truth.
3. In the affirmative infinitive, which loses the
final ej 88,
yetlerlll, pIIrlllrl.,. morire. To _ bar, to lpeat to her, and to die.
98. In all other tenses, and in the third person of
the affirmative imperative, the conjunctive pronoun
precedes; as,
Oi .criflll .. l1UOIe. Let him write to us if he wish ..
N.B.-Intheimperr.tive, gera.nd,andiDfblitive, uaednegatlve11. the
conj1lJlOtive pl'ODOlUl is placed between the negation ad the verb; u
.Mm ci .ac"fIII Illra molto Not to us let him write, ad he wD1
""IIZio. do much better.
J\Iim Iii .cri_do 10 IlIr7> Not to him in writiDg. him I wD1
ds..,.,.lIre. make despair
./Vbn Ie 'C"fIU' cruddta. Not to her to write is cruelty'.
99. Conjunctive pronouns, gZi excepted, double
their first letter when affixed to a verb of one sylla- .
ble, or to a verb ending with an accented vowel,
in which case the aCcent is omitted; as,
F/lfI&7Ai quato lo11Or iDstead ot III fl&i.
Dirogli di flaire. iDstead ot dir) Iii.
100. The pronoun it should be expressed by il,
lo, l', when referring to a masculine noun; and by la,
l', when referring to a feminine noun; as,
Lo IMlI con piGeere. I will do , with pleuare.
101. The pronoun them is expressed by Zi (some-
times by gli), m., and le, ; as,
10 Ii IIffll do_ai. I shall have them to-momnr.
DigitIZed by Coogle
OOlrroNOTIVE PBOlrOUlfB.
VOCABULARY.
To ab1la
To bring. oarrt
To bu,. .
Color ...... .
. DniII-maker
To filrget
Gold
To leave
Midlrtune
lr-mt;y
A6uallr ..
PorlIJr
COfItpTllrt.
Color
811rl1J.
Dimenlicllr
Oro.
Lturillr
DitgrtlSiIJ.
Necarita.
Are 1011 PiD& to the tailor'. T
No, I -aoinI to my store.
Your dra has a good color.
Good boob or not.
New .
Old .
9PiniOD
Povert1
Pl'Il81Ierit;y.
B.ead'y
Beuon
Ruin
Shoemaker.
Tailor. .
A1UlaU dal 'IIrto1
.M.Dw.
Yecc/aio.
Opiniot&e.
PONrla.
Pro.perita.
Pronto.
Ba,iMN.
ROtllftlJ,
Cal.ollJio.
8l1rto.
No, io fIIJdo alill mill IxIUegIJ.
LII._II ""ie /ail un huon color ..
Buoni libri, 0 no.
EXERCISE XII.
Has the shoemaker brought my boots ? No, sir; I went to his
nora yesterday, and they were not ready. When will he bring
them. ? He will bring them to-morrow. Why-doea he Dot bring
them day? BecaIl88 they will Dot be ready to-day. Give me
my gloves . Where are they? I left them in your brother'.
lOOm: ShalT you Dot apeak to my father? I .hallspeak to him,
nndoubtedly. Shall you Dot llpeak to ~ sister? No, sir; I
IIhaJ.l Dot speak to her. Why ~ t ? . I llhall Dot speak to her to-
day becaulI8 she did not speak to me y8llterday. This is not a
good reason. Good reason or Dot, lllhall Dot speak to her to-
day. I will buy this beautiful hOrlle Or my sister. Why do you
Dot buy it Cor yOUrll8lf? BecaulI8 I flave DO Deed oC a small
horse. The draJa-maker. brought me a white dreas; it is too
large Cor me, and I IIhaJ.l give it to my mother. Give him that
inbtand, and I will give you this penknife. Have you studied
your 188llOn ? Yea, sir; my lesson was not very diflicult to-day.
When your leaeon is not very diflicult, it is very 8&sy to study it.
Bring me myoId black coat. Shall YOll give it to your mend?
No, I llhall not give it \ to my mend to-day, becall88 the tailor
. has not brought my Dew coat. Will he bring it to-morrow'
!'o-morrow is Sunday. Is it DOt Friday to-day? No,.,.
DigitIZed by Coogle
48 IBUGULAB VEIUI8. PIB8T COlUUGATlOll'.
LEBBOlf XIV.
IRREGULAR VERBS, FIRST CONJUGATION.
FARE. TO HAXE.
8T ARE. TO BUY.
I'IIDD!'.
Fo or faecio I make. 810 lata,..
Frri Thou makeIIt. 81Ai. Thou ata1'l*-
Fa. He makeL 8IA He Itaya.
FaeciGmo.
FIIIe
Fanno
We make. 8"amo
Y OIl make. 8tok.
TheT make. 8IAnno
(See page 201.)
We_,..
YOIl_y.
TheT -,..
N. B.-The.verbfart it derived from the LatinffJf", and Ihould
p1'Op8l"l,. belong to the irregular verbs of the aecond conjugation.
102. The verb jare is idiomatically employed in
expressions denoting the state of the weather; as,
OM tempo fa owl 1 How ill the weather to4a,.,
N. B. - The verb far., thWl employed, mWlt preoede the _,
uoept in aD interrogative 1leDtence.
Fa heZ tempo 0fIfIi. Ii is fiDe weather to-da,..
Not n tempo fa bello oggi.
103. The verb stare is idiomatically used in
expressions concerning one's health; as,
0_. alAI" rignora , How do 70Il do, madam,
104. The following nouns require the verb to
have, and not to be, as in English:
Fa"" -' Hunger. I
8et, Thirst.
Ragione. Bight.
Torlo Wrong.
PaUTa Pear.
Yergogrw. Shame.
I _ 1&ungry, Ia upn.ed 117 10 10 /afllA, I have hunger.
DigitIZed by Coogle
IBBEGULAB VEBBS, FIBST CONJUGATION. 4'l .
To accompany
Civility
Cold
Dear
To deaerve
To embrace
Pear
BoW18
IDgratitude
XiDg
VOCABULARY.
.8.ccof1l!JJtJgnare.
Citrilta.
Freddo.
Caro.
Mentare.
.8.bbrIJCCiare.
Timore.
CutJ.
lragratiludiM.
Re.
Money
To pass. spend
Past
To reproach.
To aepamte
Soon.
To sparkle
To thank
Temperance
Warm
EXAMPLES.
Denaro.
Pauar,.
Pulido.
BimprOfHlrare.
Separar
Pruto.
Scintilla,...
RingratritJre.
TempcrallMa.
Cald.o.
An you thinty or hungry? .8.Nte/llme e ute 7
I am neither thirsty nor hungry. Non Ito nl/ame nl ute,
Bow are your brothera? Comr ata"llo i fIOatri /raWZi ,
EXERCISE xm.
Good-morning, air ; how do you do? I am very well, I thank
you. How is your sister? My sister is not very well. Where
did you spend the day yesterday? I"W811 with my iiiend. Give
me some water. Are you thirsty? Yes, I am thirsty and hun-
gry. .Am. I not right in reproaching him for his ingratitude?
What has he done? He has not spoken to my mother. You
are right; he is proud, and he deserves it. How is the weather
to-day? It is very fine weather Was it fine weather yester-
day? Yesterday the weather "W8II very beautiful. Have you
time to study your French 18lllOn? I have time, but I have no
desire . to study it. Has your brother a desire to buy my car-
riage? He has a great desire to buy it, but he has no money.
When will he have money? He will probably have some money
next month. Then I will give him my horse now, if he will
giveme the money nan month. Is it Cold to-day? No, air; it is
not very cold. Was it warm yesterday? Yes, air; it"W811 very
warm yesterday. Are you afia.id to go with me? Where sha.ll
we go? We will go to the shoemaker's. Has he not brought
your boots? He has brought neither the boots nor the shoes.
Let us go, then; I am not afraid to go with you; I"W811 only
desirous to speak with your sister before going. She is not at
home. When will she be at home? She will be at home soon.
DigitIZed by Coogle

,
LlI880B' XV.
USE OF THE DEFINITE ARTIOLE
. 105. To DEFIlUTB ARTICLE is used before noUDS
,,.,. in 1M juJJ, ..,., of lieir B i g n ~ It is
thus used before nouns designating, 1st, A class. 2d, .
A species of a class. 3d, An individual of a species.
1. Gil _ita' _......u. lieD an IIIIII'IIIl. BIN &he ward
_ini ill ued to npnIIIlt olua. ill ita whole ateu.t ; I. Io. aU ....
N. B. - Instead ot ,Ii _ini, I'uo_ 0Ul be ued. beca1llt
IIlDgalar noun -1 often be uedAl npnIIIltati:n ot the whole oIa&
2. Gli _ini virluoai IOM/"id. VIrtuoaa meD are haPP1.
Here _illi "irh&ori npnIIIlta apeci., 01' numberot meD who
haYe the quJity of vi"'-i. We 0Ul Uo -,. I' .... virluGlo.
beca1llt .1IlDgalar noun -1 npreHDt the whole IpICIieI.
8. L' tIOIU til c:ui vi ptJrlo. The man otwhom I IIpIIk to 101L
Here the noun _0 ill tI.keD. indhidaally, and the artlole ..... to
limit it to lingle indiYidur.1 whom we wiah to partiaaIarlA
0BaaT.u'.l0lI'.- WIumeYer. JI01IIl i111I8Id ill an inddnite JIlUIJIR.
i. e., wheD we do not wiIh to OODIider it AI whole w.., AI whole
1pII01eI. 01' as partio1Ilar iIldiYidur.1, the r.rtiole -1 be omiu.L
TIlUl, we_,._,., A __ ,o otlio rip_ 01' L'GlIWr' 0 I'otlio dpitltJ.
But. ill the first cue, G1ftOr. and otlioare uedln. genen.1 or indeIl-
nite I11III; while, in the aeoond cue, they are limited or cIetermiul b7
I01DI olrcumsta.Dcee whioh are undentood. BUOh as I'IIIIIM' (cAe,or-
tialRO IIi 6_i), Z' otlio (de .. ntiaao pei c/lttitli.)
Dante _,..: BiIpoIeai: ftOIt aomo. _ gia /Ui. He replied to
me: I am not man. man onOl I WIllI.
Here the poet wiIheI onl,. to gift the inddnite idea otwhioh ....
ill the lip. Uomo ill here 1IIICld IIOlDOWhat like qurJ.if;ying adJeoti.ft.
106. Abstract nouns, used alone, take the definite
article; as, Za virtU, virtue. But, when two or more
noUDS are joined together, the article may be
omitted; as, virtu ell onore, virtue and honor.
DigitIZed by Coogle
107. Before name . of countries, kingdoms, and
provinces, the article may be used or omitted. If
we' wish. to mention the whole country or the
province, we must use the article; as,
L& /lGliG i "l1li bella contra4&. ltaJ,J Ie beautiful oo1lJltr1.
But, if we view the country i:D. a manner,
or as a point, without reference, to its extent, then
the article is not necessary; as,
V'engo tlt& Bal(a. I come floom ltaJ,J.
108. The article is also used before names of the
mountains celebrated by the poets, and before the
words '8ignme, BigNwa, Signorina; as,
,B Pirulo, II PllrllGNO, L' Elicofl& Pind1UJ, Pama.uI, Heliaaa.
B 8ignar GiOllllAAi, La 8ign.orll C. Mr. John, lIrIrL C.
109. The article is omitted in a. direct address; as,
UOIIIO,' .. Iii tIIOrlIIle. Ma, thou r.rt mortaL
lI4IliG, 0 ,. cui tlii 'II .orle. . Italy, thou to whom IMe baa pT
Bipor B., dow i la BigruIrII C. P Mr. B.. when is lIrIrL C. f
110. Verbs, a.dverbs, and adjectives, used sub-
stantively, take the article; as,
, B Zaggere The rea.diDg. I B pert:1Il The wh7.
, B iHIono. The pod 01180 B""IO.. The nd ODe.
111. The article is used before nouns expressing
titles, which are followed by the proper D.aPle of the
person, or fiunily.' The word papa is excepted; as,
B :s. Giorgio. King George. PApa BiIIo. Pope 8Wa&
B GlAlrllk WlllAlftgtcm. General WuhingtoD.
112. Family names of persons generally known
are preceded by the article; as, a. 2'bBBO, il Milton.
N. B.-Say "AligAieri, but Dot il DIIAt" beoauae Dante is the
proper _e, ADd Dot the f&mily lWIle, of the great Italiu. poet.
DigitIZed by Coogle
H USB 01' '!lIB DBI'llUtJ!l AB'l'ICLE.
VOCABULARY.
.AI,.


.
.8.lpI ItalIG.
Bad


CtJltiflO. Justiae Giuti:iG.
Tooorrapt Corromper,. Masterpiece
.
Capo 14t1Of'O.
Death


Morte. Merit


Mento.
DiIIcord



Dilcordia. Mortal. 0 0

0 Mortal
E1emell'

0

EIetaeftto. Paris 0 . . 0

P4rig1.
..... Europa. Tosholt' . .

Modr/lre.
ll!aDCe JiT/lncia. To wait tor 0 0 .8.apdttJre.
Health 0



B"IIIIe.
w"lOked 0 Malflllt/Plo
Interest
.


Inter, .. ,. Woman DOtUI4.
m'fentiOD.

0
l"","iou.
To l'e'fea.l Rivel/lr,.
EXAMPLES.
It is tor our interest to preIel"fe E pel mntro ,"""'"" il F",r-
our health. Hr, 1/1 nodr/l ,alllle.
That m'f8lltlon 00It IIim much. Q",U. i,,_iou gli COItO tIIOlIo.
EXERCISE XIV.
Man is mortal. Man, thou art mortal. Tyrants are the
1IClOu.rge of h11Il1&Dity. Tyrants, you are the lIClOurge of human-
ity. Death makes kings and subjects eqUllJ.. Fal8ehood is
odious in itself. Prosperity and sucoeas are not alwa,. the
reward of an industrious man. Evil companiODl corrupt good
mannen. Bread and water are indispenllable to man. Is Dot
man the Dl88terpiece of nature? Fear and l!81ftahneI!IJ make men
wicked. True merit is always-accompanied by civility and mod-
esty. Black and white are Dot colora. Hiatory is the picture
of times and men. Necessity is the mother of invention, and
health is the daughter of exercise and temperance. Discord is
the ruin of states. Justice embraces many virtues. Where is
Madam, Mr. John? She is in her room. Has she given my
book to your father? Yes, she gave the book to my father Ian
night. The Alps separate Italy from France. My brother is in
Italy, and my son will go to Paris Dext week. General Warran
is a name dear to the .Americana. Italy is the garden of
Europe. How is your mother to-day? Sheis Dot very well.
Is she in her room? No, she is in the garden. Have you many
flowers in your garden ? We have very few ftowers in 1UmDler-
time, but in the apring we have a great many flowers and birds.
Poverty and misfortune reveal true
DigitIZed by Coogle
BllLATIVE PB050tmB. 61 -
LB8801l XVI.
RELATIVE PRO NOUNS.
113. RELATIVE PRONOUNS are always expressed in
Ita.lia.n. They are
Qual., eke who, which, what.
eAi who.
114. Quale and eke are used for persons and
things.
115. Quale, plural quali, is always preceded by
the definite article, which determines its gender; aB,
n libro, il qual. The book which.
La. donna, la qUCII. The woman who.
Ilibri, i qUCIZi The bOob which.
Lc donftC, Ie quali The 'WOmen who.
llG. Oke takes no article, and- is invariable in the
nominative; in the objective and after prepositions
it is changed into cui i as,
L'uomo cA. perll""'lJ MC. The man who peraeverea suooeed&
La. donna cui tHri amate ._. The woman whom you love.
L'uomo IJ cui .crim. The man to whom you write.
La. donna rli cui parllJfe The woman ot whom you speak.
117. R'eke, or, more has refer-
ence to the whole preceding sentence; as,
Mia mlldre i lim_ilia; IoccAi mi aJftig
My mother is aick; (a thing) which -a1IIicfa me.
,. 118. Oui is often used without the preposition;
and in the genitive it precedes the noun; as,
L'uomo, cui tHri parllJfe The man to whom you speak.
Unadonnala cui bell.1IIII1I i lItr.ma. A woman or eUrame beaut,r.
DigitIZed by Coogle
BIILATIVB PBOlfOtrIm. ,
o-T..A.BOJr. -1Date.d of cui and ftlllH. onde fa ofteD ued III
JIOIIz7;u. ,
Quill" wirtu4e ,.i ,"cao.
That virtue by whioh I 1IIel myaelt idaIned.
119. (Jhi, is often used alone, referring to 80me
noun i as, he 10M, or the man. who j as,
Chi pet'1ftI.r" nuc.. He who perseveres aucceed&
120. Ne is also classed among the relative pro-
nouns, and stands for 8.01TIte of it, or for
With. about. ot.} him her it them.
For, from, by, '"
This pronoun must always be expressed in Italian,
even in cases where it is understood in English i 88,
Nt ptlrZ"i " mw fraJ.ello. I spoke to my brotJier about it.
.l.wte tld deuro 1. H .. ve you a.rq m0D87 ,
He h.o I bve (lOme of it).
Ne is always placed before the verb i a8,
10 ne 1r.O. I have BODie of it.
121. In order to, in Italian, is by per,
which is never understood, as in English'; as,
P"adc,-al fA8f'cato pet' comyr"r, del,,, c"rne.
I am going to market to bui lOme _t.
Where are you PI r
I am going to buy lOme bnr.d.
Hu he rm;y good books t
He hu lOme good OlleL
WhOle books are theBe?
They are my brother' ..
The merchant haa money.
The painter is generous.
How is the weather to-dr.y!
We have b&d weather to.day.
DOfJe "ndate 1
P" ado " c011l.F"r. tld ptlfte.
H" egli tlei buofti lilln1
Boll,.. ha tlei huoni.
JJi cAi 10M guedi lillrl1
BOM tll mio frlll.elio.
n m.erc"nt. ha tl.1I4ro
n pittore l genef'OIO.
CAt '-po f" oggi 1
.l.6iitJ_ ctJItleo _po
DigitIZed by Coogle
ToIdmJre
huV
ToobaDp
Eril
Generou
Hat
Ignorant
To IanguiIh.
Learned
To lend
)larket .
BJILATIVJl PB01ltOUl1B.
VOCABULARY.
.lmmirar
lWle ta.
CIIlRIriGre.
Male.
Gcfteroao.
CllppeUO.
IgrzOTllm,.
La.nguire.
Datto.
PruttJr,.
MerctJto.
MerohaDt
Often
Painter

Phyaician
Poor .
To pronounce
Pronunciation.
To 8eDd
Teachir
Thought.
EXERCISE XV.
Mer._
8pua
Pilltlre.
For".
Med.ico.
POfHITO.
PrORUflri"",.
ProautariG.
MII,,_re.
MIJUIro.
PeuIa'o.
What do you think of my horse? I think tbat your horse ill
wry good. When are you going? I am going to market.
What are you going to buy? I am going to buy some butter.
Did you not buy your butter yesterday? The butter (which)
I bought yesterday W88 not good, and I am going to market (in
order) to change it. The painter bas no time to commence my
picture. Give him. some money, and he will begin it soon.
Th81r it ill the money, and not the time, tbat he bas not. Per-
haps he bas no time, but I am IIUl"8 that he bas no money. Bow
does your bro*er pronounce the French language? Be baa not
a very good pronunciation. Why not? Beca11l!8 it ill very dif-
fioult to pronounce"well without a French tea.cher. You are
ript. Ha1'4l you any good boob? I have lOme, but I have
not a good grammar. Why do you.not buy one (of
th81D)? Beca11l!8 I have no money. What did you do with the-
money (that) I lent you yesterday? I bought a black hat.
Why did you not buy a grammar? Do not reproach me for my
ignorance. Are you a merchant, sir? No, air; I am a physi-
cian. How is the weather to-day? We have :6ne weather to-
day, air. Ia it cold? No,'air. Ia it warm? It ill neither cold
nor warm. Shall we go to my friend's garden? Yes; but lam
hungry. Shall I give you some bread and butter? No,lthank
you; I have some in my room. Then I ahall give my bread to
the man who is in the garden. Ia he poor? Be is not poor,
bat be ill not proud. Ia noli hill brother the man to whom I
spoke yestelday in your iather's garden'l Be baa no brou...
DigitIZed by Coogle
DEKOJ1B'fBATIVE PBOllOUlllB.
LE8801l XVII.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
122. THE DEM:oNSTlU.TIVE PRONOUNS are used sub-
stantively for persons. They are,
Quedi. This man.
Cotld. ..' Thill 'WOID&D.
COllArro Th_ men or 'WomeD.
Cot.Ii, quegli That ID&D.
Cotatei, colli That WOID&D.
Cotutoro, coloro ThOBe men or women.
Que8ti makes, in the objective, C08tui.
OoteBti makes, in the objective, cote8tui.
Q u e g ~ i makes, in the objective, colui.
The other pronouns are invariable.
{
Coatui, cotutui. colvi; m., .mg.
Di, G, tltJ, CotId, cotatei. colei; t., ..
COIItwo. cotutoro, coloro; plurrJ.
123. Demonstrative pronouns in the genitive can
elegantly precede the noun without the prepo-
sition. .
Per 'G coatui bonia } Throu h hill ~
Per ,,, 60fttA di coatu' g
124:. Questi points to the person near to the
speaker.
125. OoteBti points to the person near to the one
spoken to.
126. Quegli points to a person' equa.lly diataut
from the speaker and the person spoken to.
DigitIZed by Coogle
INFLEC'l'ION OP A. REGULAR VERB OP mE SECOND
CONJUGATION.
CREDERE, TO BELIEVE.
PBIIIIIlIT.
Cr_
Credi
Crtdc
I be1ieTe. I Cretlillmo.
Thou belleTest. Cr,",....
He belieTeB. CretloM
We belifml.
You belieTe.
Th81 belifmI.
Seepage 199.
OIlllBBV.AmIlf.'-: Some of the Terba ofthia coDjuptioD. are aooeDted
on the laat TOWel but OIle; &I, lemire, to a.r: others, OD the Jut but
two; &I, critltr
N. B. - Por the few verba in which the accent talJI on the Jut
TOwel but one, _ page 218.
127. What is the matter, is expressed by eke and
the verb avere j as,
What ill the matter with you t CI&e lI",te' UtAlraD,: What have you t
Notbiq ill the matter with me. JVIm 1&0 nulla. I haTe nothing.
N. B. - Bemember that quem, cotati, quelli, joined to D01IDI, are
"the plurall of the adJectiTes quulo, coteeto, fUfZIo.
Are you right In reproaching me
.,.. my bad tranalation t
I have neTer llpoken to that man.
Where did you find the boob t
I fbund them on the table.
Why did you not bring the white
dIesII with you t
Do not fIf7 110 loud.
I had the pleuure of ezQoying
;roar brother'lI oomp&ny lut
Dight and this morning.
ThillIIIIh ill not good.
otwhM OOlIDtry are you, air!
AtIde ragiorae tli rimprOtlerllrlRi
per III mill cGttitJIJ trlJtluiom ,
Mil 1o "",i parlato II qUfZZ' uomo.
Do", trOIIGde fIOi i lwi ,
10 Ii trOtJlJi nlllI "'fIOllI.
Perm. "Oft pori"", III .." 61-
IIncll COil fIOi'
.Mm griclate II/one.
Io e6bi il piIJctr. tli goar. la
_pagrria tli fIOdro frtJtelle
jeri aer "" _rae.
Quuto pecce noll , 6ti0ll0.
Di qUIll paue ride fIOi.Iifnore'
..
'DigitIZed by Coogle
To aaeIIt
B.r .
To 017
To dine
&am.ple
EJ:::peII8I
Fire
.. If
lIomaat
NesliIeDoe ;
VOCABULARY.
.f..m.r ..
OrIlO.
GridAr
PrtJftllt1.r,.
Eumpio.
Sputa.
Fuoco.
St.
Mometato.
Negligeftlltl..
ObetiDate
Poeeible
To prove, tl7. .
To ioeoe1ve
Snow
So, thaa
Strong,' loud
Tranalation
Yet
To yield
EXERCISE XVI.
om"lIIo.
Poaribile.
Pr_re.
Bicewr,.
Nne.
Cod or ...
Forte.
Tradullitm.. .
A __ .pur ..
C ....
Have you received any money this week? Yes; I haft
reoeived lOme from my father. I hope (that) YOl1l will"'t me
in my French translation. If it is difficult, I will ... t you. I
think that my French translation is very difficult to-day. Was
it difficult ,-terday? Yes, air; I found it very difficult. Is
this the physician of whom your father apoke to me last week 7
No, m; my father has never spoken to him. Have;you found
your gloves? Yes, m; I have found my gloves. Where did
you find them? In my friend's store. Is it poesible? - you
have not been to your friend's store to-day. l' ~ v e not been
to his store to-day, but I was at his hoWl8; and when he found
the gloves in his room, he was aure that they were my gloves, and
carried them to his store. .Am I not right in reproaching you
for your careleIIm.eBII? Yes, air; you are right. Have you any
good boob? I have I I O m e ~ but I have not a good French gram-
mar. Have you dined? No, air; I am going to dine with my
brother. Have you tried the red wine I sent him last month ?
No, air; I have not yet tried it;. Give me the book which I lent
to your prather. I thought that the book was my brother'.,
and I lent it to my.friend's sister. Why does my- mother cry 10
loud? BecaWl8the dreaa-maker did not bring her the black
dreBB. Is the dreal-maker with her? She is not with her; ahe
Elt the white dreis, but the black dreBB will not be ready before
&t1Uday. It is time to go to my friend'. store. I will go with
you, if you- wait a moment. I will wait; with pleasure. Why is
your sister 110 obstinate? She is always obstinate; ahe thinb
that I am always wrong, and ahe never yields to my wishes.
DigitIZed by Coogle
,
OJlISSIOlf OJ' 'mil DDDlrtE ABTIOIA 57
LEBBOK XVIII.
OMISSION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.,
128. THE DEFIlfITE ARTIOLE is omitted: .
1. Before names of kindred preceded by the
proper name of the person; as,
G.iel_. J1glio Ili GioNrarai. William. the IOU of .John.
2. Before ordinal numbers which follow proper
names of monarchs and popes, or any noun; as,
Gregorio 8,,""'0. Grego17 the Bmmth.
Errico Quarto. HIIIlI',Y the Fourth.
LUwo 8ecorado Book the Seocmd.
3. Before such names as caBa, house; 00ttegG,
store; cueina, kitchen, when we speak of our own
house, store, kitchen; as,
. .Egli a ira cuciu He fa In the JdtcheD.
Io IGri) ira C/JI/I ,u/rilo I ahall be at home IOQII.
INTERJECTIONS.
129. The following are the principal inteljections:
Alas I Bravo I Bravo I
Ah I OIG I Ho, there I
A7Jb1 Stop'! Pia/III) I Softly I
.AM 1D.aso1 Poor me I Vergognal Shame I
Deh I Ah, pray I Viva I Huzza I hurra I
Ebben.el Welfl Zittol Hush I
130. .Lasso agrees in gender and number with the
person or persons speaking; as,
LIJIIo tAl! Poor me I Al&i lari I Poor 111 !
DigitIZed by Coogle
58
OONJUNCTIONS.
Pure, Yet.
Dopo c1t6, After that.
8vbiID che, } As soon as.
7balo che,
GiG, Already.
Nfm c1t6, Not that.
Primq. c1t6, Before that.
131. Pure is employed in the sense of yet, also,
or et16n; as,
80 .. JIOHTo, par. lOtI felice.
I am. poor, ,. I am. happy
.Mna llOlo bell , par .uu..
She Ia DOt oaq beaut.ital. but aIIo hm17.
M; collfmlluri pare IIi .ao agurclo.
I should be conteD.ted e'fllll with .. look.
132. Pure and gid are often used as expletive
words; as,
Ate p.r. rib eAe 'IIi piae. Do what 10U lib.
.Mna gia eAe io eogIio lodar'lli. Not that I wish to pniIe 7OUo
133. Non, cAe is sometimes used elliptically for
n.ot orUy b!" j as,
.Ball tMrit& aH_ aoa eAe rUpetIo.
She daerTel not oaq eateem, but nspeot.
134:. The verb following prima eke, dopa cAe,
subito eke, toBto eke, is used m the future as in
English, when futurity is implied; as,
Gil pGrlero ItI6ito eAe fAi ,erieer,te.
I will speak to him all lOOn all JOu write to me.
EXAMPLES.
Shan we han any boob t.o-dr.y T
I have had no boob, Iond I IIball
have DOno,
He is in town, DOt in the country.
Where are you going to-mcmowT
.8.WIfAO dei libri owi 7
10 aon 110 lleuto libri" NOlI ...
"wo.
Bgli , in cilta, _ in c"lI&JHIIIIIIo
DoN "urete "",,, .. i,
DigitIZed by Coogle
VOCABULARY.
Ball Ballo.
Cit)' Citta.
To OODOilia.te Conciliar ..
CouDtry C.rnpGgfttS, paue.
Curiosity Curiolili.
Deaf Bordo.
Error, mIatake Error., .6aglio.
Table . T.tIOlli.
PaitbtCll Fedel ..
Fish Puce.
John
Lame
Now
01111
P_eriDg
Ptmiahment.
Beward.
BomaJlO8
BtudioWl
William
EXERCISE xvn:
GiotHIftni.
Zoppo.
.8.u-, or".
&l.fUfIte.
Per .. _."".
P'ftII.
RiCOlllpene
Romauo.
8tv4ioao.
( h g l ~ - '
Where is your father? He is at home. Wbat is he doiDg?
He is doing nothing. Why does he Dot go to the country?
Beca1lll8 his horae is lame. Have you studied your 18llllOIl? No,
air; I have had DO time. What have you been doiDg? NothiDg.
Shame! I have studied Dot only the INDch le880D, but the Ital-
ian tranalatiOD. Who gave you this book? John, the BOD of
my mend. Is he in town? No, he went into the country last
night. Are you ashamed to speak? I am Dot uhamed, but I
am afraid. .Afraid of what? Afraid of making mistakea. If
you. are afraid of making miat&kea, you will Dever speak. Where
are you going to-Dight? I am going to the ball. At what
time shall you go? As BOOD &8 you go to your .ther'B. My
friend has DO money, yet he has a good heart. Who gave you
this pencil? William. William, the BOn of my friend? No;
William, the brother of your mend. Alas! What is the matter
with you? I have not studied my le88OD. Why do you Dot
study it DOW? Beca1lll8 I have DO time. Not that you have DO
time, but you have DOt the wish to Btudy. I am DOt only stu-
dious, but persevering. Are you thirsty? No, I am Dot thirsty.
Are you deaf? No, I am Dot deaf. Have you aDY boob? Yea,
I have some. Are they good books? Some of them are good.
Why do you Dot lend me some romances? Beca1lll8 I have no
romances. Are you afraid to lend me boob? I am DOt afraid ;
I have DO reason to be afraid. You are a good friend, and you
are right. When shall I have the pleasure of enjoying your
oompany? The pleasure is mine, air; and I shall CJl)IIl8 to-night.
DigitIZed by Coogle
10
LB880. XIX.
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
130. NUJIDAL AD.niIcTIvm, or adjectivel which
express number, are the following:
Uno.. One. Yenlidue Twenty-two.
Due. Two. 2'renttI.
7hJ. Three. TrentuftO Thirty-one.
Qu.alb'o Four. PrenIGtlue.
0inqtI6.. Five. Qr,uJranItJ. Forty.
SA Six. 0inqt.uuaIG. Fifty.
/JtJ;M. Seven. &atJnIII. Sixty.
Otto. Eight. &uanItJ Seyenty.
NOOtJ Nine. Ottanlll.. Eighty.
Dieci . Ten. Nova.nIII. Ninety.
. lhadici.. Eleven. OenW One hundred.
Dodici Twelve. Duecentoor}
7redici.. . Thirteen. Du.gento Two hundred.
QutJUordici Fourteen. Three hundred.
Quintlici. Fifteen. MilIB One thoUsand.
&tlici Sixteen. Due miltJ Two thousand.
DiciGBBeU6 Seventeen. Dieci milea. Ten thousand.
lJici.of;Io Eighteen. Un milions One million.
DiciannOOtJ Nineteen. Due miAcm.i Two millions.
vena . . . . Twenty. Un bilione One billion.
Y6'I1tuno Twenty-one. Due bilicmi Two billions.
Oenlo haa no plural; as,
Tr, c,nto IOldelli. Three hundred 101dien.
Mille nmkes in the plural mila; as,
QuaUro _il" toltlGti. Four thOUlUd IOldfer&.
81
186. Cardinal numbers are invariable, except
U1IO, whioh makes UM for the feminine.
187. U'IW drops the 0 before a masculine noun
commencing with a vowel, or with a consonant
which is not I or impure 8; as,
Un luro. U. uomo, UM apirito IIG donllG, u.' Ga;co. u.' GaicG.
N. B. - UM and uu II1lfl'er no elision at the end ola phrue.
138. The noun which follows W1itu'IW, trenm'IW,
should, for euphony, be in the singn1ar; as,
P'mtu.' GnM, tr,,,,,,. libro. fUGrG""'1IG l,",rlJ.
N. B. -This rule is DOt to be obsened it the noun pneedeI or
whell the number is preoeded b7 the artiole; 88
.snai tletaluM; libri tr""UM ; i tr.""'no libri; Ie tletalullG Idler ..
139. The preposition on is not expressed in Ital-
ian, before the date of the month; as,
n quindici di Lvglio. On the fifteenth of J'ul;y.
Quflli .. sbbiau del __ , What dr.7 of the month is it!
He tz6biGmo quindieir It is the fifteenth.
140. The conjunction and is omitted between
the numbers in the notation of years; as,
Mille otto cmto citaqUllntG. One thouand eight huncbed and tftr.
141. The indefinite article one or a is also omitted
before hundred and thousand; as,
Omio CGtNJlli. One huncbed horaee.
MUI. IOldoti A. thoaIand IOldlerL
142. The date of the century is preceded by the
article; as,. .
Hel1858. and DOt in 1868. '
143. In mentioning the various epochs, the
numeral mille is omitted; as,
riM ecrlUtm ., tree'lleo. and DOt .z.uk mee.to.
DigitIZed by Coogle
81
14'" Cardinal numbers, with the exception of
uno, are employed for the date of the month; as,
B "s-, il _. il -"" . Tllelnt, tlaellOOlld, the WId.
.4. pam ,ia_ ., .... , . 'What da7 of the month II it'
Biarllo III ",illdid It is the ut.lth.
145. In dating letters, the article may be used
in the singular or plural, and the preposition di
expressed ot omitted; 8.8,
B 01' Ii ~ iii GitlfllO, qr il ~ GitlfllO.
146. The expressions ttDeltJe hundred, ttDerdy;/lH
hundred, etc., must be expressed by one thousand
two hundred, two thousand jive hundred, etc.; as,
.4.bbitJao dvc fAila trecemo Irant:li.
147. In multiplication the word via is used
instead of limes j as,
Dut Ilia dvc/sruJO fl'GUro. Two timee two make "ur.
148. Cardinal numbers generally precede the
noUDS i 8.8,
N. B. - Thfl1 fiill.ow the D01ID. when we wish to 1% the aUeD.tion to
the number, rather than to the object it aooompaDieB; .. ,
Abbismo IrsneAi cenlotlmti.
EXAMPLES.
It was last week that I apoke to Fu Is ulU_s JHIIIIds che io
your friend. . ptJrlsi sl -""0 s.ico.
I have not baeD. able to find work 10 no" 10M atsto cS.fHJCI di fro-
tOr your lIOII. tIGre IsflOro per eodro JIgliD.
Yma are not able to Bing an Ital- Voi flO".ide clJptJce di csnt.r.
ian BODg. ,,_ c:s"sou Itslia,,1J.
I thank you, Bir. Grai" rigrwrt.
Where is JOur friend going 7 DoH tI(J il -'ro _ico'
He is going.lnto the OO1IIltry. Egli N i" C:-INI1f11J.
DigitIZed by Coogle
Able
To believe
Boy
Certainly.
Cloud
CODIDI&Dd
DestiDy
Door
Gardener
Labor
N1J1OBAL ADJ1iIC'tIVl!&
VOCABULARY.
.4Mle.
Cretkr
BGfIIl!uo.
Ceria_life.
JVUIIOla.
COfAtJndo.
Dalino.
Porta.
Giardinure.
La_o.
To loBe
Near, nearly
To neglect
Noille
Prayer, request
Prince
Bound.
Soene
To wish
To work
EXERCISE xvm.
Pertlcre.
Vieino, qtIIJIi.
TrlUf:Urare.
Bumor,.
Prtg4iera
Principe.
Botondo.
BeenG.
DaitUrare
La_are.
Is this man a merchant? No, sir; this is the man who IOld
you his black horse last winter. My black horse! I did not buy
it last winter. Then it was last BUlDJIler. Are you afraid of
my dog? I am not afraid of your dog; Iam ashamed of you.
Of me! what have I done? You have not assisted that poor
man; he is poor and without work, baa three children; and
you ask me what you have done! You have neglected him,
and you -have forgotten my request. do you speak IO?
I have not forgotten your oommand, but,I have not been able
to aBBist him as I wish. Why do you not make him work in
your father's garden? My father has two very able gardeners,
and they never work in winter; when December is near, they
go to their hoUB8B and stay with their families four months, from
December to March. Is your IOn afraid to go to my friend's
store? He is not afraid; but he baa not studied his 188lOn, and
he baa no time. Why does your sister ary? She has lost
twenty-five dollars. What noise is this? 0 ! your sister; how
do you do, madam? I am verY well, sir, I thank you. But
you are not very well; what is the with you? Nothing
is the matter with me, sir; I had twenty-five dollan in my
hand this morning, and now I am not able to find a shilling. .
If I show you where the money is, will you give me this rose ?
If you will show me where it is, I will certainly give you the
rose, and all the flowers whiQll I have in my room, in my gar-
den, and in my brother's garden Your money is in that hand-
kerchief on that round table near the door. I am very much
9bliged to you, sir.
DigitIZed by Coogle
INTEBBOGA.TIVE PBO!TOUNS.
LESSON :J:X.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
149. THE INTEBBOGA.TIVE PBONOUNS are as fol.
lows:
Cld Who.
OM What.
Qual.. Whioh one.
Qu4nto How much.
150. Ok';' is used substantively for persons; as,
Chi' "",tIIo COf& tHri, Who has come with you'
Chi lla' Who is there!
.8. chi ,criNlc' 0" To whom do you write!
151. Oke, without a noun, is used for things
indefinitely, and signifies eke cosa? what thing? 88,
CAe tN1letc dt& fU' . . . . . . What do you want of me'
Di cAe p"rl4tt 1. .. Ofwhat (thing) do you apeak'
152. Quale, without a noun, is used for things
definitely; as,
QtwIle flO,., il *110 0 il eaUitlO ,
Whioh do you lib, the good or bad one'
Qual. ,etgUete, quato 0 lJuello ,
Which do you ohooIe, this or that one ,
153. Quardo, used substantively, is invariable; as,
Quatalo COIl4 quaIo' How much does that COIIt!
Quanto fIi rata G 1M. ,. How much does there remain to you to do'
Quanto, used adjectively, agrees with the noun; 88,
How much money} have ou left'
How much paper '1
How m.&Dy boob } do u read ,
How m.&Dy papers yo
DigitIZed by Coogle
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 65
154. (]he and q'UOle or qual (plural, quali or quai)
joined to noUDS, have a' different meaning. (JM
directs the question to the intrinsic merit of the
object i quale is used in other inquiry; as,
Che lwro l,ggele 1
LBggo "fa huo. lwro
Qual lwro leggde 1
Leggo U tIOItro .
What book are you reading,
I am readiDg a good book.
Whioh book are you reading !
I am reading yours.
Oh.e la._atori .0. quati 7 What kind of wormeD. are theIe t
8_ molto abUi. They are very skilful.
Qui la._atori IOta qua" 1. Whioh wormeD. are these !
8_ quelli di mio padre. They are my father's.
155. Oui is also used sometimes, in classio
authors, as an interrogative pronoun, instead of
chi j as,
Con cui AndreU tllli 1 With whom. will ;you go t
156. (}he, quale, and quanto, are also used as
exclamations; as,
CAe lJel gvadro!. What. beautiAll picture I
Qusle drepito I What a noise !
Q:uanto huqfferto! How much have I 8Ulfered I
EXAMPLES.
I bought ten books yesterday.
I ahal1 buy a book if I have
money.
1 am going to buy a new hat to-
morrow.
'When ahal1 you go to the book-
1IIlller'.l
You are not l'ight in oalUng him.
1bol.
How JII&1l7 books have ;you
oe1Ted this month !
4
10 comprai died lwri ierio
10 un lwro "
deflaro.
10 un cappello AUOtlO
tlomIIfli.
Quando AndreU dallwraio 1
Viii _ lllIefe ragiofll di chill-
_rlo matto.
. Quanti lwri II"'" tlOi ricewto
quato ".,..,
DigitIZed by Coogle
G6
Banker
Beggar
Blind
Bookaeller
California.
To create
Crown (a c c ~ )
Dollar
To enjoy
Envy
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
VOCABULARY.
Bllnehure.
Mendieo.
Cieeo.
Lwrllio.
Cali/orni",
Crellre.
8cudo.
Dolillro.
God.re.
Inflidill. '
Fool
Gun
Hatter
Head
Intelligent
Number
Respectful
Servant
To run
World '.
EXERCISE XIX.
Matto.
J.i'ucile.
Cappel14io.
Tala.
Intelligent,.
Numero.
RiBpeltolo.
Bernlore.
Correre.
Mondo.
How many trees have you bought this week? I bough'
six Monday, sixteen yesterday, and to-morrow I shall buy
twenty-one trees, if I have money. ' I will give you the
money fur the twenty-one trees that you are gOing to buy to-
morrow. You are very kind, sir. Which book is this? The
bookBeller sent it to my father. When shall we go to the tai-
lor's? To-morrow. What shall you do with your gun? I
will give it to my brother. How many horBell haa your father?
He haa four. Lend me BOme money. How much? Three hun-
dred and sixty dollarB. I have not the money with me; I paid
threa thousand and twenty-one crowns to my banker, and I
have but one hundred and six dollarB.- Are you afraid to lend
me money? I am not afraid. Then I shall Bend my servant.
Very well. Is this the man of whom you speak BO often? Yes,
Bir"; this is the man of whom I have spoken BO often, and of
whom I speak this moment, and I shall always. speak well of
him. What has he done? Do you not believe me? Yes, I
believe that you enjoy his "company; but who is he? He is a
man of merit, generous and intelligent. Bhall I speak the
truth? Certainly. There are a great many fools in this world,
and you are one of the number. Why;Bir? Because I think
that you are blind, and that he is a beggar. A beggar! he is a
man of honor, Bir; and you are wrong in calling him a beggar ;
ifhe lias no money, he has a heart and a head. Have I not a heart
and head too? Yes, Bir; ~ u t your heart was created in Cali-
fornia, and your head in your father's garden."
DigitIZed by Coogle
BEGULAB VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. 67
LESSON XXI.
REGULAR VERBS.
INFLEVIION OF A REGULAR VERB OF THE THIRD
CONJUGATION.
P.4RTIRE, TO DEPART.
PB.I8JI:BT.
Parto. I depart. I ParUafAO We depart.
Parti. Thou departest. Pamu You depart.
Pa,.te. He deput& Partono.. They depart.
(See model, page 199.)
157. There are but few verbs of the third conju-
gation which are regular. (See list, page 218.)
158. The verbs in which ire is preceded by a 0
retain the i before 0 and a, to preserve the 80ft
Bound of the infinitive; thus,
CfII!i,., makes eucio, efII!ia, and not euco"euca.
159. Some of the verbs of this conjugation add
the letters iso before the regular in1lection of all the
persons of the singular, and of the third person plu-
ral of the imperative, as well as the present indica-
tive and subjunctive. Thus, gioire, to enjoy, makes
PB.I8JI:BT.
IIIdfaatin.

Imperatift. AJlCInoi;
.
Gio-ile-o, Gio-ile-a. Gioo, Gioa.
Gio-ile-i, Gio-iIc-a, Gio-ilc-i.
Gioi. Gioa. Gitri.
Gio-iIc-e, Gio-iIc .... Gio-ilc .... Giot, Gioa, Gioa.
GioiafAO, GioiafAO, GioiafAO.
GiaiU, GiDialt, Gioilt.
Gio-ilc-ono. Gio-ilc-ano, Gio-ilc-aflO.
Gioono. GioaflO. GioaflO.
N. B. - The Irst and aeoond perIOna plural are DeTer Irregular.
DigitIZed by Coogle
160. Some of these verbs can be conjugated with
or without this addition; vizo, nutriA makes nuWo
and nulri8co.
N. B. -Por the nrbIla "h1oh the termiDatioD. iaco II ntaIaed or
njjeoted, -iii&. pap i08.
Por the nrlllia "biah iaco II Indi.,.._l., _ lia, pap ..
161. In counting the hours of the day, the defi-
nite article is added to the cardinal number, and the
noun is omitted. The verb 10 be must agree with the
subject which always followa the verb, except in an
interrogative sentence i as,
CII. ora ". 'What hour is in
B I' tiM It is ODe o'clock.
&ao Ie d", It is two o'clock.
162. Me1liiO, half, after the noun is invariable. It
agrees with the noun when it precedes it i as,
u,,' ora. _ .. 0. An lloar and a halt
Due ore ...... 0. Two ho1D'll and a halt
UM _.a ora. Half an hoar.
163. HoJ:f paat tt.oelfJe is idiomatically expressed
by (he hal/; as,
B Z. ..... 11. It is halfpaat twelve.
164. But generally, after twelve, the word paM is
translated by dopo, after i as,
BgH wen". ieri Glla _.a dopo He came ;reeterda, at halt JIM'
_ 0 giorao. twelve.
165. A quarter past, hal/ past, are expressed by
a quarter, half, joined to the noun by the conjunc-
tion and; as,
80110 I. Ire ed "" gtUlrto It is & quarter put three.
8oao Ie ottoe ..... 0 It is half put eight.
DigitIZed by Coogle
BllGULAB VEBBS, TBIRJ) OONJUGA.TION. 69
166 .A quarter of is expressed by meno "A
quarto, which is always placed after the whole
number; as,
&m.o II dIU mlllO un parlo, or} It fa a quarter of two.
B I' .... e Ire qua"",,
167 .Ago. is expressed by fa at the end of the
phrase, or by BOno or d at the. beginning of it; as,
.DIU giorni!/Jo }TwO days llgo. Un anno //Jo }A 1'JR. ago.
BolIO dIU IIMnl. B un anno.
168. The preposition in is omitted in Italian
before the words mattim,a" morning; dopa pra'/l,lo,
afternoon; Bera, evening; 'Mtte, night. It is changed
into of, if the hour is mentioned; as,
IA tAattiM, 0 la aera In the morning, or in the eTeDiDg.
AlII cirIfue deIla.,.4. At ive o'olook in the 0TeIliDg.
HaTe 10U ftlund your cane!
I draa myseltat halt put BIx.
Have 10U alre&dy fIIrgotten it!
1 do not think I shall be able to
go to the ball to-night.
.At what time in the eTening!
At a quaM put twelve.
.11."" trOflato il wdro bllltoM 1
10 tAi ""to alu.n , mfl2t%o.
L' aHtll wi gia dimflnticato ,
10 Mn credo di l'lff capace dl
atatlare al ballo quato .,.
.II. cM or. della .,..1
Ad V" fUClrlo tlopo ,....tmOII&
.AMOR TIMlDO.
PLACIDO .zefIiretto,
Sa trovi il caro oggetto,
Digli che sei aoepiro,
. Ma non gli dir di chi.
Limpido ruscelletto
Sa mai t'incontri in lei,
Dille che pianto sei
Ma non Ie dir qual cigIio
Creacer ti fe' com.
.[J,gillZed by Coogle
70 ,BEGU'LAR VEBBS, TBIBD CONJUG.u'ION.
VOCABULARY.



Gill. To 1lDiah


Jl'inir&.



.Ilntieo. Folly FoUiII.
A. ..



.IlriM. To hear


Befllire
Breakfast.



ColrnWne. Minute.

Alinuto.
Cane, atick


Baatofle. To play

Buour,. ,we.r&.
Tooomb



Petliure. To print.

BfA"'ptJr,.
Corner.


.Ilngolo. ProBe

PrOfs.
Ear . .



Orecclio. Bare. .


Rsro.
Dark .

Oae"ro.


DoTfAire.
Dimaer

Pr.m:o.
To .

PeRI.re.
EXERCISE XX.
Am I not a good boy 'I Not alwayl. When am I not a good
boy 'I When you do not ltudy your lelBOn. And when am I
good boy 'I When you Ileep. Then, good-night. Where are
you going 'I I am going to be a good boy. How many hours
do you Ileep in the night 'I I Ileep -let me think - one, two,
three. four, four - what is the number after Cour'l Five. Five,
six, sevell, eight- how many hours are there from seven to eight?
One hour. Then I Ileep only one hour. Only one hour?
Yes, Bir; an hour. I go to bed at seven o'clock, and I dreaI
myaelt when the bell rings Cor breakCaat at eight o'clock in the
morning. How many hours do you work 'I I work six houra
and a half. What o'clock is it? It is a quarter oC nine. At
what time IhalJ. you go to the 'I Ih&d already f0r-
gotten it; probably at half past twelve. Then I aball go with
you, because I (have) wish to buy a few boob, and I am lure
that he will show me particular attention if I (aball) go with
you. I aball be at your service. I thank you, Bir. Let UI see
what you have done to-day. I have not done anything. Have
you not studied your French lelBOn'l Yes, sir; I studied it two
hours and a half, from eleven till half past twelve. That makes
an hour and a half. Is it possible? Yes, an hour and a half,
and, after all, I do not think I aball be able to recite it this after.
noon. At what time in the afternoon 'I At a quarter of five
At what time do you dine 'I We dine at i. quarter past two, and
I aball be at table twenty-one minutes. Then you have three
hours for your lelBOn: an hour and a quarter before dinner. and
an hour and three quarters after dinner.
DigitIZed by Coogle
-
OOJlmllOTIVB PBOJlOmm. 71
LESSON XXII.
CONJUNOTIVE
169. THE OONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS mi, ti, ci,11i,",
change the .. into e, and gli adds an e, when immedi.
ately followed by the pronouns la, la, li, le, ne. '
170. If the conjUnctive pronouns follow the verb,
they are joined to it, and make one word. If they
precede the verb, they can be united only when the
last pronoun is la, which loses the 0 when the fol.
lowing verb commences with a consonant, except I
or impure 8 j as,
T, la _flllerb, or fltGfIIlerottelG. }
Tel _rulerb, or _nderottelo. I will send it to you.
T, 10 apedi"b, or apedirottelo.
V, AI _fIIlerb, or _ruler017w",. I wi1lll8lld you 1IOJD.e.
171. . ali is never separated from the following
pronoun, whether it precedes or follows the verb.
Thus used, it can be applied to both genders; as,
E,li ,lulo tllafldb, or _fIIloglielo. He II8Ilt it to him, or to her.
172. Loro is never united to any pronoun, and
must always follow the verb.
173. When the pronouns la, la, li, le, and n6, are
used in connection with loro, they must precede the
verb, except in those cases in which they are
affixed to it; as,
Lo __ iloro I II8Iltit to them.
,MGndGIIlo loro Bend it to them.
Non 10 _ndatl 101'0. Do not I8I1d it to them.
DigitIZed by Coogle
174. When an infinitive is followed by another,
the conjunctive pronoun is affixed to the first; as,
8pero poterZa vedcrll. and not ape1'0 poItr vedcrla.
175. The conjunctive' pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, ai,
though not followed by the pronouns 10, la, Ii, le,
fUl, may be expressed by me, te, noi, wi, Be, used
after the verb and not joined to it; but this form
is used only when we wish to designate the
person in a manner more precise, and to the exclu-
sion of all other persons; thus: He loves me may
be expressed by Egli mi ama, or by Egli ama me i
but, Egli mi ama has the meaning that he loves me,
and that he may love others; whilst Egli ama me
shows that 1 am the only person loved by him, and
that no other person shares his love.
N. B. - Egli mi a_ is then properly translated by s-. 10", ....
Egli ama me should be tranalated by He Z_ but me.
176. Auxiliary verbs or present participles which
in English precede the past participle are omitted
in Italian; the conjunctive pronoun is then affixed
to the past participle; as,
Vtdutala in quelZo .tato. pianri II prega,i.
HaTing _ her in that oondition. I wept and prayed.
177. When a pronoun forms one of two or more
objects of the same verb, it is never used conjunc- -
tively; as,
10 ,erilri a lui. II non a lei. and not 10 gli """i. II fIOn a lei.
10 non .cnui m a VIIi m a IIor'ra ,ordlG. and not 10 non iii ,eriIri..
178. The pronouns ci and vi are also employed
as adverbs instead of qui, here, and li, there; as,
10 ci rimarri>, or io ri_rri> qui. I will remain here.
10 pi anliri>. or io andri> Ii I shall go there.
DigitIZed by Coogle
-
,OOlIlUlWtIVII PBOJrOUllB. 1a
In this case, if they are used with the conjunctive
pronouns ci and tJi, they must follow them, and
may be used the one for the other, when the law of
euphony requires it i thus,
You make 118 nmaIa here. {P"oi ci fJi late nmaner., DOt
P"oi ci ci late ,.i __ e.
We II8Dd JOu there J Hoi fJi ci manrliatAO. not
1Noi fJi fJi _nrliamo.
I go there. 10 ci tHIdo. not io fJi HIlD.
They can be transposed, when harmony requires it:
Be will .. UI then {Bgli fJi ci wclra. bet.tar thaa
Bgli ci fJi wcIril.
TABLE OJ' THE COMPOUND CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS.
Me, to me
Te, to thee
Be {to oneself
, to themselves 10 ; Za; li, Ze; ne.*
him or it; her or it; them j lome ofit.
Oe, to us
Ve, to you. .
OlH {to him
, to her '.
La, her or it .
Lo, him or it . }
hi, them, lora, to them.
Le, them ' .
Ne, some of it .
Did he gift you the boob lI'hioh
my father I18Dt to JOU f
Be gaft them. to me yesterday.
, Bow :m&Dy boob ha ... e you DOW T
P"i dWc 'Un llUni CM tRio pad,., .
fJi _1IIlb'
Egli III' Ii diede ierl.
Quanti libn a"'" ora'
* The pmIIOIUll 01. &be ftnt coIW1111 ..... to lie pret\xe4 to &bole of &be --. ..
-.laD mqnqaln I ... _10," to_
DigitIZed by Coogle
OQr.TUltTOTIVE PBONOUJIB.
VOCABULARY.
Amiable oSfIUI6ile.
Brother-in-law CtJgfI4to.
Comb Petti,...
Compliment Complimento.
Despotism . Dilpotilm.o.
Dictate. Ddtame.
To exouae 8CU1IJre.
To ronow ~ &guire.
Grief .".. .IlJ!IJnno.
Kingdom. Regno.
Dl, unwell
Dlneea
Letter
To moralize
To resemble.
Ri!licule"
To sell
Stone'
To SIlCceed
Sure
EXERCISE XXI.
AmlllltJlGto.
MtJlsttitJ.
Ldter/J.
M01'aliuIJre.
Rtu,omiglitJr .
Ridicolo.
Vendere.
Pietr/J.
Ritiscire.
8icuro.
Who is sick? My brother's child is sick. - What is the mat-
ter with him? He has been sick for some time, with a fever.
Did you give him the flowers which my friend sent him? Yes.
sir; I gave them to him yesterday. How old is he? He is
seven years old. Give him this rose. I will give it to him with
pleasure. When will you give-it to him? This a.ftemoon.
Then, if you send your servant to my house, I will give him some
flowers for the boy, and for his pretty sister. Why do you not
send me some roses? . Because you are not sick. But my
pretty Diece is not sick. Well, she is not sick, but she is lovely.
and the flowers of my garden are for her, and (for) those who
resemble her. Excuse me, sir; but you are a little partial.
Probably; but I follow the dictates of my heart. Is it always
safe to follow the dictates of the heart ? Do not begin your old
story. Will you buy my horse? I have two. Will you sell
them to me? One is already sold. To whom? To my brother-
in-law. When did you sell it to him? Three days ago. For
how much? Two hundred and fifty dollars. Then you have
not two horses; you have but one. Well, it was only to make
you understand that I have no need of your horae. You are
right, sir. My friends sent this note, asking me to lend them
.the two books of which you spoke yesterday. They are on that
round table; send them to them with my compliments. What
is the matter with your brother? Nothing is the matter with
him. What have you bought? I have bought three birds.
To whom aha.ll you give them? I shall give them to my ~ .
She has two cats, and cats and birds are not good friends.
,,\
DigitIZed by Coogle
LESSOll' XXIII.
REMARKS ON THE REGULAR VERBS.
179. THE first person plural of every tense ends
in mo.
The second person plural of every tense ends in teo
The third person plural of every tense ends in no.
N. B. - Modeni writers have adopted the termiDadon ro, bIataId
ot RO, in the third 'perIOD plaraJ. ot the oonditicmal, and of the imper-
1'eot aubjunotive.
180. The accent in the third person plural of
the present and imperfect indicative, and in the
present subjunctive, falls always on the last vowel
but two, and not on the last vowel but one, as in
the other persons of the same tenses; as,
amo, ami, amG, amate, amano.
amava, amam, amava,amavamo, amavate, amavano.
ami, ami, ami, amiamo, amiate, amino.
N. B. - In BODle parts of Italy the regular termiDation of the trat
perIOD IJiDgular of the imperfeot is oftea ohauged from. " iDto 0; ...
A7I&IItIII. tcm_. dormitlll, iDatad ot 1171&111'11. t_. donniN.
It is to be regretted that this ohaDgtI baa not been generally adopted,
it it were, the trat perIOD could Dot be miatakeD ibr the third
persoD of the ...me teDae.
181. Some verbs have a double termination; 88,
Imp"%lIre and impanir
CompWe and compire.
With the termination in are and ere, they are regular.
With the termination in ire, they form the present
. in isoo.
DigitIZed by Coogle
'II BJ!VABD ON THE BEGULAB VBBB&
COLLECT,lVE NUMBERS.
182. THE COLLECTIVB NUllBBBB are as follows:
A pair.
Half a score.
A dozen .
About fifteen.
A score.
About thirty.
Unpaio .
Una decina
. UnadozMa
Una quindicina
Una ventina.
Una trentina
Una quarantina
Una cinquantina
Un centinaio
Unmigliaio
About forty.
About fifty.
About a. hUndred.
About a. thousand.
DISTRIBUTIVE NUMBERS.
Acl uno ad uno .
A clue a clue
A clieci a clieci
A venti a 'U6nti
Unaoolta
J)ue"ooUe
D-eooUe
One by one.
Two by two.
Ten by ten.
Twenty by twenty.
Once.
Twice.
Three times.
Primieramente, or in primo l'/LOgo .
8econdariamente, or in secondo l'/LOgo
In Ierz(} luogo.
" Firstly.
Secondly.
Thfrdly.
In quarto luogo. Fourthly.
I am much obliged to you, Bir.
I have not had any answer.
I will not &.il to speaJt to him
about it to.morrow.
Be sure otit, Bir.
Be sure ot it, madam.
Io wi 10lIO rAOlto obbligato, rigfJtwe.
Io fIOn 10 ClWto __ ,;,po.III.
Io Mn tl&lJnCMr8 Ili fII',lG,glicM
tlom.afli.
8i4tt", riaI,o, rigfIOr
8i4ttrtt rialrlJ, rigfJtwll.
DigitIZed by Coogle
BBVABKS ON 'fBlII BBGUL.AB VEBBS. 'l'f
.A.uner
Concert;
1'0 cop,. .....
J>iapoIed

EJdaiIiltioll.
r.vor ...
To fear '
Gentleman
Invitation .
To invite
VOCABULARY.
B'"
Coru:,rlo.
CopitJr,.
Diapotto.

EriIri.ioM.
Fa."",.e.
T_,.,.
Gmtiluomo.
Invito.
liaoilare.
Lovely
Medicine.
Model
To oblige
perfect
Pooket.
Storm
Terrible
Theatre
To want
Wife
EXERCISE xxn.
AfIIIIIrih.
Medid_
Modello.
066IigGr
Perfetto.
TaacG.
Tempata.
. Terri6il
T,/ltro.
Biaogf&ar
MOllie.
Give me the sugar. I have no sugar. Give me something,
then. I have nothing. Where is the bife? On the table,
with the fork and the spoon. Where is the English grammar?
In my room. Have you copied your French translation? I have
copied it twice. Have you IOBt your key? My key is in my
pocket. Whose key is this? It is my brother's. He who
loves, fears. Are you disposed to do me .. favor? I am .. t your
aervice. Lend me your hone, then. My hone is lame. Did
you go to my father's yesterday? Yar, sir; I was with him,
and I enjoyed his agreeable company for two hours and a half.
Have you 8I1y peD8? I have a great many. Give me some.
How many? 6fTe me a dozen. Did you find many friends at
the theatre? Not many; half a score, I think. With whom
did you go? I went with your brother's friend and his wife.
Wu their little daughter with them? Yes, she was with us.
Ia she not .. very loVely creature'? Yes, she is a model of
beauty. Shall you go to the great ball to-night? Yes, I have
already invited your niece. Has she accepted the invitation?
I have had no answer yet. When did you send your invita-
tion? This morning, at half put eight. Probably she was
not at home; she went to the exhibition this morning. I hope
(that) she will send me an anawer soon. She will not fa.il to
send you an anawer; be sure of it. But when will she send ill?
It is already a quarter of four, and I have made no other engage-
ment. Have you any good gloves? I have some, but they are
not very good. Will you accept this pair? I thank you,lir.
DigitIZed by Coogle
'18
LBSSOll' XXIV.
ORDINAL NUMBERS.
First. Primo .
&condo
28rzo
Second.
Third.
QIMJrlo
Quinto
Beato.
&ttimo
Otlavo
Fourth.
Fifth.
Sixth.
Seventh.
Eighth.
NO'T/O. Ninth.
Decimo Tenth.
Undecimo
Duoileuimo
Decimo terzo
Decimo quarto
Decimo quinto.
Eleventh.
Twelfth.
Thirteenth.
Decimo 868f.o
Decimo aeUimo
Decimo otlavo .
Decimo nono
Ventesimo or 11ige8imo
Trentesimo.
QutJrantesimo
Oinquantesimo
SesBantesimo
Settantesimo
Otlantesimo
Novantesimo
OenleBimo
Mille8imo
Milionesimo
Fourteenth.
Fifteenth.
Sixteenth.
Seventeenth.
Eighteenth.
Nineteenth.
Twentieth.
Thirtieth.
Fortieth.
Fiftieth.
Sixtieth.
SeventietJ?.
Eightieth.
Ninetieth.
One hundredth.
One thousandUl.
One millionth.
DigitIZed by Coogle
NtnIBEBS. 79
183. Ordinal numbers are variable, and agree
with their substantives; thas,
Alto !lUllriO, tC'U w... Act 1burth, BOeI1e third.
184. If the ordinal number is 8. compound num-
ber, both numbers must agree with the noun; as,
La l,done deci_ !lUIIrltI The 1burteenth 1_.
LA den., !lUin" file Uterall7: The fifteenth rows.
185. Ordinal numbers, commencing from the thir-
teenth, can also be formed by changing the last
vowel of the cardinal numbers into e s i ~ i as,
TrttliurilAO 'rhiraDth.
QuatlordicerilAo Fourteenth.
QuintliceeilAO Fifteenth.
B,tliceeilAO. Sixteenth.
DiciGaetlerifAO Seventeenth.
DiciotterifAO Eighteenth.
Ventitluerimo Twenty.aeoond.
QUII,..ntllcifl!lU'rimo Foriy-Ilfth.
S",lInllJutterimo . Six\y-eeventh.
Centot7"mtllci1l!lfl'rilAo One hundred and thirty-llfth.
MU""',centowntiqv.r.rU,.erimo 'rhiraD hundred t w e n ~
PROPORTIONAL NUMBERS.
Doppio Double. I Quintuplo. Quintuple.
Triplo Triple. Decuplo. Ten-fold.
Qu,adruplo Quadruple. Oentuplo. A hundred-fold.
186. Proportional numbers are variable; as,
Doppie _nicAe, double sleeve&. Doppill inll'1'7"illtll, double grate.
It I were _ of what he 1&)'110
Be_ofit.
I have not received a letter 1br lib:
montbl.
& loeri ricu7"O di c0 cA. die
SiGlen, ricu,.o.
./Vbn Ao 7"icevuto flU """'
,ei tAeri.
DigitIZed by Coogle
10'
Adnoe
Beai.dtt.
Catalogue
T o ~
Compoeiticm
Couree
OJuel
Di1Iioulty
To examine
Germaa
Beartiq
VOQABt1LABY.
Couiglio.
Fv.ari di.
CGI4l0g0.
Claatl/icGre.
C_porizion,.
CorIO.
CrvtUl,.
DiJlicoita.
Em.iurl.
2Wuco.
Di cuor,.
JOIInl87. traTel. YiIIggio.
Libra.r;y Lilmri40
Page. p.u.
To perll8ftl'e Per_M ..
Sincere. 8i"cero. ' ....
s.n . . . . VIl",
Spanish Bpagnvolo.
Vwty. .'. V""ita.
Viper Piper'"
Volume Vol ....
EXERCISE XXIII.
Shall I give your books to the boobeller? Give them to him,
iC you wish. Shall I give them. to biB friend? Give theaf to
him or to biB mend. Why do you not apeak? Becia.uae I am
afraid oC making mistakea. You will 'never speak well, it you
are afraid oC making mistakea. Have you ammined your
French composition? I eDmined it yesterday. How many
mistakea did you find on the first page? A dozen. How many
on the IIeClOnd? About twice as many. Twenty-Cour mis-
takea! what 8hall I do? What 8hall you do? Study, pane-
V8re, and I am mre that you will overcome all di1Iiculty in your
tranalation. ' If I were IIUl'8 oC it! What would you do? I
would Btudy heartily. Study, then, and be sure to make DO
mistakea in the COUllle oC six months. Ia this your sincere
advice? The advice Which I give you is the lI&JD.e which I have
given to my brother, BiBterB, and Criends. How many volumea
are there in this library? About fiftythoUB&D.d. Have you the
catalogue? Yea, Bir; you will find the books clasaified: the
EngliBh books are from the first page to the seventy-aixth-about
Corty thoUB&D.d; the German, from the BeventY-B8Venth page to
the ninety-1IrBt page-about thirty-teven hundred volumea ; the
others are French, Italian, and Spanish boob. What is the
matter with your Bister? She is beside heraelf, Cor joy. Why?
Her friend, who has been absent two y8&1'8 and & half, and from
whom ahe had not received a letter Cor seven months, arriTed
yesterday. Where is he? He is with her, and they are
happy.
DigitIZed by Coogle


81
LESSON XXV.
IRREGULA.R VERBS.
187. THE irregularity of the Italian verbs is com-
monly in the perfect, and occasionally in the present
of the indicative and subjunctive moods, in the
future, condition8l, and imperative.
IRREGULARITY OF THE PERFECT.
188. The verb accendere, to kindle, is irregular
in its perfect.
IDItead of IIccendei it mr.kea IICceri
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. .. IIcCemla
..
/ICC ...
.. II /lCcetuUrono .. /lCc"".o.
N. B. - The second perIIOJl singular (/ICc"",,,") and the tint and
II800Jld perIODII plunJ. (/lCcendetAmo, /lCC,ndute) are a l 1 f a ~ regular.
From this example, it may be seen:
1. That the irregularity of the perfect is in the
first and third persons singular, and in the third per-
Bon plural.
2. That the third person singular is formed by
changing the i of the first person into e.
a. That the third person plural is formed by
adding ro ~ o the third person singular.
N. B. -The aboTe raleI hold good fbr all irregular perIIot&
DigitIZed by Coogle
81 IBBEGULAB VERBS.
IRREGULARITY OF THE PRFBENT AND IMPERA.TIVB.
189. If the verb wni,.e were regular, it would
make for the
Pu8BN'1' IlmIC6.TIVII.
J7.RD.
J7eni.
J7elle.
V.nillmo.
Venite.
J7.nOflO.
Pus. SUlIl11NCTIVlI.
J7.na.
. J7enll.
. J7111Il.
J7.nillmo.
J7.niate.
J7eratino.
But, as it is irregular, it makes
J7enuo.
V-.. ni.
V- .. ne.
J7eniamo, .
J7.nite.
J7.ngono.
J7eJagG.
J7eJagG.
J7.ngG.
J7eniamo.
J7.niate.
J7'IIgGM.
. From the above, it may be seen:
Veni.
J7.na.
J7 enillmo.
Venite.
J7.nano.
J7ieni.
J7eJagG.
J7enialllO,
J7enite.
J7eJagGMo
1. That the second persons singular and plural
of the present indicative and imperative are alike.
2. That the three persons singular of the
present subjunctive and the third person singular
of the imperative are alike, and formed by changing
the 0 of the first person of the present indicative
into a.
S. That the third person plural of the present
subjunctive and of the imperative are alike, and
formed by adding no to the third person singular.
4. That an a is added before the termination te
of the second person plural indicative, to form the
same person plural of the present subjunctive.
N. B.-Verba of the IeOOIld ocmJuptiaD ohaDge ete into iate.
DigitIZed ~ y Coogle
88
lRREGULABITY OF THE FUTURE AND OONDITIONAL.
190. The termination of the future, regular or
. irregular, is always ,.0; ra., 'I'd, 'I'emo, rete, 'I'anno.
191. The termination of the conditional is always
rei, 'I'eati, 'I'e1ibe, 'I'emmo, reate, 'I'ebbero.
192. If'Valere, to be worth, were regular, it would
make for the
FuTuu.
Y a l c r ~ ,
Y tJlerai,
YtJlera,
YtJleremo,
Yaleretl,
YtJleranflO.
But, as it is irregular, it makes
Y a r r ~ ,
Yarrai,
Yarra,
Yarremo,
Yarretl,
Yarranno.
CoNDITIONAL.
YtJlerei,
Yaler,,",
Y tJler,bb"
Yaler,mmo,
Y tJlerate,
Yal,rebberi.
Yarrri,
Yarruti,
Yarr,bbe,
Yarremmo,
Yarrate,
Yarr.66ero.
From the alfove, it may be seen:
1. That the irregularity of the future and condi.
tional . rests only on the change or omission of
one or more of the letters preceding the regular .
termination.
2. That the alteration which takes place in the
first person singular of the future is carried through
all the other persons of the same future, and of the
conditional.
DigitIZed by Coogle
lBBBGULAR VEBBB.
:Usmrtt OF mE ABOVE RUUS.
193. In order to master the Italian irregular
verbs, it is required_to know:
1. The present indicative.
2. The first person of the perfect.
3. The first person of the future.
4. The past participle.
IF The 1lrat peraon of the pedlct and futme and the put par-:
tioiple will be tbund in the llBt, page 20'1.
The few irregular preaenta, and any other exoeptiODl to the abO...,
raleI, will be filund in a aeparate llBt, pasri19.
He pTe me agnatd-.J. oteupr.
Look at this portrait.
Ma1 I uk you question ,
He asked a faTor of me to-Dight.
I intend to go to the ball.
Egli tAi tliede IIIIIlID _lICe""""
fhartlalc quuIo rilraUo.
Potrei/4rvi VIlA 1Iot&tJ_,
Hi cio_ntlb vn /4_' ,t4",4-
Ho intennont tli 4nUr, 41 641lo.
EXTRAOl' FROM LE NOTTI ROMANE.
Romolo :6aO allora gli occhi alla sua Iancia formiclabili oome
lei, e robutam8llte col piede nel mezzo ]a 8peaO. Poecia, get-
tando a terra con diapettoBo Cl'Uccio i due tronchi, in voce oom-
preaaa mormon>: Vanne, ministra d'imperio afl'ann0Ba: n lituo
to. pih di te potente e fe1ioe. Per qual fato io riBurgo, 8 veggo
]a mia c i t ~ ora trionfante con discipline contrarie aIle mie? E
tu ahe fortemente 808tieni i nOBtrl aspetti, 88 mai narri a quem
abitatori, forae non oreduta maraviglia, c i ~ ahe meco raglonuti,
di' 10ro ahe altrettanta 10 ne provai cia te aacoltando n preaente
imperio; che vidi Roma, non ]a canobbi, e diBoendo. Spar'ft, e
n monte mUggl con rombo di terremoto. Si aperse ]a terra BOtto
10 spettro adegn08O, e in quell-. BOBpirando pioinbO, coprendOBi n
volto con ]a viBiara. Le ombre racoolsero i tronchi dell' asta
fonclatrioe del glori08O imperio, e l'une all'altre in silenzio 88 Ii
moatravano.
DigitIZed by Coogle

I
'1
I
Tobe1cmg
Bo'We
Diatance
Etarna.l
Glor;y
To imitate
Imported
TopaiDt
Pal80e
Petmon
JBBBGULAB VBBBB.
VOCABULARY.
.8.pparlentre.
Boniglia.
,Di.ta,.. ..
Etemo.
GlorltJ.
IfI&itar,.
IfI&portato.
Pillar
Palaz:zo.
PdUione.
Portrait Ritrallo.
Question .Dotaca1ltlG.
Beoeipt. '. ,RicftruIG.
To revenge VeftIlicarn.
To lei Vetler,.
Bight Villa.
SoCiety. 8ocWta.
Steam Vapor'"
Trouble. Imbsru:co.
Truly VeraNrate.
EXERCISE XXIV.
Qood-moming, John. Good-momiDg, William. How do
you do, tcHlay? I am not very well. What is the matter with
you? I am in trouble. What can. I do for you? You can. do
a great deal for me. I am at your I18!'Vice. To-day is the
twenty-seventh of the month; I receive my money the twenty--
ninth, and - And what? And -- Look at that paper on
the table. You must pay two hundred and fifty dolJara to-day,
and you have not the money; is that all? Yes. Two hundred,
twenty and twenty aTe forty, and ten makes fifty; two hundred
and fifty; are you still in trouble? I am muoh obliged to you ;
BhalJ. I give you the receip't? I have never given you a receipt
when you have lent me money. I thank you. Have you seen
my portrait? It is very i>ocI; who painted it? The lIIme
painter who painted my two children's portraits. It is truly
beautiful. How much did it cost? One hundred and fifty dol-
lars. lt is not very dear. Are you hungry? No, I am thirsty.
What shall I give you? Give me some wine. .Are you not
ashamed? Of what? Have you forgotten that I-belong to
the temperance society? No, I have not forgotten it. Then
why do you ask me such questions? You are right; I C&nDot
speak. Why not? May I ask you a question? Certainly.
Have you not a trunk full of wines? Yes; but my wines are
imported. What is the diJl'erence? The clliI'erence is this : that
not many can. pay two dolJara a bottle for imported wines. May
I ask a favor of you? Certainly. Can you lend me your black
horse ? Yes, with pleasure; where do you intend to go? To
my fathtlr's. How is your father? He is very well, but my
mother is ill.
DigitIZed by Coogle
86
AGBBJDIIlRT OP TIDI VERBS.
LB88011 XXVI.
AGREEMENT OF THE VERBS.
194. EVERY verb agrees with its subject; as,
(hglielmo , riceo William is rich.
JVbi aiG_ riccAi We an rich.
195. If the subject has several nominatives in
different persoDS, the verb is put in the :first person,
if one of the nominatives is in the first person; as,
(hgIUlmo. GioN."i. Hi e4 io aiG_ riceAi.
W"llliam. John.,.,.. and I an rich.
196. If one of the nominatives is in the second
person, and the others in the third, the verb must
agree with the second person; as,
(hglielmo. Gion""i tHri rieIe riceAi.
William. John and you an rich.
197. If all the nominatives are in the third per-
son, the verb is put in the third person; as,
Ovglielmo. GioN""i IOno "eeAi. William and John an rich.
USE OF THE IMPERFECT AND PERFECT.
198. A past action is, in Italian, expressed by
either the" imperfect or perfect tense.
199. The imperfect tenie is used:
1. To express an action which was still existing
(going on)" when another action, expressed or
understood, took place. This may be ascertained
by observing whether the English past teDSe can be
DigitIZed by Coogle
AGBEElIENT OF THE VEBBB. 87
changed into was, joined to the present participle
of the v e r ~ in question; as, '
Qualldo wi .ntr/Ut. io .erivet/a letter
When y o ~ mtered I wrote (I W88 writing) letterB.
2. To express the repetition of a past action,
or the h8.bit of having performed some action. This
may be ascertained by observing whether the
English past tense can be changed into I wed to,
with the infinitive of the given tense, without alter-
ing its signification; as,
Io andatIIJ alla ,cuola ogni giorno.
I wmt (used fA) go) to aohool every day.
200. There is but one imperfect in Italian; thus,
1 went. or,l""d to go. is alwa)'ll upreaaed by 10 atadatllJo
201. The past tense is used to express an action
which is completely past, and which has no relation
to any other action; as,
1m ,erilri lettere. yeBterday I -m:ote letters.
202. In speaking of a past action which is not
determined by any circumstance, it is left to our
will to use either the perfect or the imperfect; thus,
we may say,
a.are/v grande. t/alorOlo. or }C_ W88 t and valiant.
a.ar, .ra grand' "alOTOIO. pea
But in the first case the tense of the verb is inde-
pendent of any other; in the second, it is associated
with some other which is understood, such as when
he lived, or when he fought.
EXAMPLES.
How many pages have you read r Q_nte pagine aveta leIto 1
I have read but sevm pages. .Non Ao letta d, ,tile pagin,

DigitIZed by Coogle
88 AOBEEIIENT OF TBliI VEBBS.
Acbantap
Affable
Auction
Berlin ..
Tocome
To compel
To fly
Ora.pee
To humiliate
Toboy
VO.CABULARY.
VaRtaggio.
.8IalJil
Incafllo.
Berlino.
V,nir,.
Fortllar,.
Fuggire.
U_
Urailiar ..
Saper',
Oooaaion. Occoriotle.
P_. . . Per,OM.
Te read IAggert.
To -1' Dir,.
Seuon. Stagiou.
To turn VoIIa,.,,.rtlr ..
Tc UDite. add Unir" "",unger ..
Victoriou V'atIorloao.
Winter. Inverno.
Te write Scriver ..
EXERCISE XXV.
Where are your brothers going? They are gqing to the
exhibition. Why did you uot go with them? Because I WB8
not ready. Have you spoken to my father? I have not spoken
to him. What are you writing? 18m writing a letter. To
whom? To my friend. You and your friend. have always bean
good friends, but I and my brother have never found a true
friend. Doell your friend write to you often? He wrote two
long letters last week, and he 11II8d to write three letters a week.
when he WB8 in Paris. My mother WB8 always alable, but on
this oocaaion she WB8 afl'able and generous. How many pagel
of that book have. you copied? I have copied twenty-two pages.
To-day I copied only four pages, and yesterday I (of them)
copied six; yet there was a time when I copied twelve pages
every day. Have you any good boob' No, sir. You 11II8d to
have very good boob last winter; what have you done with
them.? It is true that I had very good boob last winter, but,
as very few persons came to buy them, and I WB8 in great want
of money, I BOld them at auction. Were you at home when my
friend came? Yea, I was at home. What were you doing'
I and my sisters were reading a -German book. Did he speak
German'l No, he rI&id that he 11II8d to apeak German two years
ago, when he WB8 in Berlin, but that now he had fergotten
almost all of it. Did you believe it? I did not believe it; but
what could I do? You could have done what I did yesterday.
What did you do yesterday? I made him apeak German with-
out asking whether he knew German 01' not

DigitIZed by Coogle


CO)(P AlU.TIVES 89
..
LBBBOlf XXVII.
OOMP ARA TIVES.
203. A QUALIFYING ADJECTIVE become8 a com-
parative :
1. Of equality; with the following adverb8 :
Tanto, &8, 80, 80 much; correlative quanto, &8
000, 0.8, 80 ; "come, &8.
Quanto, a8 much; ".
Quanto! } Without correlative8
. .&paM clll,lik"",
EaM a 'aAto eaprieciotG quanto She is u capriciou u ungrat..
iflgf'Ua. ful.
Y'oi ride cod mim'o come i'!felice. You are u wretched u unhappy.
QIIGAto ollUlo. aUrdlafllo a fliT- As much u he is honest. 10 much
NorO. he is virtuOUL
Egli a mim'o fUGnto tIoi. He is wretched u muoh u you.
Y'oi liele tU ptJn Iii me. i'!felice. You are like me. unfortuDatL
2. Of 8uperiority; with the adverb8 pi"", megZio.
3. Of inferiority; with the adverb8 me1W, peggio.
204. If the comparison of 8uperiority and infe-
riority is between two verb8 referring to the 8ame
8ubject, or two adjective8 referring to the same
noun or pronoun, the connecting than i8 translated
by chej a8,
Y'oi pottle meglio .en"", eM
kgger,.
Y'oi .im pit .aggio eM riceo.
Y'oi ride meno ricco eM aaggio.
5
You C&1l write better than nacI.
You are more wise than rioh. .
Yoa an Ie. rich than wile.
DigitIZed by Coogle
90 COJIP ApATITES.
205. If the comparison is between two noUDS or
pronouns to which the same adjective refers, titan is
expressed by di, of (the words in comparison being
understood); as,
Egli , .'M /orte IIi tIOi. He is leE mong than you.
1 r. IIIOCierni 10lIO ,nil firMai The modern kings are greater
tUgli anUclai. tyrants than the ancient one&.
N. B. - It the word which tolloWII t/aa" hu a complemeni under-
atood. CM or IIi may be ued. with the dif6lrenoe. thai in using CM
the following proD01IIlllhould be in the nominatift ... in EDgliah ; ...
Egli l,nil in/dic. IIi lIN. He is more 1iDhappy than I. or
Egli',nil i'!lelic. CM io (the 'Verb non lOtIO being 1Uldentcod).
Que.,' UOIIIO',nil in/dic. IIi peUa This man is more 1iDhappy than
tloa_ thai lfOIIWl. or
til""" U01AO 'piil i'll"ic. CM pella don"" (Mil e).
In such case the Italians make use of the negative
non. In all other comparative phrases, it is better
to use Me'than dij as,
Ii: ruglio teal.r " reo CM pu- It is beI;tao to aft a gail" man
"ir. "" i"noe,. than to pllDiah an innooeDt ODe.
206. .7ble and guale are often used as compara-
tives of equality; as,
Felic. clai 118IU Ie CON Ieali peali Happy he who ... thiDp .. the7
are.
N. B. - Teal. II often suppreued; ...
Felic. cM ",,u I. cote peali tOfIO.
EXAMPLES.
Do you bow how to tra.u1ate
this paget
I am better to-day than I ".. last
week.
To do good to anybody.
Bape', tIOi tread"rT' petta pea-
!Ii"'"
10 do ruglio oggi IIi pel CM er/J
IG aeltimtl"" .cor.a.
Far b_ a guaICUM.
DigitIZed by Coogle
To avoid
Atheist
Contagious
To deceive
Dangerous
Fatiguing
To gain
Hypocrite
Idle
Injurious
COIIP ABATIVE8.
VOCABULARY.
Ef1iIare.
Ateuta.
Contagio80.
Ingannare.
Pericoloao.
Faticoro.
Guadagnare.
lpoerito..
Ollli08O.
Ingiurioso.
Miler
Numerous
Openly
Politician
Precious
Satisfactory.
Shameflllly
Skiltql'
Thief
To translate
EXERCISE XXVI.
91
AfJGTO.
.M67Aer08O.
Aperta,.."".
Politico.
Pr,::ioIo.
Sodtlilfaeente.
SfJerflOfTlltJlafllMlte.
Aba..
Ladro.
Tradurre.
How many books have you read? I do not know. Have you
1'8lld more than I? I read more in one month than you do in a.
year. Do you speak French? A little; but I can write better
than I can speak. This is often the case. Nothing is more pre-
cious than time. Of' two one as akilf'ul aa the
other, the one gains who is the more crafty. He who gives is
more ha.ppy than he who receives. It is easier to advise than
to do. It is more diffioult to speak a language than to translate
it. I have as muoh money as your brother, but he has more
friends than I. My brother knows how to make friends; and I
know that it is easier to make moneY than to make f'riends ; and
that it is easier to make a friend than to preserve his friendship.
Nothiug is more satisfactory to man than to do good. To b8
idle is more fatiguing than to labor, and nothing is more con-
tagious than bad examples. Are you Bleepy? Not muoh; I
am more thirsty than Bleepy. Yesterday was colder than to-
day, but to-day I am colder than I was yesterday. How can
that be? yesterday I had a good fire in my room, and to-day
I do not find any fire in your house. Is it very co14 in thill
room? I do not know. Why do you speak, then? Because I
am very cold. A miser is as iDJuriOUB to society as a thief'.
A hypocrite is more dangerous than an atheist. How can' I
believe it? The atheist tells you openly what he is, and what
he believes, and you' can avoid his company; the hypocrite tells
you what he is not, and what he does not believe, and you
believe him, and you find that he has oheated you ahamef'ully.
DigitIZed by Coogle
82
BUPEBI..UIVEB.
LESSON XXVIII.
SUPERLA.TIVES.,
207. THEBE are two forms of the superlative in
Italian: the relative and the absolute.
208. The relative superlative is formed by plac-
ing the definite article before the adverbs piu and
m e n o ~ which are used to form the comparative; as,
Ricco, m. L } h. pia ricco }rich
Ricclai, m. p. no pii ricc1ai ere
POHTtI, f. L } fIUftO JI01IITtI} ltJ fIUftO ,pDtJirtl} rest.
POHT', f. p: poor. fIUftO poRr, poonr. " fIUftO power, POO
OllllDVArIOJr. -The defiDite article is omitted ",hen pia and .,ftO
modify a verb; 88,
Quato a ClO c1ae pii rAi piace. That is whatI like the JIlCIIIt.
209. The absolute superlative is formed by
adding issim between the last vowel and the preced-
ing letter of- the qualifying adjective; as,
Dotto, tlo#-iarim-o. Dotts, dotHari-.
DoUi, tlo#-iarim.-i. ~ , dott-Uri .....
210. A.djectives ending in co and go, or ca and ga,
take an h, in order to preserve the hard sound of
c and gj as,
Ricco, ricclaiarimo; luragtJ, lung1&iarifAtl.
211. Some of the adverbs, as bene, maZe, poco,
mollo, spes80, become superlatives by changing the
last vowel into iB8im6 j as,
LtI wdo pochiarimo, h'taChi ci wuitl ipmVrimo.
I _ her very little, though I go there very often.
DigitIZed by Coogle
5UPEBLATIVES. 98
IRREGULAR SUPERLATIVES
.sere. aorid. acerrlmo. vfll7 acrid;
DeWre. celebrated. celeberriDlo. verr celebrated.
Ifllegro. upright. inlegerrimo. verr upright.
Inferior.. intVior. i".fimo. verr inAIrior.
Nuero. miaerable. .iurrlDlO. 'VfIl'1 milBrable.
SGlubr.. lIIolubrious. aaluberrlmo. verr lIIolubrious.
Superior" llllperior. "'premo. verr llllperlor.
N. B. -The comparative and the relative llllperlative otthe above
acJjeo\ives are 1bnned regular111rith the adverbll pii and aeRO; 88.
Acr
JlCieero.
_acr

ii_acre.
il piii .iuro.
IRREGULAR COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES
RETAUiED FROM LATIN.
B_. good. miglior,. better. ottimo. best.
CaUiflO. bad. peggior.. 1I'Ol'IIe. paaimo. wont.
Piccolo. mnall. minor., mnaller. .;"imo. IIID&lleIt.
Grande. great. fAI1Q!Iior" greater. flllllrimo. greatest.
N. B. - The above adjectives ma1ibrm the absolute llllperlative
ngalar17; 88. buo"ilrimo. catti'lliarimo. piccoZilrimo. graRtlilrimo.
Gr' The adverbll meglio. peggio. m,no. are the comparatives of the
adverbll6 .... male. poco.
212. A superlative is formed by simply placing
the article between the noun and the adjective; as,
Napoli la bella, Naples the beautiful.
N. B. - The repetition of the acijeotive to tbrm the llllperlatlve. 88
tiM doRM 6ello 6ella. is obsolete.
EXAMPLES.
Wh1ch is the best portrait!
JtI1 BOn'. is the best.
How does JOur brother apeak
French!
I want to Bee him at the hospital.
and he 11'88 In 'ftr1 bad humor.
Qual' l iZ miglior rilrGtto ,
Quello tli mio ftglio i il migliore.
Come parla tIOIIro fratello '"

10 andai a ",derlo all'oepetlGl,. ed
.gli era tli cattillilrimo umore.
DigitIZed by Coogle
To CIOlrlbrm
To consume
To convinoe.
To deny
To die
To diapoIe
Heaven
Honorable
Hospital
Humor
Import:a.nt
BUPEBLATIVE.
VOCABULARY.
Con/ONII4r,i.
CO_fAIIre.
Contlincer
Negar
Monr ..
Dilporr
Ci.lo.
Onorewle.
Orpedal
UIltGr
IaportGnI
To live
Logio
Monument
Toproduoe
Productive
Reply
To 800id
8tud1
8ympatbJ
While
While (in a)
EXERCISE xxvn.
Viwer
Logicil.
MOftHIIIItD.
Prod"rr ..
Prod","
BiIpolttJ.
Bgritlar,.
8ttMliare.
Bi'lft1lllliG.
Menlre.
In poco _po.
Is it not better to die a man than to live a ClOward? I can-
not 8oD8W8l' BUch a question. Are you disposed to be a ClOward ?
No, I am not disposed be a ClOward, but I know that he is
the most cowardly who is the least disposed to live? Is your
brother as rich as my uncle? No, your brother is richer than
my uncle; but my friend William is the richest merchant (that)
we have. Who is happy? He who has no remorse. And.,o
is the most happy? The man who lives in a world of
I cannot deny that you have a good horse; but mine is better
than yours, and my brother's is the best of all. The poor man
is often more happy than the rich. I believe it; but why 10 ?
BecaUlle he has fewer wanta than the rich. How does my aiater
pronounce French? Very well. The earth is lIIIIaller than the
Bun, but it is not I!O IIIIIall as the moon. Aswe cannot make the
world as we wish, let us oonf'orm to the world in which we live.
Those who work the moat, often gain the leu'. The m&1l who
lives in BOCiety is bound to produoeatleut as much as he ClOn-
sumes. The study of Ianguagea is very uaei'ul, becaUlle the lan-
guage of a nation is the moat important monument of ita his-
tory. What is the matter with you? Nothing is the matter
with me; you see that I am very well, but I have been scolding
my friend. Who is that woman? She is my mother'B dress-
He who is generous is always a good man; but he who
18 ignorant is always ignorant. Then he who is learned is
always learned. On the contrary, he who is learned is often
very ignorant.
DigitIZed by Coogle
POSSESSlVJ!l PBOliOUNB. IS
LESSON XXIX.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, continued.
213. THE POSSEi!SIVE PRONOUN is often omitted
whenthe noun which follows it has reference to the
subject; as,
Metteteflill fIIIIno III cuor,. Put your hand on your heart.
214:. The possessive pronouns mine, thine, etc.,
which in English follow the noun with a preposi.
tion, precede it in Italian without the preposition; as,
Queslo mio IImieo. This f r i ~ d of mine.
Un tsOat7'o plJrente A relation of y011rll.
215. Possessive pronouns, used substantively in
the singular, signify one'8 property; in the plural
they stand for /rif:ndB,/oUower8, relativeB; as,
10 apeMO il mio. I spend my properlJ.
Come ltanno i fWnri 1 How are your friends f
QUllntlo i min flitldlro il nemico, When my (soldiers) 1&'" the
1'".,lIlirono. enemy they assaulted him.
216. Possessive pronouns relating to a noun
before mentioned take no article, if we wish only to
mark possession; as, .'
Queslo cllfllllio i mio, ,d i ii mio cAe eorre il piil.
This h01'll8 Is mine, and it Is mine that runs the swiftest.
217. To avoid ambiguity, suo and sua are
changed into di lui and di lei, when they do not
relate to the subject of the proposition; as,
Egli 1&11 illillro di lui. He has hla book.
N. B. - Egli 1uJ il no lillro would lignify Aia CItIm book.
DigitIZed by Coogle
96 P08SJi88IVK PBONOUNB.
Instead of the possessive pronouns, conjunc-
tive pronouns are used with nouns which refer to
the limbs of the body, or a part of one's dress; as,
Mi rvpp' il braccio. I bloke m1 arm.
8i il /lito. He cut his 8Dger.
Vi bruriGlte I' GbUo Ycu have burnt your ooat.
Gli fslliarono IG ,... The7 cut oft' his heed.
N. B. -Several other upreIIIIioDII are 80 1UI8d tbr lUI&logy ; ...
Egli _ gli padre, or egli _ no potlr
He is not his &ther.
219. The gerund, which in English follows the
possessive pronoun, as my being, hill writing, is
expressed in It!ilian by the infinitive with the
definite article; the possessive pronoun is then
changed into the corresponding personal pronoun in
the nominative, and placed after the verb; as,
L' _ io M1 beiDg
Lo ICriver Hi Your writing
L' Gvir .gli ICritto His haTing written
220. As the verb mUllt {biaognare} is impersonal
in Italian, & change of construction in the phrase is
necessary. The sentence should begin with the
verb must, biaogna, followed by the conjunction eM,
and the subject of must should be placed before the
following verb, which is used in the subjunctive; as,
BiaogRG eM Guglielao ICriH ulUlleUert.l.
W"illiam muat write a letter.
BiaognG eM io HIla alia .euoltJ.
I m1l8t go to 8OhooL
N. B. - ThIa 8XprSon is the lIIme as the 11111 of If ie mC.,Gry.
in Engliah ; as, It Is neotll!ll&!'1 that I should go.
o-V.A.TIOlf. - U the lubject be .. pronoun, the sentence ma1 be
expreaed as in English, with the change of the personal pronoun into
.. OODJunotive pronoun; as, JIfi lriaogu GfttltJre alla .cuolt.l.
DigitIZed by Coogle
, .
..
P08BBI!I8IVB PBOHOUBB. 8'1
VOCABULARY.
A&o&atioD. . .lJfdlaio ...
To put M .... II.
CoachmaD CoccTt.Mr To,-t. PranltJr ..
Btiquette El1c1wlta. ProperlJ. Propria .....
P&miliar Fa.iliare. To ~ t
Ripdn'''
GeaeralJ7
Geurlllae,de. Supenor SuperiDr,.
:r..cke,y Lc&ccTt.l. To take off. 7bglilr,.
Memorial. SupplicCl. Term .
.
Terai_
Hoblem&D .Nb6ile. To tremble
7\-_ ..
.
To omit . O.,ettllre. Various .
.
VIIrio.
Paiieaoe . Pt.LCieuIl. Wife ... Moglw.
EXERCISE XXVIll.
Good-moming, madam. Good-momiDg, sir. How do you
do? I am very well, I thank you. How is your daughter?
She is very well. Where is abe? She is at my father'. icMJay.
WhOll8 pencil is this ? It is mine. Is yours better than mine?
I do not know. How much did you pay for youn? A dollar
and a halr. And I paid twice as much (the double) for mine.
Three dollan? Certainly. My pencil is three timea better
than youn. What is the matter with your mend? He has 100t
all hill property, and is now in great trouble. Has he not a
rich tir.ther? Yea, bat he wiBhea fA) be independent. Put on
your glovea and take off your hat. Who is that man' He is
a brother or mine. How many broth ... have you? Oaly one.
Why do you not .. y he is my brother? Becauae I can .. y he
is a brother or mine even when I have but one brother. I think
that this is a mistake. No, this is not a mistake. Well, can
JOIl .. y thia is a wire or mine? I don't. No, I cannot.
Then you cannot propltl'ly .. y a brother ormine, when you have
but ODe brother. Is it true that the ItalianJand Frenchalwaya
Bay Mister, Madam, and MisB, before mother, father, and lister,
Yea, they generally do (say ao), but this etiquette is omitted
when they are on f&miliar terms, or when they apeak or thsir own
mends to a superior, becauee in such CB88B it would be afI'ected.
A certain nobleman who ha410lt hiB property went once to pre-
Bent a petition to the Prince 'or Cond45, and began to repeat Millo
ter my father, and Madam my mother, ao many timea, that the
Prince 10lt hiB patience, and, calling hiB servant, he said, " Mister
my lackey, .. y to Mister my coachman to put M8BII1'B. my hOrB811
to Madam my coach. "
DigitIZed by Coogle
81
LBBBO. xxx.
USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
221. ANY verb expressing doubt, such as pregare,
temere, duhitare, Bpe1'are, or any conditional proposi-
tion which conveys to the mind the idea of a thing
not yet accomplished, and which may be fulfilled or
not, according to circumstances, if followed by the
conjunction eke, that, governs the following verb in
the subjunctive.
222. The subjunctive verb is put in the present
if the verb of the principal proposition be in the
present or future; in any other case, it is put in the
imperfect; as,
Temo eTa. il .io llaico pGrla I le&r that m:t friend will leaH
. __ II tItIlmRi. without -mg me.
fta"", eM lllio /rGlello pGrm.. I feared that m1 brother would
.UII ",!lerlll;' leave without -mg me.
BBKABx. - It is Dot the 1I'Ord preoading the verb. bnt the spirit,
the intention, the object we have in view. which dall8r:mine the proper
_ of the subjuncijve. Thua. it we wish to Bpl'8 mora or .. oar-
tIointy or doubt. we ma1 -1.
Cr_ eM egU , 11111I11III410. or } I baliava tha h' ok.
Cr_ eM egli .iII II_IGIo. tell
. Cr_ eM , or } I believe that he hili arrived.
Credo eM egb 114 IIrrlV/JIo.
And we would -1.
Cr_ eTa. Die , il CreGtore dell' ""i",rlO. and not eM IitJ
I believe that God is the Creator olthe univeraa.
223. As the subjunctive mood is used to express
the idea of anything which is conditional, or not yet
accomplished, so the future may be used instead of
DigitIZed by Coogle
the present subjunctive, and the conditional instead
of the imperfect subjunctive; as,
nmo cAe qli JItlrlG, or JItlmril tmSlJ wdmlli.
TerIaetHJ cAe qli part"", or partir."", "UII Ntlertai.
N. B. - The OODjUJJ.OtioIl cAe is lOIDeWnes e1epDtlJ nppnad
after verba implyiDg doubt, fear, hope, in the same wa1 that tAIIt is
npprell88d In English; _,
DubiIo ,., 10 IJ_' 1liii0 IJppoetCJ.
I ~ he did it to me 011 purpoee.
Spero fAi accogUerA corditJIllUlAII.
I hope he will receive me oordiall1.
nao 1I&i IlJccilJ rupeUar, mollo.
I fear he will make me wait long.
224. The conjunction Be, if, though of a condi.
tional nature, is followed by the indicative, if the
prevailing idea. is positive; a.s,
B. parlo pitJno, l percha lIOn polIO parlar lorte.
II I speak low, it is because I cannot speak loud.
& btJlllJlIa ogni giomo, erlJ perchl fAi 1Ii lorzaHno.
III danoed eTer"f da1, it was because thllJ' forced me to it.
Partir'b tlomtmi, " potrb.
I shalllesva to-morrow, itI oan.
But, if a doubt prevails, the SUbjunctive is used i as,
Parlerri lorte, "poturi I would speak loud, itI could.
Bard fAtJlato, II hallam I should be mot, it I danoed.
Pamr.i, " potun I would leave, it I could.
225. When futurity is implied, the verb following
Be must be in the future, and not in the present, as
in English; as,
Gli .crieer'b, " 1IOi gli ,meer,".
I will writs to him, it 10U will writs to him.
N. B. - The present tsuae ma1 be emplO)'ed _ in English, it alIu-
lion is made to the present time; _,
Gli ,crieer'b, " fAi tlate if COfll".",.
I will writs to him, if 10U give me lesv ..
DigitIZed by Coogle
100 USE OF TIDI SUB.JUNCTITE.
226. When Be has the meaning of to'hetluJr, the
subjunctive may be used or not; as,
IItpla",. 0 ria }lIOn fR'imporltJ.fWhedler .. weepa or laughs. it
lit planf1G 0 ridG 1 m&keI no cruter.. to me.
227. Impersonal verbs tequire the following verb
in the subjunctive, if the sentence is in the plural;
in the subjunctive or infinitive, if the sentence is in
the singular; as,
BtuItJ cAe Ii /tlCeino "'tUre, or btuItJ lorn fItder ..
It.is encriagh that th8J' make themaelftS II88Jl.
228. A relative superlative followed by eM takes
the verb in the subjunctive; as,
Egli , il pill/elice _0 cAe lo co_co.
He is the mOlt haPP1 man that I &Ill with.
229. The subjunctive is also used after the con
junctions and adverbs which express a conditional
idea, such as quantunque, 'pu,rcAi,
. accioccl&i, as,
Bene'" mi crlda. Although he belieft8 me.
PwcU fR' omi Provided he loftS me.
17' Nohritbatandblg this, TUllO m&keI Sophronia -1 :
Bene'" tal /urlo i il mlo, tal luro lo 10110.
AltllOup mlDe is not & &heft, Dor &Ill I & robber.
EXAMPLES.
How does he know it!
Is he with that man !
Does he know his J_!
In good plain French.
I hope he 1rill write to me.
He is not ill,;yet he t&kes some
medicine 8VeTI morning.
Irl;y bllllin_ doeII not permit me
toclollO.
Come 10 '07
Co_e, 'IIli guell' _810'
& 'IIli lG 1U0 l,rime ,
In huon cAwro 0_.
8pero mi .eri",ril.
Egli lIOn I ommGloto,pur, prIftIM
dell, medicine ogni mGtti_ .
1 mid oJIori flon .i pennrllotlo
di/orlo.
DigitIZed by Coogle
.I
I
,
To add:reIa
AI'air, bUllin_
To be acquainted '.
Cottage
Clear
Comedy
To OODjecture

Free
USE OF THE BUlIJUNC'1'IVJ:.
VOCABULARY.
Indimllar ..
JJjfar
COnDIcer ..
C4pGftRG.
Chiaro.
CommediG.
Cor&gdturar
Prqlontlo.
Motla.
Libcro.
Foreigner.
Last
Late
To laugh.
Leaming

To protect
Remedy
To BUBpect
To take
EXERCISE XXIX
101
Porfdier
Ultimo.
Tardi.
Ritler
DoIlriu.
Pr .. ua.
Protegger
Rimedio.
BoepdttJr
Pr.ntler
.Are you acquainted with that man? No, I do not know who
he is. It appears that he dOllll know where to go. I think
that he is a foreigner. No, I know that he is not a foreigner.
How do you know (it)? Su8pecting that he wu a Frenchman,
I addreued him a few words in French, and he laughed, and
laughed, and finally he aaid, in good plain Epglish, cc I gu_
not. II Then he is a Yankee. Have you dined? No, sir; we
dine at :live o'clock. I wish that you would dine with ua to-day.
I thank you, but I cannot, becauee my presence is indispenBable
at my father's. Then we 8hall be happy to 888 you to-night.
I will try to come, if eight o'clock is not too late. You muat
come, whether it be late or not. Very well. How is your
brother? He is ill. If he is a physician, why dOllll he not take
aome medicine? He never takes any medicine; phyalciana never
take medicine. Have you been at my brother's? No, but I
Bhall go to-morrow, if my mend will lend me his horae. IB it
not better to go now ? Well, I will go now, if you will go with
me. I cannot leave my buain_, but I will be at your service
to-night. At what time? At eight o'clock. Very well; but,
no, I cannot go to-Dight; I mU8t go to a concert at half put
BeVen. That man speaks a great deal, but eays nothing.
Where are you going? I must go to 888 my father. IB he at
home? I do not know whether he is at home. If you are not
sure that he is at home, why do you go there? I mutt go to my
father's houae, whether he is at home or not. Have you spoken
to that man? I have not yet spoken to him, but I ahall apeak
'to him to-morrow a* my brother's 8tore.
DigitIZed Coogle
PAST PABTImPLB.
LESSON XXXI.
PAST PARTIOIPLE.
230. A P ABT PARTICIPLE, without the auxiliary
verb, agrees with the noun it modifies; as,
n libro letta. ~ The book read.
Ilibri letti ......... The boob read.
La CIIIII enttG. The hOUBe erected.
Le ca. ,rette The hoWlllll ereoted.
231. A past participle employed with the auxil.
iary verb avere never changes its termination to
adapt itself to the B'Ubject i as,
10 1&0 .criUo. I have written.
Bull All .criUo She has written.
Bali laG,&f&O .criUo. They have written.
232., It may agree, or not, with the object which
precedes it. If we wish to make prominent 'the
action expressed by the past participle, it remaiDs
invariable; as,
QuraD dolori 1&0 .qfferto t How many grie1ll have I endared I
If we wish to give particular attention to the
object, the past participle is then used as an adjec-
tive, and must agree with the object; as,
Qvarati dolori 1&0 atdf,rti t How many grie1II have I endared I
In the first case, the mind is occupied with the
intensity of suffering; in the second, with the many
pains Buffered.
233. According to this rule, the past participle
must agree with the pronouns il, w, la, le, and fiB,
DigitIZed by Coogle
PAST PABfiCIPLB. 108
_ because they represent the dominant idea of the
phrase; as,
.&vete .critlo I. Utter.7. Have you written the letters!
10 Ie 110 uN .critt.. I have alreadT written them.
N. B. -Thla agreement, however, doea not tab plaoe if the dlreot
object belongs to a verb whioh tollows the palt partioiple; u.
Li tWbiGlIIO cOlAprati. _ nol& Ii abbialllO potuto legger, .
We have bought them. but we have not been able to read them.
234. A past participle, joined to the verb esaet'e,
is used as an adjective, and must agree with the sub-
ject or the object. It agrees with the subject when
the subject is in the plural and the object in the
singular; as,
Le IIIW IOT"" Ii 101& e01Apral, ".11 earro.1&1Io
Myllistera have bought a -m tor themll8lveL
It agrees with the object when the object and the
subject are in the plural; as,
Le IIIW IOrelle Ii 101& eOlAprali i elitJalli.
My siaters have bought the hora. tor themll8lveL
H the subject be in the singular, the past participle
may agree with the subject or the object; as,
, or} He has taken off his pTe&.
EglI " , 10111 , guIIl&li.
235. The verb/are, used reflectively, is followed
by the infinitive, and not by 8 past participle, as in
English; as,
B"a .i/II otlillre da tutti. She makes heraalthated by everybody.
236. The present participle of the auxiliary verbs
is often elegantly omitted; 8S,
Benita III leUerll, mi GtldortRntlli.
Having written the letter, I tell asleep. ,
17' It a ooDjunotive prOIlOllIl had been joined to the p1'III8Dt par-
ticiple whioh is omitted, it m1llt be rJhed to the put pr.rtloiple; U,
BcritIalli .i GIldorllllfttlli. Havillg written it, I au asleep.
DigitIZed by Coogle
104:
Arm
To adopt;
To bel.t _
Brief.
:I>ialogae
Eye
To finish
Fury
To hold
Husband
PAST PABTIOIPLlL
VOCABULARY.
Bra.ccio.
AtioUar
Batter
Brew.
DiGlogo.
Oechio.
P'inir
Furica.
Tener
Mcarno.
Ill-treat
To invent
Invention.
Plant
Poet
Method.
To rave
Side
Simple
Thorn
EXERCISE XXX.
McdtJ"a#Gr ..
lntltntar
lnwuione.
Pica""'.
PoetA.
Metodo.
JTcaneggiGr
L4t0.
BlfAplic,.
SpinA.
Have you written your translation? My translation has
been written and copied twice. To whom did you give my let-
ters? I gave them to your Bister. Did she read them? She
had not read them when I left her. Have you found the books?
I have foUnd them. I thought they were l08t. No, they are
not l08t; my aister loaned them to her friend. Baa not. your
friend finished them? Not IIll; she has finished the first and
II800nd volume. How many lOngs have you IlIlIlg? Only three;
but the first two have been sung twice. Have you read many
books? I have.read twenty-one. Twenty-one books? Yell,
twenty-one; what a wonder! In ~ o w many days? In two
days and a half. How have you been able to read them in 80
short a time? I have adopted the new method of reading books.
I cannot believe that a new method has been invented for read-
ing .. Yell, there is one; and it is already adopted by many per-
SOnB. What is it? It is to read by steam. A fine invention,
indeed; you rave, my dear. "How cou!d you marry your
daughte. to an enemy of yours?" said John to William. " It
was to revenge myself," answered William. After a few
months, the daughter, who had been ill-treated by her husband,
went to her father, saying that her husband had beat her; at
which, the father, in great anger, gave her another blow, saying,
" Ten your husband that if he has beaten my daughter, I have
beaten his wife." Are you thimy? No, sir; I Qm not thirsty.
Are you hungry? A little. What shall I give you? Give me
what you like. Shall I give you lOme bread and butter? I will
aooept it with pleuure.
DigitIZed by Coogle
"-
FOBJUTION OF TJIB PLUBAL. 106
LESSON XXXII.
FORMATION OF THE PLURAL, oontmued.
237. NOUNS ending in io, preceded by a vowel,
or bJ" 0, g, h, gZ, drop the 0 in the plural; 88,
C a l ~ o l a i o Shoemaker. C/JZ.olGi Shoema1tan.
,srGneio. 0raDge-tree. ,srGRci.. Oranp-treel.
Ra.gglo Bay. Ra.ggi Bays.
Oce1&io Eye. Oedi Eyes.
Figlio. Son. Figli. Bona.
238. If the termination io is preceded by any
other consonant, the 0 is changed into i i 88,
Zio. uncle. Zii. unoles. I Pendio. declivity. Pmdii. declivitiel.
239. Dissyllabic nouns ending in co and go insert
an h in the plural, in order to preserve the bard
sound of the 0 and 9 i as,
.lIWco. lie. .lI'uocTai. fires. I Lago. Jake. LagAi. labs.
Blr:aIftIolllL - Greco. a Greek ; tMf/O a wile man; porco. a
nble. which make Gr,ci. ma,gi. porei.
240. Polysyllabic nouns ending in co and go insert
the h only when this termination is preceded by a
consonant; as,
,sliergo. inn. .6.lbergld. Inns. I Obeliteo. obelisk. Obeliec1&i. obelilb.
ExoDTIOllll. - Cam go. pnnjabmant; obligo. obligation; dialogo.
dialogue, which make eGdigl&i. obligTai. dialogAi.
(N. B.-See lIat of DOUDS whioh have U1e la. though co aDd go an
preoeded by a vowel. page 224.)
241. Some of the polysyllabic nouns take or
reject the h.
(For a lIat of suoh DOUDII. 1188 page 223.)
DigitIZed by Coogle
108 FOBlU.TION OF THE PLURAL.
The following nouns, which are masculine
in the singular, become feminine in the plural:
SlDgalar. Plural.
Ca,IIaio. A weight : Ca,IIaia.
C,n1iRaio A. hundred C,M_ia.
Migliaio A. thousand Migliaia.
Miglio A. mile Miglia.
Moggio A. meuure Moggia.
Paio A. pair Paia.
Btaio A. bushel Btaia.
U01JO .An egg. UOtla.
243. Some masculine noUDS ending in 0 have
two plurals, one in i, ma.sculine, and one in a, femi-
nine; as,
LabbTO, lip, (Pllll'&l) labbTi and labbra.
DUo, finger, .. dit, .. dila.
N. B. - The preference is siven to the plural in 1.1. (Bee Iiat of
II1IOh D.OUJIII, page 224.)
244. Some masculine nouns ha.ve a masculine or
feminine plural, according to their meaning:
Mvro, a. wall; mura, (of a. oity); mUTi, (of a. hOll8ll).
M_ro {a. membra fimbs or the rnembri {members of toll
, a. limb; 'body ; _bly.
CorRO. horn ; COTRII, of aD corRi {musical in-
1 &D1ma.l; 'mument&
" .... _ {deBl!l!l't, at lrutli, trait&
JT....... table;
{
8tioks of 08,
.l1h&tto, fruit;
ugno, wood; U!/ftI.I, lrgni,
wood;
Biao, rice ; riea,
He is always weeping.
What makes him _y 80 !
!he viYitying light of the IUD.
Have you m&Dy in your
garden!
1a.u.ghter ; riri,
Egli flOft Irs dlro cAe jritstrgtT
CAe coea glila dir coal 1
La lue, "''''flea'''' delaol,.
..fide Hi _Iii dberi Irvllil.ri
"" woatro giartlino 1
DigitIZed by Coogle
I'OBJU'l'ION OP TJIB PLUBAL. 107
Cherr7
Tooompan
Condition
To dim
DimeD8ion
Inflexible.
Knee
Light
To move
Nevarthela, ati11
VOCABULARY.
Ciriwia-
CrmaparIJre.
Condi:ione.
JlpptJnfllJre.
DirMuionI.
l'tf11uibile.
Ginocchio.
Lwe.
Muowere.
./VWlClllimmo.
Omnipotent. ".
Pea.ch
Plaoe
Prudigal
Ray
Soaroely
Step
Tear
To remember
Vivifying
EXERCISE XXXI.
OnAipoleftle.
Pac
POlio, lvogo.
Prodigo.
R/J{/f/io.
JlppeAtJ.
PAlO.
Lagri-.
R.",,,,,,,tGre.
PitlijlclJIIIf.
Where are your IODS? They are in the garden. In whOll8
garden? In my brother'8 garden. Are there many fruit-trees
in your brother'8 garden? Not many. Has he many cherries?
Yes, he has many cherries and peaches, though, he has only five
cherry-trees and Bix peach-trees. How is your mother? The
aame; 8he can BCarCely move her limbe; her knees are always
trembling, and her arms are always !till'. Has ahe not two phy-
sicians? Yes, ahe has two physicians, and they are very prodi-
gal in counsels and remedies; but, n8verthel888, ahe is always
in the same condition. How many miles is it (are there) from
your ather'8 garden to my brother'8 house 'I How many miles 'I
Why do you not eay, "How many hundreds of thousands of
miles? " Why 80 'I Because the diltance is only a few 8teps; a
quarter of a mile, I believe. Have you any looking-glaeeee?
Yes, sir; I have a great many looking-gla!l88. My uncles are
desirou8 to have a looking-glaee, but they did not give me the
dimensions. Have you 8tudied your 18880n'l I have !tudied it,
but I do not know the dialogues. Are they long? They are
long, and in some places very diflicult. Have you much time Cor
your Italian I888On'l I have but a few minutes for my Italian
leeeon. Ha.w much did these two books cost 'I Twenty-five
france. Who would pay twenty-five france for two old books 'I
They are not old books, sir. What makes you think that they
are old books 'I BecaU118 they were printed in the year one thou-
sand six hundred and Corty-one. I hope that you will remem-
ber the dilFerence between old bOOks and ancient boob, and
that many things are ancient without being old.
DigitIZed by Coogle
108 AUGIIEl'iTATIVE8 .AND DIlIlNuTIYES.
LliIBBON XXXIII.
AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMIN:UTIVES.
245. THE ItaJia.ns modify the signification of
nouns by additional terminations. Gra.mma.ria.ns
have but increased the difficulty of properly using
the augmentatives and diminutives by a multi-
plicity of terminations, to each of which they have
endeavored to give a special meaning. Practice
and fa.milia.rity with ItaJia.n writers is the only guide
to their use; yet, as a general rule,
1. By changing the last vowel of a noun, an
adjective, or an into one, its meaning is
augmented; as,
LUwo. A. book. LibroIM A. big book.
r.tIOl. A. table. TcJtJOlone. A. big table.
l/V,.bo A. cheat. l/V,.boIM. A. great cheat.
B_ . WelL B.tIOIM Very welL
2. By changing the last vowel into accio for the
masculine, and accia for the feminine, to the mean-
ing of bignes8 is added that of ugUnes8; as,
UOIIIO A. man. UOlRIICcW. A corpulent, ugly man.
C...,.. . A. room. C.,.,,./JCN. A large, ugly-looking room.
EF All words ending in ce and ge take an I before the termina-
. tion of the augmentative, to preserve the BOft BOund; u,
Vi "fOioe. {P'ocioIM' a strong,loud, manl;y't'Oioe.
oce, P'ociaccilJ', a bad, disagreeable voioe.
3. By changing the last vowel into etto or i1W for
the masculine, and etta, or ina for the feminine, a
generally pleasing idea of smallnes8 is conveyed,
by Coogle
108
occasionallY,accompanied by expressions of praise,
sympathy, or flattery; 88,
Libro :Book. Li1Jntlo. A pretty Uttle book.
.ilCGtIO HaneL .ilCaflillll. A pnUJ Uttle haDd.
P_o . .. A pool' maD. P_rino (upNIIIIl1JDptothy).
246. The two terminations etto and ino, or etta
and ina, are often joined together; as,
P.udliflO A 'Yf/r1 Uttle piece.
TatJOlindlo A 'Yf/r1 Uttle able.
BoccMItiIuI A 'YfIr1 Uttle 1II01lth.
.ilCGN",,(ndtG. Pretty Uttle Mary A.JIJI.
N. B. - Many wozdl end in the above termin&tioDI without beiq
augmentatiTell 01' diminuti'Y.; U,
CGtIOtHJt:rio, toweL BuID,.., stick. BorracM, leather bottle.
.Ilrc1&itdlo, arohiteot. BrGCcio, arm. Maga.c,sino, warehouIe.
:a...uuc. - The 1118 of the aupenatiY. and diminutiTell Ihould
be Umited to thoae words which practice and uperieDce hue rendered
familiar. In cue of doubt, it is better to ~ r m the augmentati'Ye
ngalarly .. U in Engliah. Thus: from 1bOI, milito, to upreII a peat
fbol, _Y "fl gra" 1IIIJIt0 j bec&uIe in this cue -'loaa, iIIIItea.d ot
JI1I&IliDc a peat ibol, me&D8 a brick.
Take ot it u much u )'GU like.
Go and apeak to that maD. .
Little Mary hu II1Ulg a Uttle
IODg.
She hu a oharming pretty little
III01lth, a beautiful Uttle hand,
and l1li&11, pretty teet.
Your aiater'1 deotation hu no
limit.
I thank )'GU, Bir.
Be attentive, &ad do not lose your
ptotienoe.
I and my friend are on bili&r
WrmI.
Pr,ratlIIma pa"'" '" piat:,.
.Ilrul4t. a parlGr. a pell' tIO-.
MaridtG 1&IJ call1olo "l1li caft-
,soncillll.
Ella 1&IJ "fl' iftCa""",, boc:clad-
-'l1li, "fta HIla ... "iM, gra.
.siori pW("i,.
L' 4If'Uaio", tli tIOIIra .or,lla
flO" 1&IJ liaiti.
Gruit, rigfIOr" 01' '" ri"grtJrio.
Billa .UaIo, ftOR ,..,,,,,. lG
~ .
10,tl II mio .mico riamo ;" Iar-
m;"i familiari.
DigitIZed by Coogle
110
ADger
Basket
Bell
To berea.T8
Bulwark.
Eye-witneu
Foot
Mary
MuaIo
VOCABULARY.
RaMill.
CII,..""O.
CIIlIlpalllJ.
o
A66atadotaar ..
Balvardo.
Te.tilllonio ocular
Piede.
Maria.
Murica.
Path _ BertlNro.
To permit. Perm.etter ..
Prophet Profeta.
River Fiume.
To walk Cllmlllinar ..
Week. 8dtimalllJ.
To weep Pillager
Witneu Tem_io.
W ortby. MeritetHlle.
EXERCISE XXXII.
Who is that lovely little creat\ll'e'1 She is my little niece.
How old is she'1 She is only seven years old. What is her
name' Mary. Little Mary, have you studied musio' Yes,
sir. Will you sing a little BOng'1 I caDDot sing, sir. Can you
play'1 I can playa very little, but my teacher does not allow me
to sing. Will you give me a little piece of paper' You can
take 88 much paper 88 you like. Where shall r find it' You
will find it on the little table in my study. How do you do
to-day' I am extremely well, I thank you. How is your
nephew'1 He is pretty well. How much did you pay for that
book'1 Two dollars and a half. Two dollars and a half for
that ugly little lfok! It is a good-sized book', and not an ugly-
looking book. 0 Where shall I put these flowers'1 Put them in
that little basket. What shall I do now' Ring the little bell,
and go and study your leB80D in William's room. I do not like
to go to that ugly little room. Go in my little room, then.
How many men often say of a pretty woman, "What a lovely
little creature! 0, the beautiful little hands! 0, the channh1g
little mouth! What a pretty little foot!" But how few per-
BODS say, "Is she truly the little angel she appears to be,
Have those pretty little hands always been useful'1 Has that
charming little mouth ever spoken two sweet little words to the
bereaved widow, to the poor and the sick' Is that pretty little
foot always walking in the right path of honor and virtue' "
The poets compare two beautitul eyes to two bright stars; f0r-
getting that the stars are always sparkling with heavenly light,
and speak always of the glory of the Omnipotent, whilst the
most beautiful eyes are often dimmed with tears and BOrroW.
DigitIZed by Coogle
.ADVERBS. 111
LBBBON XXXIV.
ADVERBS.
247.' THE ADVERBS are generally formed by add-
ing mente to the feminine adjective; as,
GetIe1'OIG. Gen .....
Corltu. Polite.
G,rurOlGrutIU. Generou1y.
Corluement, Politely.
248. Adjectives ending in le and re drop the
final e; as,
Faeil, Easy.
B.egolar, Regular.
Faeilmente Eaaily.
RegolarfU"" BegalarO-.
Gr Some adjectiVell al'8 used as adverbs without the additional
men"; as, poco, molto,lorte, piano.
-
B.mwI.K. - When the above words modify a DOun, th81 &l'8 adJeo-
tives; when they modify a verb, th81 are adverbs; as, -
10 Ao etudiato molto I have studied much.
10 Ao molto pane ; I have muoh bread.
249. Adverbs in a superlative degree are formed
by adding mente to the feminine superlative; as,
Corteriaima, corteaiari11l4ment,.
G,nero.ulima, gemrorilaimamente.
OBSERVATIONS ON SOME OF THE ADVERBS.
No, nOR

. No.

Beftlre.
8i Yell. Prima
. . .
.
.

.

.
Mai, giammai Never. Dopo . . . .


After.
Gia


. Already. Qui, qui. .


Here.
Ben,

.

. Well. Li, la, colA.


There.
punta}
At all.
Colti, coltA There.
Mitll
cA. 110 .

Rather
DigitIZed by Coogle
11S
ADVDBS.
S50. No stands by itself; fIOn is used to form a
negative sentence; as,
No, ,..". POUO ",..iUerlo. No, 1 oaDJlot allow it.
251. No and Ii following a verb in the same sen-
tence are preceded by di; as,
PIfIIO di ri. : . . . 1 think 110.
E,li mi diu. di flO He told me DO.
1U lfIli mi diue .. flO, nol ,,,,.b."
.And he Did to me, .. No, 1 wUl not do it. II
N. B.-.Mm 10 makes fIOl, when followed by a verb Dot com-
meDOiDg with a Towel, Jr, or. impure.
252. The adjective or participle which in English
follows rather, anzi Me flO, in Italian precedes it, or
is placed between ansi and eke no; as,
Aruba. G ~ cAe no, or } Bather loTely
.lui Gruba. eM flO.
253. Mai and giammai are used with non except
when they answer a question for themselves; as,
.Mm I' 10 _i "",.. NIJi 1 No, gi"mmGi.
1 have never seen her. NeTer T No, DeTer. .
Er N"i and gilJmm"i in interrog&tiTe sentences, &nil in oonditional
or doubtful phrues, are used without fIOn, and stand for.fIIlf'; as,
Be _i I" fIIldean. If eTer 1 oould see her.
L' "fIIltll tnGI fIIlduta1 HaTe you eTer seen herT
254. 00, bene, punto, mica, are often used as
expletives; 8S,
Non i mit" d" ,cAe,."o. It is Dot a thing to joke about..
.Mm giA cAe I' "mi Not that 110ve her.
255. Prima and dopo are generally followed by
di; 8S,
Pri_ ili 14.. :Detore me. Dopo IIi fIOi. After you.
Dopo del tempo yrflUao. After the appointed time.
DigitIZed by Coogle
..lDVEBBS. 113
256. The use of the adverbs prima and tJ1XIt'&ti
requires particular attention. Prima is an adverb
implying time. ..4w/nti implies locality j as,
Egli ""tit pri_ dell' ora pre- He came be1bre the appointed
JU'tJ., holll'.
Egl' pr_ polio illIG"" Ili me. He took a _t be1bre me.
257. C08ta and costi point to the place of the
person spoken to.
258. Li, la, and cold, point to a place distant
both from the speaker or writer and from the per-
son spoken to.
259. Qui, U, costt, are more definite than qua, la,
costa; as,
Egli ,lira fill tlofIIG"i. He will be here to-m.orrvw ; i. e., in thia hoUIL
EgU 'lirA qua tlofIIGlii. . He will be here to-morrow ; i. t in thia Git)".
EXAMPLES.
Your aIater apet.ka better than abe
writes.
VOItrll aorellll porlll fA"lio Ili
quel cAe .cMtll.
I ahall go to my.ther'slint, and 10 arailrb pri_ tla fAio padr, ,
afterwards to my friend's store. poi alia botlega del fAio llfAico.
Is he within, or without'
You are late, air.
E 'IIi al Ili delltro, 0 III Ili fWJri 7
Vol riele in ritllrdo, rignor,.
04,,* fJoi letto U giornllle oggi 7 BaTe :fOIl read the paper to-day'
6
SooN", il guerrier Ie lObiere.
La selve il caociator.
E BOgII& il peacator
La reti e l'amo.
Bopl.to in dolce obblio
Bogno pur io ooel
Oolei che tutto il dl
Soapho. e ohiamo.
114 .
To arrive.
Cup
Di1l'erent
To equalize
Entirely
To ftouriah
To happen
Toimagine
Independence
Tomurder
ADY;EBBS.
VOCABULARY.
Jlmare. Na,npaper
Ta.u/J. Originality
Dijferem.. To plunge
UguaglitJre. P08t,.oftice
Imieraraente. Progress .
JI'iorir,. To reflect
Jlr:r:o.rUre. To role. govern.
Imr"/J{/iftfJTt. 8in
IndipelllUnll/J. . Situation
Tnlr:idtJre. Tra.nlluil.
EXERCISE XXXIII.
GiornIIl.
OrigiftfJliti.
TItIan.
POBltJ.
PrOflTalO.
Rijlttter,.
GoNTftfJr ..
P,r:r:ato.
8itUlUliont.
Tranqvillo.
How is the weather to-day7 Yes, sir. Yell. sir, whan
What did you l&y7 I ask, How is the weather to-day7 Do
you hear? Do not speak 80 loud; I am not so deaf as you
imagine; the weather is very fine to-day. Why do we find little
originality in this world 7 Because men imitate much, and
reflect little. Has your friend made much progress in the study
of the French language 7 Yes, sir; he reads correctly. epea.ke
well, and writes better than he speake. How long has he
studied it 7 Two years and a half. He must ce.rtainly know
the language, then. He knows a great deal of the language,
because he has studied &88iduo1l81y and faithfully. Will you go
- to the exhibition 7 I cannot go now. When can y o u ~ ~ If
you will come here tc-morrow morning at ten o'clock, I can
easily go to the exhibition, and to your banker's. -Where ehall
we go first 7 We can go wherever we like. I think that it will
be better to go to the banker's first, and afterwards to the exhi-
bition. The honor of man and thil.t of woman are two plante
of an entirely dift"erent nature: the one flourishes out of doors,
the other within; Where are you going 80 early? I am going
to the poet-oftice; Iam afraid that I shall be late. No, you
are not late; you can take a Cup of dee with me, and after-
wards we will go there together. What time is it7 It is
euctly nine o'clock, and the steamer n e ~ arrives before ten.
I should like to take a cup of coft"ee with Y0l!-, if I could have it
immediately. You can have it in five minutes. Very well,
then, I shall read the newspaper meanwhile.
\\
DigitIZed by Coogle
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 115
LBSSON XXXV.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
_ 260. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS are such as are used
in a general sense, without referring to any partic-
ular person or thing.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS USED SUBSTANTIVELY FOR
PERSONS.
Chi Some one, who, IIODI8 others.
Altri Other or others. }
Chi.fIqUI WhoeTer. Invariable.
7'u1ti. .All, everybocJ1.
8i One, they.
ChicCTwria} . { ChiccAaitlno.
Chinvogliti Wh0808Ver or w h ~ v e r ; plural ChiliWogliano.
VervllO }
Manlf&O No one. -With their irregular feminines, but no plural.
.Muno ;
Tal.no Such a one.}With the regular feminine and plurals.
QualevAO. Some one. -
261. AU" is used only in the nominative j in the
objective it makes altrtd, which in the genitive and_
dative is often used without a preposition. In the
genitive it often precedes the noun; as,
M t10i A' altri ,aprA coralliAcermi.
Neither you nor others can conviJ:loe me.
NoA far. altrui do ehe per te AOA ""ai.
Do not do to others that which ;YOu- do not wish tbr JOVIt1'
L' al'rvi bonia fAi guicla.
The gcodn818 ot others guides me.
282. L'altru;' signifies the property of others; as,
Nora appropriarli l'altrui.
Do not appropriate to y01ll'88lt the property ot othen.
DigitIZed by Coogle
116
DmBFD1lTE PRONOUNS.
263. OM, preceded by non, stands for fiO OM, and
takes the subjunctive; as,
7'rM eM 10 J.e. . She 1bund IIOJD8 one who did it.
.MHl tT_ cAi I' llmi. She does Dot find any ODe who 1_ her.
g- Ol&i mAy be often repeated without olllmdiDg the ear; as,
Ol&i Nliu, cAi .c,lIdeu, cAi CIIIIIIIIIII, eAi balllllltJ.
Some .-decl, lOme dellC8Dded, lOme ADg, and lOme danced.
264. .Altri and cAi, are often used in a distributive
sense; 8.8,
AltTi AuotIlU, llllri qffOAdtJIItJ.
A eAi place ltJ IogtJ /I elai ltJ
Some IW&ID, others aaDk.
The top ~ lOme, and aome
the I1fOId. IptIlltJ.
265. Tutti takes the verb in the plural; 8.8,
Tutfi 10 eliCOAO. ETer,ybody_ya eo.
266. 8i, is used with a verb in the singu1a.r, and
when followed by the pronoun M, the i, is changed
into e; 8.8,
OM ri die. tiel mio elllllllio 7. What do they _y of my horae f
Non .. ne elie. nwlG They _y nothing about it.
267. (JAiccAes8i,a, and cMBivoglia. take the verb in
the subjunctive, with the conjunction cAe; 8.8,
OAicclaaaill eM 1IIftg1l. elite cAe clonno. ...
Whoever may oome. Bay that I am uleep.
268. Veruno, M88UfiO, and niuno, following a
verb, take fiOn before them; as,
~ , A O 10 ClIo or } No ODe bOWB it.
of. on 0 '" _no.
ltaAJut. - In an iDterropti'ft IIIIIlteDoe. "runo, A_no, and
"i"no, stand for /lnybody j as,
Non tIItlete _no 7 Do you DOt _ anybody f
. N. B. - V"ltlete ''',",flO is often 1I8ed,- but In II1lCh a oaae it 'WOUld
be better to _yllltlete qVGlevno.
Admiration
Calm
Child
Content
Counael
Toddmd
Defender
Dreary
Toeult
hperl.enoe
Imiooent
IliDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
VOCABULARY.
Ata",ira.cioftl.
CalfAO.
Bimbo.
Contento.
CoJUiglio.
Dy"mclere.
Dy"enaor ..
LugulJre.
E.altGre.
.EIperien.a.
IAAOC",".
Liberty. freedom.
Mercy
Painful.
Penury
To profit
Save. except
To shriek
Similar, like
Socrates
Stupid

To wrong
" EXERCISE XXXIV.
-------..
11'1
Liberta.
MiaericortlitJ.
P-.
P'AVritJ.
Pr0jUt4re.
Salvo.
Blr""",.
Si",il
Soer.
Slvpido.
.6.giato.
Far torto a.
In a free country, he who is innooent has nothing to fear. No
one is more worthy of profound admiration than Socrates, who
'WB8 always calm. and tranquil, although he had a capricious
wife and stupid children. Happy the man who profits by the
experience of others. No one is contented with his situation.
Everybody is a good co1Ul88llor after misfortune arrives. Who-
ever may come, say that I am not at home. Ie it Dot better to
say that you do not like to see anyone. Do not say so, because
it is not always safe to say what one does or thinks. 0, you
P!in088 of the earth, who exalt yourselves your M ..
.. 4en, remember that, whoever you may be, there is im "Eternal
{,. : the world, and equalizing the destinies of all,
.2..'"",,1"hoeoever they JQ,$y be ! No one is a prophet in his own coun-
try; etill, everybody longs for his dear home. H you like to
have a good name, be sure never to wrong anybody. Do not
reproach me 80 loud; speak low, that no one may hear what
you say. I wish to say that it is a great sin to wish for the
property of others, and that tl!.Q88 who are comfortable do not '" , "(
reflect that many others are in penury. The city is in the hands
of our enemies; no one can imagine the distreeeiDg soene of
which I was an eye-Witn888: the brave defenders of their coun-
try and their freedom are slain on the bulwark; and ,
the women and children,-O, the most mournful sight! .'-'." t
wept, some shrieked; others, pressing their babes in their arms.
plunged into the river; and au prayed the God of mercy and
juatioe to defend their honor and independenoe.
. . , .
a. t .:. '"
DigitIZed by Coogle
118
INJ)EFlMTE PRONOUNS.
LESSON XXXVI.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS USED SUBSTANTIVELY FOR
TBINGS.
269. To h m ~ PRONOUNS used substantively
for things are as follows:
CAaccla "'} .
C""clturia WhateTer. whataoner.
CheccAaif/Oglia
Per.- P"'lJ'"'nto However.D.OWImIl'muoh.
.MIlIa. nie,," Nothing.
2'uIto. .All.
270. ~ , checcke8Woglia, require eM after
them, and the verb in the subjunctive. ~
dispenses with eke i as,
Checchi "rivia". }Whatev write.
Checchemll or checcherif/Og& cA crillitJk. er ;you may
g- C,,"cheRia. beaid. the meaning of checchi. baa riG. the ,r-
ent subjunotive of the verb to be; ooDSequentl;y it can 1brm.' a IeDtenOl
fbI' iteelf. and when 1bllowed by a verb must have the relative pn-
DOUII. che oouneotiDg the two verbs. Thus. the meaning of C,,"-
c1&eaeia che .critlillte is, Whatever may be the thing. which ;you
write. Heilce it la that checcU is never ibDowed by a noun without
a verb ; U.
C1&eccU rill il fIOItro pGr.r.. Whatever be your opiDicm.
N. B. - The same rule holds good In' checcAaiHglia.
271. Per is generally followed by an adjective
with che, and by the verb in the Bubjunctive; as;
Per mco che .ia , aie.rllbil
However rioh he may be. he is 1tT8tohed.
DigitIZed by Coogle
1
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 119
272. Perquo,nto takes the verb in the subjunc-
tive, but dispenses with Me; as,
Perquanto ,gli ,iG ",i,.,.abil,. } H -'ohed h be.
D to' _J."_ ,.. owever "RI< e may
s-erqUlJn __ 'fJ , IItJ.
273. Putto is-used with or without the article; as,
80 tvtto. I bow all.
Mi a dato detto il tutto. All has been told to me.
N. B. -It .. conjunctive pronoun preoedes, the artiole m1l'Bt be
ued; BI,
- He,o a tvtto. I bow all of it.
274. Nulla and niente are often used for any-
tki1l.fl; as,
VollIe nietatl1. Do you want anything t
Dir,", nllll" In mic faWJr. 1 Would you 8&yanything in my bebaltt
E dole, far nllll,, ~ To do lOmet.hing is pl..nt.
275. If nulla and niente follow the verb, 11.011. is
placed before it; as,
./Vbn mi biBOgna nulla, or} I hi. eed of H.;ft8
JVWla mi biloglUJ. ve Ii no_.
H they are followed by an adjective, they take the
preposition di; as,
.M!.lla di 6uollO Nothing good.
JVVen" di C/lUillO _. Nothing bad.
H they are followed by a verb, they take the prepo-
sition da; as,
JVWla dtJ f"r, Nothing to do
.Mell" da dire Nothing to 8&y.
What did your brother Intend to
8&y1
My brother Intended to I&y that
he oannot come to-night.
I wili never laU to do 10.
Che vol",,, dir" or cAe """'" in-
teuio", di dire fJOItro/ratell01
Mio fratdZo vol'fJa elire ehe ,gli
non puO ",nire "allTa.
10 non _nclaerb mai elifarlo
The IIIe&DIDg or UiIa e:o:preuloD ..... n Ia ... &0 do .-uiIDJ," UId DOt, ..
.. IIOIDfIUme8 IQppoaecJ." n .. _, &0 do ROW..,." III CIIder &0 sift &he !au.
JDeUIIDa, B WIIIIId require the Deplt" .011 beIIre the ftrb.
DigitIZed by Coogle
120
Ancestor
To acquire
Brute
To oonc.l
Cynio
DiBagreable
Education
To 8ldJ.e
Ezile .
Forehead
INDEFINITE PBONOU:N8.
VOCABUI,ABY.
An_aID.
Acqui.tare.
Brute.
Naaconder
Cinico.
DWIggr'IJdftole.
Etlucazione.
EriliGre.
Enl ..
Frtmte.
To hide
Impatient
In spite of
LaooDism..
To obtain.
Package
Pedant
Philoeopher.
Poeition
To acrutinile
EXERCISE XXXV.
OcC1llttJre.
1mpazient
A tliapetto tli
LtJconilmo.
Otfcner ..
1nllOllo.
Pedant,.
FilOlqfo.
Poai:rion ..
&rutinar,.
What has that man given you? He has not given me any-
thing - Whatever you may BaY, I cannot believe it, because I
BaW that he gave you a package, and you put it in your pocket.
Yes, he gave me aomething. Then why did you Bay that he did
not give you anything? But you are always impatient, and
do not allow me to finiah what I have commenced; I intended
to Bay that he had not given me anything belonging to you.
Shall I do anything for you, air? Not anything at present, I
thank you. Have you read that letter which 'W8.8 Bent to a
gentleman by his wife? No, I have not read it: It is here:
"Having nothing to do, I write; and having nothing to BaY, I
finiah." It is truly a model of la.conism; nothing more simple
than this. Is not that woman very beautiful? Beautiful as
ahe is, ahe is not geatle. Whatever you may think of her,
ahe is the belle of the evening. Do you know what your boy .
has done? I know all, but what can I do? True merit cannot
be concealed, whatever you may do to hide it. What have you
done to-da.y? Nothing good. And nothing bad, I hope. I have
not done anything, either good or bad. A man Wled from his
country, whatever be the reason of his baniahment, or whatever
be the position he has obtained, will never fiW to long for the
land of his forefathers. Without a good education, the learned
man is but a pedant, the philosopher a cynio, the aoldier a
brute, and every man, whatever he may be, a very diaagreea.ble
person. How is the weather to-da.y? It is very warm to-da.y.
Was it warm yesterday? No, air; yesterday1l?Ul not ao warm
.. to-da.y.
.
"
DigitIZed by Coogle
IlIDD'D1ITE PBOliOUlfB. 121
LBBBON XXXVII.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS USED SUBSTANTIVELY FOR
PERSONS AND THINGS.
276. THE.INDEFINITE PBOliOUliB used substantively
for persons and things are as follows:
Allro Another. \
CiACURO, rillleWtlRO Each one. With their reIaJar 1IImlDIDe,
UIIO One. }
QtuJltlmO, palcWtllIO Some one. but no pluraL
TaltlRO Some one. .
OgfttlllO Every one.
Tal. Such r.n one. } For both pnden. with the
Quale Some, others. replar pluraL
Cotsz. Such an one.
277. Altro, repeated in the same sentence, signi-
... :Bes the first time, one thing, the second time,
another j as,
Allro , parZ/Jr tli flIOf'tc; iJltro i f!IOf'ir,.
It is one thing to speak of death ; it is another to die.
278. .Alt'1'O stands for am.ything el8e j as,
Yoletultro 7. Do;you wish r.u.ything _ r
JVbtt 10 tJltro I know llothiDg elae.
279. .AUro is sometimes used with the definite
article; as,
L'tllIO tliae til ri, Z'/Jlfro iliae ill ROo
The one aid yes. the o&her laid no.
280. L'uno, Z'oltro, in the nominative, take the
verb in the singular, if connected with the conjunc- .
tion ej as,
L'tlno Z'tJltro parz. tli tJOi. Both speak of 1OU-
DigitIZed by Coogle
281. In the objective the preposition accom-
panying "uno mUBt be repeated with I'altro j &8,
Pula .11' _ III "'" ""'0. I spoke to the ODe and (to) the other.
&rim "'" .l1li III .11' .1"'.. I wrote to the ODe and (to) the othIIr.
282. Per altro signifies Q8 for the red j "&8,
Egli , rim'fHIIo; per ""'0, , lineero.
Be i1le18ned; u for the net, he i11inoen.
283. Sem' tiUro stands for undoubtedly j &8,
Egli wrrA, .,..' .1"'0. Be will oome. UDdoubt.ed1J.
Bow do you like thia traDslation t
I do not like it muoh.
Ban I aJI1thlng elIe to do T
You haYe notbiDg elIe to do.
I am TfJr1 glad ofU.
COfA' '" pitJe, pafG "'lIIlurime ,
.MIn mi piaee molto.
No io "''''0 tl4 ,u. 1
Jroi _ I""te iaiellf' ""ro .'ar ..
N, IOrIO eontentimmo.
SONE'rrO DEL PETRAOA.
SoLO e.p8DIOIIO i pih deeerti campi
Vo miaarando a paaai tardi e lenti,
E g1i oochi porto per fuggire intenti
D0\'8 ftltigio 1UIIaD l'arena ata.mpi.
Altro echermo non troTO che mi ecampi
Dal manifesto aooorger de Ie genti :
P e r c h ~ liegU atti di allegreua apenti,
Di filor Ii legge, com' io dentro anampi.
Si ch'io credo omai, che monti e piagge,
E 6.umi e ae1ve aappian di che tempre
Sia la mia vita, ch' ~ oe1ata-altrui.
Ma pnr a\ aapre vie, n ~ a\ ae1yagge
Oercar non eo, che amor non venga I181Dpre
Bagionando con meoo, ed io con lui.
DigitIZed by Coogle
To acoommodate
To act
Author
Baae
To be born
Dil"erenoe
Egg
EleTatA!d
To analOle
IIistoriaD
IliTDEFIlUTE PRONOUR.
VOCABULARY.
.IeepmmodGrri.
.Igire.
.Iu1twe.
Bauo.
NlUeere.
DiJlereua.
UOfHJ.
EkPato.
.Ieehiudefoe.
8torieo.
IdIen_
LineD..
Note
Objection
To return
Sen8ation
Style
Subject
Tender
Writer
EXERCISE XXXVI.
1.
Odo.
Tela.
BiglidtD.
Oggellliou.
RitorftClre.
8mm:ione.
81ile.
8oggdt1J.
Tenero.
8eriltore.
Who has been here? Two of your friends: one of them left
this letter for you, the other said that he would return to-night.
I have been reading the two books which you sent me yesterday.
I find that one is very good, and the other is good for nothing,
though both are from the same author. Why do you not like
the latter? Because the style is too elevated for the subject. I do
not like the book much. Well, it is one thing to .y that you
do not like it much, and another that the book is .good for
nothing. Have you sent the letter to my friends? No, I wrote
it laBt night, but I have not sent it yet. Will you enclose this
note? Yes, with pllf&BUre. Is there anythiDg (else) thll.t I can
do? Nothing else, I thank you. What is the time now?
Half past twelve. What time did your brother say that he
would be here? He said that he would be here after twelve.
Well, it is now half past, and he has not come: it is better not
to wait any longer for him. Let us wait until one o'clock;
. because, if he said that he would be here after twelve, he will do
80, undoubtedly. Have you your sisters a.bout Wil-
liam and John? Yes, I have already written to the one and
the other of both, but I have not reoeived an from
either the one or the other. How did you find your friends?
Each of them is in very good health; each of their coaches
is in very good condition. I am glad of it. Where is my
father's cane? It is in his room, in the corner near the door.
What o'clock is it? It is half past twelve. Is it poeslble? At
what time do we dine ? We dine at half past two, but on Sun-
day we dine at a quarter past one.
DigitIZed by Coogle
114: DlDD'DIlTB PBOIlOUllB.
LHSSOl'f XXXVIII.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS USED ADJE<mVELY FOR
PERSONS AND THINGS.
284. THE INDEFINITE PBONOUNS used adjectively
for persons and things are as follows :
UftO. -:-. One, .. , an.
u. aUro. Another.
} With their regular femiDine.
Ogni. Every, alL }
Qualc1ae Some. Invariable.
Qualunque .". Any, whatever.
Pit} More.
.. Any, whatever. { Fo=. thelrplU!ll8 b7 addiDg
Alcuno Some.
CitJacuno Each.
Tanto }
CoIGnto So much.
Alpanto. A little.
AUrellarato. .As much.
Poco Little.
.Mollo Much.
Troppo Too much.
Tutto All.
CerlQ Ceriain.
AUro Other.
Y-erufto, ","uno} N
JViuno, nullo 0 one.
::,,} .. Buoh.
PtJJ'lCcld. SneraL
With their regular fembIiDe
and plurals.
{
With the regalar feminine;
no plural
{
For both genders, with the
regular plural
No 1iDgular; regalar p11l1'll
DigitIZed by Coogle
mDnllUTE PBOlIOURB. 125
285. The noun which follows ogni and gua1.cAe
must be in the singular. The word OgniBBaM,
All Saint's Day, and the nouns following cardinal
numbers, are excepted; as,
10 trOflO quiche '"01" iA ogni ptJgirut.
I find lOme errors on eTfJr1 page.
10 10 ",do ogni quattro gi01'Ai.
I _ him eTfJr11bur days.
286. Qualunque is always followed by a singular
noun, but the verb which follows it must be in the
singular or plural, according to the subject; as,
QtuJlunque perlOU ~ IGrio Any perIOD can do it.
Qua.lunque ria. lG tIOItrG ragiorae. Whatever be your reason.
Qua.lunque nGAO I, fIOItr, ragioni Whatever be your reuolII.
287. Tutto preceding a noun is followed by the
article; as.
TuUo il deAa.ro lu.pcrduto All the money W1II1oet.
n.", I, donne grida.fJG7& lorte. All the women cried loudly.
Gr" TuUo uaed after the Terb, and referring to the subject, has no
article ; 88,
ErGM lutts donAe. They were all women.
288. Putto' quanta signifies the whole, without
exception j as,
P,riroM tutti quanti. All perished, withont exception.
289. Tutti, followed by the cardinal numbers due,
tre, quattro, takes the conjunctive e j as,
n.tti , due. . Both.
~ i , tt.. . . . . . . . . All three.
n.tti , quattro Alltbur.
290. Tutti is followed by no preposition in such
expressions as these:
,
All of you.
All otlU.
DigitIZed by Coogle
INDEFUltl'Jii PBONOmm.
VOCABULARY.
To adduce. Add.rre.
To appear Apparlre,
Citlaen CUttldi"o.
To oond-.d Condileentlere.
CrOIIII , Croce,
Dolorous, painful DolarOlO.
To em,loy.. Impiegq.re.
To excnte. EecitGre.
Grief Dolore.
- Interval. InterfHlllo.
Knowledge
No_.
Obligation
Occupation
To place
Propoeal
Bailor
Valet
Veael
Weeping
EXERCISE XXXVII.
C_e" ...
8proporito.
Obbligsnon..
Occvpaaou.
Piiu:.ar
Pr"JlO'ta.
oM arifI/Jio.
Valletlo.
Badimento.
Pianto.
In a free country every man is a citizen. Is not every man
a citizen in every country? No; under despotism no man is
~ f r e e ; they are all 8I1bjects. What is the dift"erenoe between a
oitizen and a subject? One is a man, the other is a slave. You
have a great many books on the table; are they all English?
.Almost all my boob are English, but I have several Frenoh
romances. Why do you read such roniances? Generally
speaking, they are not good books; but mine are all historical
romances, and they cost me only a few dollars. Newton was
born the same day that Galileo died: no interval was left
between these two great philosophers. If folly were a painful
sensation, we should have weeping in every house. Everything
is in God .. and God is in everything. Every obligation is a
duty. Death is the end of all misfortunes. Why did all three
of you come? To tell you that the vessel is lost, and (that) the
sailors all died, without exception. Every rose has its thorn,
and all men their croBII. Idlen6ll8 makes everything appear
. difficult: let UB, then, employ our time in some useful occupatiOn.
, I cannot comply with your request, w ~ ~ y e r be the !'8IIoBOn you
adduoe. All men are more ready to speak than to act. Do
not be proud of i.ny 8I1C0eB8 in life. No bad tree produces good
fruit. We should place our honor above everything else in the
world. A time for everything, and everything at its time. No
man, learned as he may be, is able to acquire a perfect knowl-
edge of all the secrets' and beauties of nature. Envy is the ."
meanest of all paadODB. Every man has in himself something 4/"tA.. ...... -<- I
which ucites the desire of an envious man. :---' ~ --
~
DigitIZed by Coogle
POBK.A.TION OJ' 'fBB I'IDIIlOD. 12T
LBBBOlf XXXIX.
FORMATION OF THE FEMININE.
291. NOUNS used to represent animated beings
form their feminine by changing 0 into a; as,
Gatto, _0, _ico, make gatta, _a, amic/l.
292. Nouns ending in tore form their feminine in
trice; as,
Allor" 6,,,q-attorl, make atIric" "nt/atlnc,.
293. Some of the nouns of animated beings are
known by a name peculiar to each sex; as,
Toro Bull. Vacca. Cow.
Monton, Ram. P,cora... Ewe.
B,ccO Be-goat. Capra. She-goat.
Others have but one gender for both sexes. Thus,
~ e masculine nouns tordo, corvo, and the feminine
nouDS vipera, aquila, express both the male and
the female. To ascertain the gender, maachio or
femina is added to the noun; as,
Cort1O _chio. Male orow. Cort1O j,mi".. Female orow.
294. Names of trees end in 0, and are masculine,
except quercia, an oak-tree; as,
PerOt a pear-tree. p"co, a peach-tree. Cirieggio, a cherry-tree.
By changing the 0 into a, they become feminine,
and express their fruits; as, pera, pear.
ExoKrrIon. - The 1bllowiDg DOUDS upra the trait and the tree :
C_ro. CitzoD. I Datlero.... Date.
. lI'ieo Fig. Litaon,. . LemoD.
PWlIIcchio. Pistachio aut. POfIUJ. 4 Apple.
DigitIZed by Coogle
liS I'OBlU.TIOll OP DB DIOIIIlIB.
Er .MIct. the Vee. II DIIIO'Illae ; -. the trait. ja iImiDlDe i ...
u. _. a u _ _ e. a aut.
29&. The following nouns are of either gender:
Br" Heir tn' heireIL \oM"." .. Nephew or Ilieoe.
Par"'" llelatioll. COfiIOfU. Wife or huabuc1.
296. Some nouns have two terminations for the
same gender; &8,
La ..", or .... the dreII. La cauou or cau_. the 1IOIIg.
1JIuaULA1 PBaui ....
Bart.or, Tailor.'
Rt Xing.
DtM:a Duke.
Sarta Ser.matzea
Regl_ Qu_
DtM:AuatI. Dach-.
(Bee Bat. pap 226.)
I tIIld him everywhere.
How do you lib tbia book t
IJikeitTflr1muoh.
10 10 "'0tI0 [JIf' opt dow.
Coru ftpUuepaID lilwor
Hi piac. raolHai-.
No ODe would doubt that you are
1. tailor.
.Mmffto tlubitere66c cAe tIOi _
."rlo.
Bow did he like the letter I I18D.t
;yesterday t
COfAI gli i. piacivla Is Idtara cM
ia g1i _racIIIi ierl r
SPERANZA.
gli lOll oompagna

L' agriooltor non aenw ;
Suda, ma non Ii lagna,
Dell' opra, e del mdor :
Con me nel career nero
Raglona il prigioniero,
Si aoorda aftimni, e paDe,
E al mon eli Bue catene
Canta.ado va talar.

DigitIZed by Googl<=;.
POBJIATION OP THE PEllININE. 129
VOCABULARY.
Attendanoe 8,guiID. Menagerie
:Bearded Bl!.rbuto. To marry
Chambermr.id. Cl!.merida. To mean
Cyclopedia .' Ciclopediu.. To perIIOlIify
To doubt. . Dubitare. To reject
Despair Dilperaioflil. Remarkable
Everywhere. Per OUni dove. Benae
Fairy Fatl!.. Steward
IndiJluoent IndiJI,r,nte. To toUGh
Magic Magico. Wand
EXER.CISE :x:xxvm.
MenageriG.
81*l!.r,.
Voler dir
Per,onYicl!.re.
RigeUar
Rimu.rc1&etIol,.
8meo.
MaggiortltJriw.
Toccl!.r,.
Verfll!..
Will you sing me an Italian I!9ng? What shall I sing? Sing
what you like. How do you like my sister's voice? She has a
good voice, and she is a very good singer. Has the dressmaker
brought my silk dress? She has not brought it yet. What did
you see in the menagerie? I. saw a lion and a lionellll, a tiger
and a tigress, a peacock and a peahen, two beautiful eagles, and
some vipers. How many pear-trees have you in your garden ?
Only four, but they are full of pears. Have you any oherry-
trees? Yes, sir; I have two, but they have no oherries. That
lady speaks as if she were well acquainted with medicine. Cer-
tainly; she is a doctor, 'and when she speaks about businellll, DC)
one would doubt that she is a merchant. Is she a philosopher?
I do not know. If she is a philosopher too, we may call her a
cyclopedia personified. Call her as you like, I think (that) she
is a woman remarkable for knowledge and good 88D88. How did
you like the play? I d i ~ not like it at all. What was the
plot? All nonsense: a shepherd was in love with a shepherdess,
and wished to JUrrY her; she rejected him, saying (that) ~ e did
not understand what he meant; the young shepherd was in
great despair, and did not know what to do. At this point, a
fairy, who protected the lad, gave him a enake, and touched the
lass with a magio wand. Now the soene was changed: he
became indifferent, and she begap. to follow him everywhere.
Finally, the little cottage in whioh they were was transformed
into a beautiful palace; the sheph8rd became a king, and the
shepherdess a queen; and, as they had no attendants, the good
fairy changed a goat into a long-bearded steward, a cook became
a count, and three hens three beautiful marchionesses.
DigitIZed by Coogle
130
PBBPOBITIONS.
LHBBOll' XL.
PREPOSITIONS.
297. THE PBEPOSITIONS, thus far, have been con-
sidered mainly in connection with the artjcle, to
show the various cases of the nouns. But, more
particularly,
298. Di is used to indicate possession, material,
cJlaracter, and origin; as,
Quato lilwo , IIi tAio padr,. This book is my father' ..
Una 60IIigiia IIi tnftO A boUle otwine.
U. _ IIi """to ...... A IDfd1 otmerit.
Un giowsu IIi !lUi ftGIIJli A youth of high birth.
U. cal'P'llo IIi paglia A straw hat.
299. The need or the desire of expressing our
thoughts with rapidity has led the Italians to omit
one of the two nouns connected by the preposition
di; consequently, many of the Italian verbs are to
be found governing this preposition. By a close
analysis the connecting word which has been omit-
ted can be ascertained; for example,
D_ndar, IIi gualcuno To aek after aDy ODe.
Dar, ., briccou a gualcuno To oall ODe a rogue.
Ar. IIi cappello a !lwUCUIIO To make a bow.
Ar II' occhio a qoolcullo To give the wink to auyone.
The ellipses in these phrases might be supplied as
follows:
Domandare la pe1'lOlIa IIi !l"alcUIIO.
Dar. il "'010 IIi bricco'le a qUtUCUftO.
Fare UII ltJluto di cappello a qUtUCUftO.
Are "II cenllo d'occhio a !l"alcuno.
DigitIZed by Coogle
PBBPOSlTIONS.
VARIOUS USES OF THE PREPOSITION DI.
MOTi di mort, improlltlUa
.Scn .. , di proprio pugno.
PM'ti di lIOlo, di COT.II.
Lo dico di cuor.
Pemo di .cri",rgli
He died suddenly.
He wrote with hiB own hand.
He departed in haste.
I lI&y it from the heart.
I think of writiDg to him.
131
300. The preposition a is generally employed to
express the tendency of the subject towards ~ por
son, place, or thing, whether the motion is under
stood, commenced, or ended; as,
Y"errA II Pllngi .ubito '. He will come to Paris IOOJL,
(Ji",." II RomIJ wi Hrll He reached HAlme laSt night.
Se 1Indt.mi II CUll tloatrll. If I could go to your ho1l88.
301. .All the verbs of motion which express a
direction towards any object are followed by the
preposition a; as,
Y"1IIlo II R01JUJ. I am going to HAlma.
This preposition is also used to connect the w ~ r d
expressing the motive power with that expressing
the object set in motion; as,
Mulino II ",,,to. Windmill.
Legno II ",Ze BaU.boat.
Macclaina II Npore \ Steam-engine.
VARIOUS USES OF THE PREPOSITION A.
Una CIIIIJ II pU&" ,,",no.
Utili CIIIIJ II Ire pU&"i,
.8WlllltlO II 4", II dU/l.
Si di""ero II quattro, II .cinque,
II otto.
Una ,e. II '"macll.
D" oggi " otto.
DII oggi " pindici.
"" 6IIItuIo II morte.
A houle with a ground-1loor.
A house with three atories.
They went two by two.
TheydiTided themae1TeB into groupe
oftbur. of in, of eight.
A spiral etaircue.
This day week.
This day tbrtnight.
He 1fIoII beaten to death.
DigitIZed by Coogle
lSJ PBEPOBITIOD.
VOCABULARY.
Betcmd. beIideI
oUr,. To reoe1ve Rie,.".,.
BOa& BaU.llo. Beaideaoe



.

.Reriden. ..
Briot .




Mil""", Ribbon

.IVlutFo.
Captala CapitaftO. Satin


.Rao.
ColIDtrT girl COfIItMlira",. Sea


Mer,.
To deoalve Ingan"",r Bhon



~ To dItII



y .. Ure. Silver




rge1llo.
Gold. .


Oro. Btraw
.



Paglillo
Xitohell




Cud"",. V e l ~


.
Yell.,..
BtoI7


PiGfiO. Watch Oriolo.
~ t

...
Pr,,,,.,,.
To wear

Porlar,.
EXERCISE XXXIX.
Where ill your Bilver watch? I80ld it yeeterday. Why did
you .u it ? Becal1l8 I have received a preaent of a gold watch.
How ill your mend? He was well Iaat week. Have you not
_ him this week? No, becal1l8 he went to Paria lut Satur-
day. With whom did he go' With hill brother, the captain
of the Iteam boat " Europa." It you will give me a black cloth
coat, I will give you this fine Bilk dreaI. What aball I do with
it? Thill ill a very good dreaI for your aiIter. I would give
you-what you uk, itl were rich. It ill time to go home. What
o'clock ill it? It ill half' put eleven. Where are you going?
I am. goiDg to market. What are you going to do at market?
I am. going to buy lOme peachea and cheniea. Have you no
cherriea in your country-houle? I have two cherry-treea, but I
have no cherriea this year. Where do you intend to go next
lumDulr? I Ihall go to the IIeIHhore. To your 1iIIter'1 reai-
dance' I am. not lUre. Do you know how many rooms there
are in your mther'l threHtory brick hoUle' I believe (that)
there are aeventeen rooms beaide the ldtohen and the dining-
room. Who ill that lady with a .. tin dreaI? I do not bow,
but I think (that) abe ill my mUlio-teaeher'lliIter. I thought
(that) abe was a country girl. Why did you think 8O? Becau.
Ihe 'W8IU'I a Itraw hat with a velvet ribbon, and thill ill not the
taahion. I think (tha.t) the beat taahion ill to be simple and
without atrectation in dreaIiDg, Bpeaking, and in everything.
You are milltaken, air; there ill a. taahion in everything, and if
we do not tOllow it, fmIl'1 one calla UB rUde. 1M the fool dra
U otherl wilh; let the wille do what he likea.
DigitIZed by Coogle
\
PBEPOB1TIONB.
LESSON XLI.
THE PREPOSITIONS DA, PER.
302. THE PREPoSITION da is used,
188
1. To express a. relation of dependence, origin,
or departure; a.s,
La rAW mucUa tlipcnde tla tH>i. My II1lOOe88 depends on you.
La Cllrita cOfAincill dll " 1Iuao. Charity begiDa at home.
9'" Some verbs, which expreaa by themaelvea the action of parting
from an objeot. instead of tla take tli. it the noun has no article; ...
U acir tli C/JIII To go out of the houae.
LefIGrri tli tll1lO111 To leave the table.
Clime tli _110. . . . . . To fiIJ.J. out of the hand.
But, itthe noun is preoeded by the article. tla is UBed ; ...
U.cir tlalill C/JIII tli fUIIlctlllO. To go out of ... y one'. hoUle.
LeflGrri tlalill "'tlollI To leave the table.
2. Before a.ll words which express the use or
destination of any object; &8, .
Boltiglill tlll "no. . . . . . . . . Wine-bottle.
C/JIII tlll "11m. . . . . . . . . House 1br sale.
TlJbocco tlll fu_re Smoking tobaooo.
3. To expre .. {: } 1M l\o1I8e 0/; ..,
Lo troftret. tla rAW frtJtdlq. You will find him at my brother'a.
Andrb tlal tAetlico I ahall go to the phJBlaian'a.
Y lido tlll lui I am going to his house.
N. B.:::- It the pe1'IIODal pronoun which 1b1low. tla is an objeoti1'8
pronoun in the same penon with the subject, .. io tla rAe. Iv tla teo
these pronouns tla _. tla teo have the meaning of alone; thu,
Io flGdo tla me means I am going by myaeIt (alone).
Ylri IIntlUe tla tiM" You are going by yo_It
But Io flGdo tla tH>i means I am going to your hoUle.
Yoi IIndate tlll rAe .. You are going to my hoUIe.
DigitIZed by Coogle
1M PBEPOBlTIONB.
V ABIOUS USES OF THE PREPOSITION DA.
Jlwte da far.'
Datemi da la_a",.
Gli diedi da "nn dollari uri
I1141tina.
Vi 11"om,lIo, da galaaluomo, di
non pari""
Dite do. wero 0 dite da burlo. 1
10 fo.cc1o ia maedro di mv.rica.
Egli fa da !fI'afl, rignor
V.nite da me.
Non i da .c1l.ertzo. '
Un vomo da 6erae.
QueBto i u. ((JgfJIUo da commedia.
EgZi iii" da principl.
80no ,tato mo"., da pel cane.
Un vomo da Zodore.
Un' o.rma da difender
Da fI.Oi non Ii parla IngZ .. e.
EgZi i ptJIZlIIO da co.ter&a.
Fate do. pt'aftlllo per ii"i.
Da vomo di onore.
Voi paTZate da "nno.
L'_ dall' abitD nero.
Noi tlio.ggiammo da ottD meai.
PAlsai inllano da cAla fJO.tTa
ieri .,,,a.
Have you.anything tAl dot
Give me I50IIIething tAl do.
I gave him about tweDty dollan
yesterday morniug.
I promiBe tAl you, on the faith ot a
gentleman, not tAl speak.
Do you speak in earnest or in jest !
I teach m11llic.
He plays the great lord.
Come tAl my hoUBe. "
'T is not a thing tAl joke about.
A goodman.
This is a subjeot fit for a oomedy
He lives like a prince.
I have been bitten by that dog.
A man tAl be praised.
An arm (weapon) for deftmce.
With us English is not spoken.
He is mad enough tAl be chained.
Prepare dinner for ten.
As a man ot honor .
You speak wisely.
The man with the blaolt ooat.
We travelled about eight months.
It -was in 'Yain that I passed by
your house last night.
SOS. The preposition per is used to express the
reason why, the cause by whick, and tke manner in
whick, a thing is accomplished. It answers to the
English for, through, in order to, and must always
be expressed in Italian, though understood in
English; as,
8crifJO per compiacerlli.
P,r Ie continue piogge, ilftume
,bocc/). .
Per me Ii "" nell" citlA dol,nte.
I write to please yon.
Beoause ot the oontinual rains,
the river overflowed.
Through me one goes intAI the oit;y
otwoe.
DigitIZed by Coogle
PBEPOB1TIOlm. 186
304. Per followed by an infinitive after the verbs
Blare and U861'e signifies to be about, to be on the
point of; 88,
810 per patire. I am about to depart.
10 er/J per jIGf1ir, pGnto egli I w ... about to depart when he
--
came.
VARIOUS USFB OF THE PREPOSITION PER.
F""lo per tile.
Fatelo per till!
.Eblri IHSftC per _ giorai.
Per _. _ lofarri.
Per till (per conto tllio) _ 10
I/Jr,i.
A tuloralo per ",ato.
LtJ cilia /v IJIIalUa per fAIIr. e
per terra.
Do it on my own account.
I pray do it tor (the Ion of) me I
I had bread nine dr.y&
As tor me. I would not do it.
I would not do it on JD'1 own
account.
He w .. adored .. a saint.
The city was usailed by sea and
land.
305. In.fuo'ri sometimes follows the clIoBe it gov-
erns; &8,
III Ivmi Ili palo. tutto tI/J be",. } 'R.---t thJa ....-1.;R8 _ well.
7Wto "/J beftC Ili i
fSUto
ia lvorl. -1' " .... ,,-D--
306. Di ld and di qua are followed by the prepo-
sition da; but aZ di ld and aZ di gud are generally
followed by the preposition di; as,
Di qua tltJl flv- } This..... t th
.Ill Ili iN del flv- ..... e 0 e nver
.Ill III Ii del ponte } ---t 'de ofth 1..Id_
Di Ii tltJl ponte ~ . . . . Ii e u"--e'"
Did I leave my boot heret
You left it at my alater' ..
I oan go out whenever I like.
That IIOldier it a bran man.
Ho io llJlCiGto il tllio libro pt,
Yoi 10 l/JIcitJlte tltJ IIIia IOT,IIa.
POlIO vecir, pando fIOglio.
Quel ,oltllllo i VII Hloroao.
DigitIZed by Coogle
186
A.nopnt
To ucertaiD. '.
Boldlf
Collll8CJ.wplOe
To ooll8ider
To 00D8UIIUI
Courtesy
Danger
To grapple.
Match
PREPOSITIONS.
VOCABULARY.
.8.rrOfllJme.
.8.ccer'arri.
.8.rditamente.
Co_qutn.ca.
Conaiderarll.
C __ re.
COTtena.
Pericolo.
.8.ggrapparll.
.8.ccoppiar
Mouthful
To meet
Neokll'C8
To D01Jl'iBh
Babble
Toiemark
To rush
Temper

Whenever
EXERCISE XL.
BOCCOfNo
IncontrIJTIIo
Colla-. ,
.8.limentar,.
.CaftG{Jlia.
Bi_rcar,.
Lanciar,i.
T_pera_ato.
VioZ,nlo
I O!/f&i pal tIOlta.
Have you my brother's French dictionary, or mine? I have
neither your brother's dictiouary nor yours; I have my sister's
dictionary. Is your sister's dictionary as good as mine? My
sister always has the best books that can be found; so that, if it
is not better than yours, it must certainly be as good (as yours).
H you promise me to come and see me this afternoon, I will go
with you to my father's. I have many things to do, and shall not
be able to come. Where did you leave your I left them
in my bed-room. Why does that man go alone? Because
he has no friends. - Would you call a man who does not know
what danger is a brave man? No, I would not call him so;
because he who rushes upon danger without coDBidering ita
collll8CJ.uences has in him the nature of a brute. Then who is
to be called a brave man? The man who, knowing the danger,
meets it boldly, either through n8C8ll8ity, or for some honorable
cause. Where did your brother find that wine-bottle? That
is not a wine-bottle. What is it, then? It is a bottle of wine.
0, I thought it was empty; but where did you find it? I
found it at my father's. At what time could I go to your
father's to-night? You can go whenever you like; but I will
send my servant to ascertain when he will be at home. Do
they apeak English in your country? But few persoDB speak
English in our cou.ntry, but many read and tranalate it very well.
The lady whom Milton married after he had become blind was
very beautiful, but of a violent temper. One of the poet's
friends, wishing to praise her beauty, r8marked that she was
a rose." I know it," said Milton, "not by the color, but by
the thorns."
DigitIZed by Coogle
USE OF THE TBIBD PERSON FEIIINI.NE. ~ 3 ' l
LESSON XLII.
USE OF THE THIRD PERSON FEMININE.
307. BESIDE the_way of addressing an individual
in the second person plural, common to all other
languages, the Italians have adopted the use of the
third person, Ella, which is equivalent to the title
Vostra signoria, Your Lordship, or Your Ladyship.
This peculiar form of address is chiefly used to
evince a mark of respect to a superior, and often as
a mere matter of etiquette in speaking to a gen-
tleman or lady with who:rn one is not intimately
acquainted. In such a case, the verb is to be used in
the third person singular if the subject is Eaa, and
in the third person plural if the subject is "E1leno.
The past participle or any adjective must also ~ e in
the feminine form, and must agree with the subject.
E EllIS conte. 1 Are you contented (lady or gentleman) f
80flo ElleflO Conteflte 7 Are you contented (ladies or genUem,.en) f
g- Particula.r care should be tum to. have all the ProDOUDB
referring to the subject EllIS or ElleflO in the third person ; as,
And not
Ha EllIS .tudilJto lIS ItIIS lu:iofle.
HlSflfIO Ellmo .tudialo lIS loro le:done.
HIS EllIS itudialo lIS "oltrlS lu:ion
HlSnflO ElleflO ,tudilJto lIS lUIS lezione.
308. This peculiarity of the Italian language .is
not recommended to foreigners,
1. Because it did not originate with the language.
Dante, Petrarch, Boccaccio, did not adopt this form,
but always used the second person plural, wi.
'1
'-- .'
DigitIZed by Coogle
1S8 IDIOJlATIC BXl'Jl.UISIONS.
2. Because the progress of democracy tends now
to equalize all classes, and this mode of address is
beginning to be obsolete.
S. Because foreigners, who visit Italy, with a
limited knowledge of the language, would be more
at home in addressing persons in their usual way;
moreover, they can say to any lady or gentleman
Oome Btate: Fatemi un /avore, without the least
apprehension of being charged with want of refine-
ment, whilst it would be ludicrous to address a ser
vant or a porter in the third person, and say, Hi dia
un bioMier d'acqua. Mandi gueata lettera aJla poata.
IDIOMATIO EXPRESSIONS.
Avert in l"'egW.
Allmin odio.
A tier, per i!J1lOf"G1lle.
Atlere"" tempo di ptWGIliIo.
Atler Iretta.
Atler/_
A_d' uopo.
Allen! in ordine, or in pronto.
~ t : e r mtJla tlOCe.
AtleritJ con uno.
Euere dG guGlcAs CON.
Euert a CGtHIllo.
Eum di lnumG f&tIICitG.
ERer, a potU di
Esser 6entlellvlo.
Esser mtJlNtJuto.
Euert in grtulo di
Euert a mtJl termine.
ERer ICIIf'IO di tlensri.
ERere in rittn'do.
To appreciate.
To hate.
To believe (lOme one) ignorant.
To have a good time.
To be in haste.
To be proud.
To have need.
To have in readineIB.
To be ill spoken ot.
To be angry with one.
To be good tor something.
To be out ot trouble.
To come Qra good f"amily.
To be partaker ot . .
. To have a good reputation.
To have a bad name.
To be able to
To be in a bad condition.
To have but little money.
To be late.
DigitIZed by Coogle
EX.AJlPLl!8 AND EXEBOISE. 139
I am afraid I shall Bee 'Illy broth-
er'. friend no more.
Have I offended you in any wayT
I think him impertinent.
I mean to 8Ioy that he i. proud.
I wed my brother tor money.
How old are you r I am eighteen
yea.ra old.
But as for my books.
80 much the better.
Temo di fIOn "eder. tAIIi pit J.
IImico di mio /ra.teJlo.
Vi Ifo io mlli q/Juo 1
10 credo ck. egli ria imperUnenU.
10 fIOglio air. ehe egli l orgoglioeo.
Domllndai delltJr'O II mio /ra.teJlo.
QUllnti IInni IIW 1 Ho dicioUo
linn,.
Mil in quanto ai min libri.
Tanto meglio.
EXEROISE XLI.
What is the matter with you, my good friend? I cannot
tell you what is the matter with me, but the Bight of tha.t man
a.lwa.ys puts me in a. sate that I cannot describe. Proba.bly it
is beca.use you a.re not well acqua.inted with him. I hope I
shall never haVe suoh a.oqua.inta.noes. Ha.s ~ e olfended you in
a.ny wa.y? He has not (olfended me), but he is conceited, a.nd I
dislike men like him, beca.use they generally have but little wit.
Then you think "him ignora.nt. Certainly, he is not only igno-
ra.nt a.nd superstitious, but he is spoken ill of too. I pity him.
And I hate him. 0, no; we must never hate a.nyone. I do
not mean to say that I rea.lly hate him, but I oa.n never find
his society as agreeable as it may be to you. "How old a.re
you ? " a.sked a lady of one of her tenant-farmers. " I cannot
rea.lly tell," replied he, "whether I am thirty-eight or forty-
eight." "How oa.n you forget your age? " said the lady, with
surprise. co Madam," said he, "I could tell- you how much
money I poBII88S, how many cows and sheep I have; but as for
my years, I never trouble myself to count them, as I cannot lose
one of them, and no one can take one from me." I wish I had
twenty thousand dolla.rs; a.nd I wish to have a. good reputation.
What could you do with your good reputation without a. penny
in your pocket? I do not know; yet I should prefer a. good
name without money to a ba.d name with plenty of it. But yon
must remember that a man without money is not a.ble_ to do
what he likes. So much the better.
- DigitIZed by Coogle

140 01' THE PRONOUN 81
LESSON XLIII.
THE PRONOUN HI.
309. WHEN the pronoun Bi is used before .a verb,
although it can be expressed in English by the
indefinite pronoun one or they, or by the passive
voice, it is in Italian but the object of the verb used
rellectively. Si dice, Bi vede, have the meaning of
queata COBa detta, or veduta,-this thing is said or
seen. Consequently, the verb agree ,with the
tubject, if a subject is to be found in the sentence:
8i ",/Ide UA CGwllo. A horse is BOld.
8i tICItIlono due CGlHIlii Two lIonea an BOld. .
310. In compound tenses, the verb to be,
must be employed instead of the verb avere, to have, ,
because all refiective verbs in Italian are conjugated
with the verb 688ere; as,
8i , ",AIltdo UA ClJlHIllo A bone has b.n BOld.
10lIO ftfIIluti due ClJtHIlli Two bon. han b.n BOld.
g- We 'Ill , &lao II&Y. 101 In English. E .t1Jlo ",AIltdo VA CGIHIlIo;
10lIO dati "'AIluti due CGfJlJlli.
311. Instead of Bi, uno may be used, when Bi can
be replaced by one, a man, a person; 8.8,
QvgAllo vno tlonM. _ pell'lI II guaL
When one BleepB. he does not think of *roubl ..
g- W. may &lao lI&y. fUlJAIlo IlonAitJIIIO _ penrilJlIIO II fIlIAL
312. When, in compound tenses, 8 is used with
a conjlUlctive pronoun, the verb wnire may be
employed instead of 688ere, with the omission of the
pronoun Bi; as,
oMi Ii , detto. or }
oMi , dato deUo, or It has b.n IIIIoid to me.
oMi fJieta ddto.
DigitIZed by Coogle
snroNYllB .AND IDIOJlS. 141
SYNONYMS.
FEAR, PAURA, TIMORE.
The coward has paura, but Dot timore, of doiDg a. thiDg.
A brave man has timore, but not pGUra, of doiDg a. thing.
PGUrG originates in cowardice; timore, in excessive prudence. .
We have timore, and not pGVf'a, of God.
The good is a.fra.id of the laws. JltJ timon delle leggi.
The thief is a.fra.id of the laws. Ha paura delk leggi.
!I.'O RUB, 8TOFINARB, 8TROPICCIARB.
&rofinare is the act of rubbing gently with the hand, or with
a BOft object.
&ropicciore is the act of rubbing hard with the foot, or with
a haM object. '
We rub, .(ro.fotjomD, a piece of amber, or a stift"ened limb.
We rub, tJIiopiccicimo, a horse, or the floor.
IDIOMATIO EXPRESSIONS.
.AntltJr dietro a . .
Antlar in CDikra.
AndtJre in 6uon ora.
AndtJre in mtIlor
.AntlcIr per la mente.
AndtJre a ctI'IHdlo.
Andare a 'PtJlJtJo.
Antlare tIllo ICUro.
AndtJre G'monte.
A7&dtJr6 a' Wf'tJO.
AndtJr CDl tli piombo.
AntftJr tlicentlo.
Antlare in'1JutitJ.
AndtJr tentone.
Quato tIi .ta 6ene.
Store in tlitJagio.
8ttzre a gtIlltJ.
Store in pericolo.
8tIw %itto.
To follow, or BOlicit
To put one's II8lf in a paaeion.
To go in peace.
To be ruined.
To come into one's mind
, To ride on horsebaok.
To go a walking.
To act in ignorance.
To prove 'Vain.
To succeed well.
To go heedfully.
To report.
To fiill into a. puaion.
To grope about.
That becomes you
To live in BOrroW.
To float.
To be in danger.
To be hushed.
DigitIZed by Coogle
142 EXAlD'LEB AND EXEBCISB.
Your lister was oft'ered .. book by
her friend.
I am well provided with money.
All will BUooeed well with me.
I pw him writing.
He doeI not know what to .y.
UA libro fu qffrrto IJ tJOICrIJ _
rell" dal lUG IJmica.
80M ben prOf)fJeduto di """'ro.
2Utto mi riUlcirA bene.
10 10 fJidi ICriwere.
Egli ADA III c ~ cI&e Ilice.
EXERCISE XLII.
A brave IOldier, who had lost both arms in a combat, was
oA'ered a dolla.r by his colonel. I thank you for your generosity,
aaid the brave IOldier; you must certainly think that I have lost
but a pair of gloves. A traveller should be provided with four
pockets: the first, for his health; the second, for a good com-
panion; the third, larger than the o ~ e r s , for patience; and the
fourth, the largest of all, for his money. With such means, he
will be sure that everything will suoceed well with him. How
many miles can you walk in a day? I have neVer made the
attempt, but I think I could walk about twenty-one (miles), if
I were obliged to do 80. I hope that you will never be o1iliged
to walk 10 far, becauae I am aure that you could not walk more
than twelve miles. You do not know what to_yo Do not put
yourself into a passion; I say what I mean. A man like yourself,
. acouatomed to ride always on horseback, could not walk more
than ten miles a day; take my word for it. Diogenes, seeing
one day a young man blushing, " You ue afraid of making mis-
takes," aaid he; " courage, my boy, this is the color ofvirtue."
Do you see that man at the comer of the street? I see him. Do
you know him? No, I do not (know him), but I think that he
is not a good man, because he folloWll everybody, and I am afiaid
(that) he will follow me, if he sees me alone in the street. How
does the color of this dress become me? The color becomes you
well, but I do not like the dress. Why not? Because it is too
large and too long. This is the fashion. I do not care about
the fashion; I cannot bear to II8e a lady dragging about a skirt
as large as the cupola of St. Peter in Rome. Silence! and do
not &ll into a pa.uion for what cannot be helped.
DigitIZed by Coogle
ELLIPSES. 148
LBSSON XLIV.
ELLIPSES.
313. THE Italian language, though easy in its pro-
nunciation, and regular in its construction, presents
many difficulties to those who aim at a thorough
knowledge of it, because of its being filled with
elliptical phrases, whose meaning, though readily
caught by the natives, accustomed to express a
long series of ideas by a single word, a look, or a
gesture, can only be understood by foreigners
through a keen activity of and an accu-
rate analysis. The following practical observations
;may be of some help to students.
ELLIPSES OF NOUNS.
314:. The preposition di or an adjective naturally
presupposes a noun. If, to give a greater degree of
interest and beauty to the phrase by its conciseness,
the noun is omitted, it may be supplied by analy-
sis; as,
B cIoIto ifl"'fltlJ, It ignoraflfe imita, L e., I' uomo dotto, or igftorlJflte.
Hi tlomalllllJ IIi tIOi, L e., Ii tlomafldlJ IIJ perlOnlJ IIi tIOi.
Era IIi pMmatlera, L e., era ulla dagiou Ili primatler&.
Cader. IlIJ Glto, L e., coder.1l1J luogo alto.
ELLIPSES OF CONJUNCTIONS AND CORRELATIVES.
315. The conjunction eke is often omitted before
verbs used in the subjunctive mood; 8S,
V'orrri mi Iliciatl IIJ "eritA, tor V'orrti CM tni Iliciatl la "mta.
316. Instead 9f peTckd, eke is. often used; as,
W fIOA corriGtu allll cilIA CM , mU, tor Perc'" film
DigitIZed by Coogle
144: ELLIP8li8 A!TD IDIOIIS.
317. The antecedent or consequent term of a
comparison is often understood; as,
8iccOfAt ftDft ,,, 6eftIaccolw " 1M IH'rti, :lbr cOli ., 1M IH'rfl.
JIfi trOtJtJtc 1J1'IJl' mi lunule, :lbr tlllll, pale. . .
ELLIPSES OF VERBS AND PARTICIPLFB.
I "
318. A. verb or p8.rticiple is suppressed in a prop-
osition when its" meaning can be easily supplied by
analogy; as,
Yia di quIl, i. 8., aadtJle N dl qua.
Mandar. PIll fUtlico, L 8., _ndar, ,,"a perllOlla a elrcar" 0 c1&itJ-
aIIr. il ftlIldico.
Appella,ui III potw _gnaw, 8., appe1llJ ,,,i am,,/JIo
.NW meno Al cammill tii IIOItra 1IiIII, i. 8., lIel ftlIlz.co tlIll
IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS.
Dar"la a gamlJe.
Dar I-a.
Dare fill iJltfmt/ere.
Dare i,dvce.
Darn pUero.
Dare in jwutito.
Dar 1it:wtlJ.
Dar la CGCt:ia.
Dar prindpio, fine
Darn a1lo 1tUtlio.
Darn 1Jel tempo.
Dare a cretlenza.
Dare II pigione.
Darn briga.
Dar da 1JerIl, da mtmgiare.
Dar
Dar la
Dar nel1Jeruglio.
Dar norma.
Dare un' oaAiata.
Dar,; ad una C06a.
To run away.
To believe.
To make one believe.
To give birth, to publiah.
To care for.
To lend.
To ball.
To pursue.
To begin, to end.
To apply one's self to study.
To divert one's self.
To aell upon C1'8dit.
To let out on rent.
To trouble one's self.
To giv:e BometIWag to drink, eat
To "cut anchor.
To mock at.
To hit the mark.
To preacribe a rule.
To cut an eye at.
To apply one's self to a thing.
DigitIZed by Coogle
To 8Dtar 1'OODI.
I 'UIld to write.
Not in the leut.
ELUlPLES AND EXERCISE. 146
EXAMPLES.
Erltrare iA 1IAG alalll:a
Io era iolito di, or .oleN .crifltr .
NNAte qffatto.
I put DrT hand to my heart. J\Ii mili ItJ _110 al euor
EXERCISE XLIII.
A literary man was once 110 much abllOrbed in the translation
of a book that he gave orders to his Ilel'Vapta never to alloW' any
one to enter his library, where he used to work from morning
until evening. One day, wh8D he was nearly at the end or his
work, a IlerVant came in great haste and announcect. that his
lady had fallen down; and that ahe was Berio11llly hurt. Do you
think tliat he started" at the news? Not in the least. Turning
over the)811.Yes of a large Greek dictionary, he told the servant
to go for the doctor. After a while, another II81'V&D.t came in,
telling him that his lady was at the point of death, and that she
wished to 1188 him. "I will be ready in a moment," _id .he; "I
have but a few lines to tra11lllate." Scarcely had he Baid 110, when
the chambermaid entered, with her eyes filled with tears, _y-
ing that her miatresa had expired. Did the translator drop the
pen he held in his hand? No; but, putting his left hand to his
forehead and rubbing it gently; he exclaimed, " Ab, poor me!
she was a very good woman," and, rubbing his forehead for a
while, which seemed to erase the memory of ~ e good woman,
went on in his work. I cannot believe such a atory. Do you
think .that I would try to make you believe it, if it were not true?
No, I do not think 80, but I would apply myBelf to the reading
of such boob as elevate the mind and ennoble the heart, rather
than atories. invented only to call forth the evil part of our
nature. But should we not mention a circumstance, which has
really taken place? Not anything which is contrary to common
liliiii8, and the naturalllow of feeling in a human heart. What
you have jU8t mentioned is not creditable; it must be exagger-
atad; and if it were jU8t &I you mention it, it is an exception to
the general rule, and I would advise you not to repeat it, or
embellieh it only to divert yourself, because, if you do 80, no one
will believe what you 8&Y, even when you speak in earnest.
DigitIZed by Coogle
1"
ELLIPSI8.
LBBBOll XLV.
ELLIPSE S, continUed.
ELLIPSES OF PERSONAL, POSS1!HSlvE, AND RELATIVB
PRONOUNS.
819. PERsONAL PRONOUNS are commonly omitted
before verbs, because the number and person of the
verb is indicated by the termination of each tense
.A.mo has always the meaning of I low, and amate
_ of you, low, because 0 is the characteristic ter-
mination of the first person singular, and te of the
second person plural. Nevertheless, personal pro-
nouns must be. expressed when their omission might
cause doubt, as well as wheu we wish to point at
one person to the exclusion of another; as,
EgZi .eri"" or IlZa 1m", j io, or 'gli, or IlZa .eri",N.
Eglino .eri_no, or "l,no .eriwtrGno.
P"oi a,,,', dcao coil j tgli non di .. , nulla.
820. The possessive pronoun is often omitteq
when the idea of possession can be easily identified
and supplied by analogy. If we say, K'I.O frat&lo
verrd qui colla moglie, coi jigli e con tueta Za lami,.
glia, we meau with hill wife, children, and fllJDily;
but the possessive pronoun is omitted in Italian,
being considered super:O.uous. In the same way
if we say 'I.7fJdo in casa, in bottega, we mean my1wuBe,
my store, because it is generally admitted that in
such phrase.s the person speaking refers to his own
house or store. Likewise, if we 86y non ko studiato
Za leaione, we understand that it is my lesson, be.
DigitIZed by Coogle
1
1
I
ELLIPSES AND IDIOIIS. 14:'1
cause one would not properly lOBe hiB time in Btudy-
ing the leBBon of another.
go The ~ T e pronoun can be supplied by the adjective".".
pr1IJj ,gli parfi colla propria carrOZllla, iDstead of colla,,", carroZllla.
321. It iB very common in Italian to BuppreBB the
relative pronouns cAe or it quale, together with the.
auxiliary verbB e88e:re and a'Vere, when uBed in the
indicative mood. The past participle mUBt in this
case agree with the Bubject; as,
No. polIO racconla7'17i I, cou dett. 0laU" i. 8., ~ _ cAl 10lIO ".,.
dett, fJ laUe. .
Mi dolgo dri Zibri perdv., i. 8., dei libri clu ko perduto.
N. B. - Thia eliaio.n may al80 take place by changing the ..... b
trom a puBve into an active tbrm ; M,
n de_ro daIoal dGll' tJfAico fbr n denaro clu Z' aRicc.1 As dato.
IDIOMATIO EXPRESSIONS.
Al far tkl giOf'fUJ.
Al far dellG flOU,.
Far di f'llfJllieri.
Far'; iMllJUi.
FfJrfJ agtJNJ.
F,.., all' S7ftOrI.
Far alto.
Far, UntI eo.a a penrullo.
Far IJilOlJRo.
Far reIUo.
Far cipiglio.
Far eoltrziOM.
Far front,a.
F,.., j ffllti suoi.
Far, il fxIUwdo.
Far k CtII'1,.
Far 10 quimato.
Jrar Itlpe'n a ptdamo.
Far ,tan a M!JftO gutUq4no.
At the break of day.
. Towards eveniDg.
To be nece.ary.
To come forward.
To strive for the victory.
To make lo ... e.
To halt.
To do a thing eDCtly.
To be needful.
To make a ring.
To look frowningly.
To breakfast.
To face.
To follow one's own aJl'airI,
To play the ninny.
To deal <at carda).
To play the lover.
To let ODe know.
To keep ODe nndar.
DigitIZed by Coogle
,.
U8
:Not beiDa able to ~ ..
wm 1fIrI. be 10 JdDd u to
To uk An- a thing.
To uk An- a penon.
Nora paImdo len..,."
Vorrute II..,. la 60rdA tli
Domarular. VM cOla.
Domarular. tli "M perlonll.
EXERCISE XLIV.
A preacher who had fued his audience with a IIIIImOll on the
beatitudes wu reoei:viDg the congratulationa of his menda,
when a lady of 118D.118, not; able to bear their ridiou101l8 flattery,
approached him, and with' the greatest civilitj told him (that) she
'W88 IlI1'8 that he had forgotten to mention one of the be&titudes,
which she thought would have been warmly received by. the
audience. "How can that be?" aa.id the preacher; looking
frowningly. "It is impoaaible, madam ; I know very well what I
am about; you m1l8t have been distracted, and probably you did
not fbllow the connection of the aeveral point8 of myaarmon."
"Not 10, reverend father," aaid the lady; "Iwu too attentive,
and for this reaaon noticed it." "Will you be 10 kind .. to
mention it? " " If you will allow me, I will do 10 with plau-
ore," aaid the lady, &8, with a Bmile on her lips, she B&id,
"Father, you forgot toaay, Bleesed are th088 who did not hear
your aarmon," and,- making a respectful bow, she refued. . At
what; time do you br6akrut? Not alwa,. at the _e hour.
When we are in the country we breakfaat at break of day, but
while we remain in town we generally breakfaat at eight o'clock.
If you are not going to the country to-morrow, I will try to
come and take breakfast with you. I will let you know (it)
. Who knocb?_ Can one 1188 a friend at this late hour? I am
glad to 1188 you, my friend; come in. Is it neoelll&l',Y to ask for
permission 'I' Sit down. How do you do? How have you been?
How is your mother? And your BiBtera, how are they? They
are all well, and I am perfectly well; I thank you . How long
have you been gone? Two yea.reand a half. 0, you muet give
ue a relation of all that you have II88D. and done; we should be
delighted to hear it. Should I relate to you all that I have II88D.
and done, it would take me many a day; but; I will certain1I
comply with your wish by giving you an account of my journey ~
I Bhall be very muoh obliged to you.
DigitIZed by Coogle
1
1
I
DIJlDTUTIOl( OF WORDS. 149
LBSSON XLVI.
DIMINUTION OF WORDS.
322. THB Italian language claims its preeminence
among the living languages for its musical and sono-
rous pronunciation. .All words, except the article
iT, and a few monosyllables, end in vowels; their syl.
lables, formed by an almost equal proportion of
vowels and. consonants, are so a ~ g e d as to pre-
sent an admirable smoothness in their articulation.
This peculiarity of the language, giving ' ~ o the words
an easy and Howing softness, distinguishes it from
the English, whose chief tendency is to be direct and
manly, by the use of sharp, brief, and harsh Bounds.
323. To avoid the uniform termination of the
same vowels, and to give more vigor to the expres-
sion, the Italians often suppress the last vowel, and
sometimes the last syllable of a word.
324. No definite rules can be assigned for these
abbreviations, the. only sure guide being the law
of euphony subject to judgment.
325.- The following rules are, however, to be
observed:
1. No final vowel characteristic of the feminine or
plural of nouns can.ever be omitted.
2. No final vowel can be suppressed in the conju.
gation of any verb, except in the infinitive, in the
third person of both numbers, and sometimes in the
first person plural.
DigitIZed by Coogle
160 1IAXDf8 AlID FIOUBBB 01' BPBBCIL
IF The i of the IfJOOIld per.- of the imperati't'e of 't'erbs IIIIIIiDc
lD ."., aad "ir. is often omitt.ed wh8ll the foUowiDg word _mages
with a 00III0II&Ilt.
3. No final vowel is suppressed in words at the
end of a sentence, or in words which are imme-
diately followed by or 8 impure.
N. B. - ThIa ra1e is DOt obtlened in poetry.
4. Words ending in a, i, .or in an accented vowel,
are never retrenched, except
Suora, a title for nuns; as, Suor Maria.
Ora, now; with its' compounds; as, ancor, talor.
Fuori, out.
Giovanni, John, when followed by.another proper
name; as, 'Giovan Battista.
Ien, yesterday, when joined to 8era or nolte; as,
ier notte, ier 8era.
MAXIMS AND FIGUIm1 OF SPEECH.
. Tm.r. tAM IUlltl c o r ~ .
To keep one on the rope.
Euere tAM COM dG tlt.a%%iM.
To be a thing by the dozen.
} To keep one on tenter-hoob.
} To be aomething WIrf eommon.
Far bottep di ogm COM. } To keep an eye to the main
To make shop of everythiDg. chance
Comprarli brig1&e a tlen.ari con-}
tarm. To make one's own troubles.
To buy troublee with cash.
Faria pGfJf1T6 CO" 1UtU'tI.
To make pay with usury.
RomP'-" i./ili tli UAtI tramtJ.
To break the thread of a plot.
PIIfJGf'8 di caUirJQ fJIDftUcI.
To pay in bad money.
}
To. ~ e one pay dearly for aD.
inJury.
} To nip the evil in the bud.
} To be ungrateful.
DigitIZed by Coogle
How long 1rill it take 10U to copl
that Jetter t
I 1riah I cio1Ild write it in tnnt;r-
one minlltel.
I told him 80, bu.t it ill of no uae.
To peniat in do1Dg a tbiDg.
1Iit
QuaRto tempo tIi 6iIogtaer& per
copiM. qwlla IrIRrtl 1
10 _rei potM'lll .enwr. iA "11-
tvll ",iAutO. .
10 glilla 110 detto, mil iAI/tlAO.
p"n.t.re II Itlre .114 eOitJ.
EXERCISE XLV.
A maD C8.D desire no mortel thing more than to behold hill
enemy proetrated before him, and reduced to such a condition
that be has him at his mercy; but the greater the oft'ence, the
more the injured one is bound to render himaelf glorious by par--
dODiDg it; this is one of the peculiar of a generous
and exalted spirit. How long does it take you to make an arti-
ficial flower like that? I C8.D make them with little trouble.
I wiah I could have lIODle of them. How maDY? Only a few.
Very well; I will send them to your house towards evening.
You are very kind. How do you like the flowers my friend's
BiBter we&rII on her bonnet? I do not like them at all; they
are very ugly flowers. Why does your brother keep that maD
on tenter-hoob ?-is it not better to 880y that he cannot do any-
thing for him? He has tried several times to get rid of him, but
it is of no use; he perBiBte iD. thinking that my brother has the
power to help him. Does your friend know of the death of her
daughter? No, she does not know of it yet; we have only men-
tioned that she wall very ill, and that poIlBibly she might Dot
recover, but I have not had the courage to tell her of the death
of her only daughter; I have endeavored to prepare her ftftt,
88oying, that should misfortune come, she must submit to Provi-
dence and be resigned. I would rather speak plainly than tor-
ture per thus with anxiety. I am going to do 10 to-night; but
she is very feeble, and the doctor fears that such overwhelming
intelligence might prove fatal to her. Who is that maD? I do
not know; but I think that my brother knOWl him well. Do
you think that he has an ugly look ? Yes, indeed. He has not
only an ugly look, but he is an uceediDgly disagreeable penon.
You are too severe upon him.
DigitIZed by Coogle
loS
DDOlfDTIOlf OF WOBDS.
LHSSOll' XLVII.
DIlIINUTION OF WORDS, continued.
3S6. TlIE final e, forming a syllable with the pre-
ceding consonant " n, and r, is often omitted; as,
UN "" eOlG. Such a thiDg.
P." .. frO Dark
Cuor /Iflel, . Faithful heart.
N. B. -The, is DOt omitted lfthe COJIIIODrdlta " ra, aDd r,an pre-
ceded by Ul1 other COJIIIODrdlt in the .. me .,.llable.
327. When the final e is preceded by a double r,
instead of the e the final: syllable re is omitted; as,
. CotIdur, 'fIIlur, and Dot eomlurr, iflllurr.
328. When two infinitives follow each other, the
first infinitive is always used without the e i as,
FIIr eldallare. Poler .m",e.
329. The final 0 is omitted when preceded by the
consonant " m, n, and r, in one syllable; as, .
Pel _tUlIIo. Uoa do raulla
Mara biaraea. Lor 8igMr,.
330. When the 0 is preceded by a double " as
cappello, ca'VaJlo,/anci'Ullo, followed "by a word com-
mencing with a consonant, except I, or 8 impure,
instead of the 0 the syllable 1.0 is omitted; as,
Cappel, eatHJ1,/araeitU, DOt Ca1'l"1I, eatHJU,/aReiull.
Paraeiul Charming youth.
CatHJl/eroe, WRd
N. B. - It hili been mentioned in the preceding 1-. that lillo,
graflll" lllrato,/rate, drop the lIIIIt .,.llable, or chaDge the last vowel
into an apostrophe, aoooordiDg to the begiDDiDg of the word fbllowiDg
them.
DigitIZed by Coogle
VAXTVS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH. 163
331. Though the laws of euphony are the chief
elements of the existence of Italian. the above rules
have been generally established by the best writers
of the language, tO,add to it more elegance, beauty,
and harmony.
332. It is also for the sake of euphony that an i
is p r e ~ e d to words commencing with 8 impure,
when the preceding word ends in n or r; as, per
iBcAerzo, con wade; and that a. d is added to the
preposition a, and' to the conjunction 6, when these
letters are immediately followed by a word com-
mencing with a vowel; as, nemici, ed atmioi corsero
ad i'11.CO'1ltrarlo.
'MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH,
PD'T'ItIn IICp4 aI mare.
To bring"!l'ter to the l18li..
Met,... il capiIalII /J /rulto.
To put the capital to fruit.
n male rneUfJ 'P'"ofonde rtUlici.
The evil atrikee deep roots.
} To carry coala to Newcutle.
} To put money at interest.
}
The evil is gaining a strong
hold.
ZtJypare air fIC91I/J fJ IfJrIIift/Jf'l}
til WfttO. To search for a needle in a hay-
To lOW' to the wind and to dig mow.
in the water.
Non. /JfJfJf' ",z,' in. ZUCCIJ.}
Not to llave Balt ,in 'the squash. To be wea.k-mmded.
&lwtJre ltJ CtIfW'/J fJ i ctlVoli. } To have one's cake and to eat
To ave both the goat and the it.
cabbage
.lurctJre Ie ciglitJ.
To arch the eyebro.ws. } To be dumb-founded.
DigitIZed by Coogle
EXAMPLES.
To diIpla1 one'. own abilit,y.
I am endeavoring to write well
He ill going away.
How DIIoD)' times did I write to
him, but in vain !
Par titOtIr" tl,lno fill,..
Ali,to pT01Iafltlo di 1C"ftf' 6tM.
Egli Nn (It ne) IIfJ via.
Qua"" fIOl,. flon gli aeria,i. _
inwano!
EXERCISE XLVI.
A preacher was once displaying all hill abilities in a panegyrio
in praiae of St. George; among the various repetitions which
he introduced, with great pomposity he said, "Where abaJl I
place my sainU-Among the angela and the archangela'l No.
Shall I place him among the patriarchs, among the prophets 'I
No. Among the apostles, the evangelists, or the doctors of the
church 'I No, no. Where shall I place him, then 'I ~ ' And he
was endeavoring to be JI1.ore impressive by a moment'. mence,
when on" of the auditors, rising from his seat, exclaimed, " My
father, if you are not able to find a place fur your saint, you can
give him my seat, because I am going away." I am told that
your friend baa equandered all his property; can I believe it 'I
Yes, it is eo. How many times did I tell him not to be eo open-
handed, and to put his money at interest! But he did not listen
to me: On the contrary, having plenty of gold, and noWng to
do, he lIega.n to make a great display of horses and carriagea;
his house was always orowded with men of little merit, and with
flatterers, who profeaaed to be his friends and admirers; and now
that his money is all gone, his friends have disappeared, and he
is left alone and uncared for. Is he diaoouraged'l Yes, he is
(diaoouraged), and regrets that he did not listen ;> my words.
He ought to be resigned. That is what he cannot do. It is brd
in misfortune to remember happy days, and be resigned; he now
repents of the many times, that, to show that he had the means
of doing what he liked, he ran great riakB, and now finds that he
has been left alone, no one caring for him at all. My friend,
this proves that when a man refuBeB to listen to the advice of
his friends he cannot help being ruined; every one "must profit
by his own experience. Very true; but still it is not pl888&1lt
to see a, friend in eorrow and misery.
DigitIZed by Coogle .
'.rBABSPOsmON OF WORDS. 165
LBSSON XLVIII.
TRANSPOSITION OF WORDS.
3 3 ~ . THOUGH the Italian language draws its
origin from the Latin, it differs considerably in
its construction. The Latins were the rulers of
the world, and they aimed at great effects, even
in the use of their language. Their style was ma..-
jestic, but it required a steady and close attention.
There was no established order in the use of words,
but the idea of the phrase was strengthened by a
transposition and antithesis of expression, which
excited more interest in the hearer than a formal or
prosaic statement ..
334:. The Italians have followed the logical con-
struction of arranging words according to their
respective value and order of relation; . l. e., the
subject before the verb, the object after it, and the
adjective or adverb after the noun or verb they
. modify.
335. This grammatical construction has generally
been adopted in the familiar and descriptive style.
In the. former, any transposition of words is consid-
ered an affectation; in the latter, those transposi-
tions are only permitted which do not obscure the
clearness of the sentence.
336. Yet the Italians, because of the flexibility
of . their language, admit of the transposition of
DigitIZed by Coogle
168 D4.K8POSITIOlf OP WOBD8.
words in the historical, poetical, and oratorial style,
whenever ita object is to present the principal idea
of a sentence in the highest degree of clearness to
the mind, and harmony to the ear.
337. The following sentences are here given,
in order that the pupil may replace the words in
their logical arrangement, and compare .the harmony
and vigor of both forms of construction:
Parb dell' inHnlione OOe avea Ii guardb bene eli fare n mini-
mo O8IlIlO.
Nan. maguiIoenza degli edi1Izi.i, ]a ltalla 1Ilper& ogni Dazione.
E meglio puaa.r BOtto silenzio quello OOe 88IIZa dolore ricordar
non Ii pub.
Obi ti fa C8.NII8 pih OOe non nole, 0 tradire, 0 ingannare ti
nola.
Ogni mal fresco agevolmenta si sana.
Obi fa male e spera bene, 88 ste.o ingatma.
:r.. iOrtuDa &iuta i pazzi sempre, ei birbimti assi volta.
S&nno rar.iasime volta gli uomini aere 0 al tatto tristi 0 al
tIltto buoni. .
In C088 diaoneste obbligati non siamo ad ubbidire a neE1lD.O.
Dopo ]a burrasca e sempre pih lucido n BOla.
Pare OOe n BOle, e ]a donna deriso si abbiano l'impero del
mondo; l'uno ci da i giorni, l'altra Ii abbellisce. .
SYNONYMS.
ST.BP OJ!' A. STAIRO.ABB, GRADINO,8CALINO.
Gratlino is the spacious and commodious step of a publio
building. .
8ctJlino is the step ofa staircase in a private dwelling.
When we go to church or to the state-house, we uoeod
grtulitU.
When we go to our cellar or to the top of the house, we gen-
ascend and deaoend 4lini.
by Coogle
UAJ[pLES .um BXBBOISE.
16'1
A boot has been atolell from me.
I make .-great deal of JD.OD87.
He CIIoDDOt ncoeed in injuring me.
He promises much, but, after all,
he does not keeps his word.
JIfi ~ ,t4t0 rW4rto .,. li1wo.
10 gtMMltIgtaO molIo dcuro.
No,. ptW ri-=ir, /I far,," mal,.
Egli pronactt. mollo, fAIl, al far dci
coM, Mfa _muu 1/1 pllrola.
.EXERCISE XLVII.
A certain merchant, from whom a large sum of money had
been stolen, rmspecting that the thief was one of hie I18rV&D.t.I,
called them all to hie room, and said that the angel Gabriel, to
whom he was particularly devoted, appeared to him in the night
and told him that the man who had stolen the money was not
far from him, and that hie patron saint would show the thief
in the morning, if he would kneel and pray; oollll6CJ.uently he
knelt, and made all his servants kneel. .After a few minutes of
silent pray .... he exclaimed, " I thank thee, my guardian angel,
for having revealed to me that the thief can be detected by a
white spot he has on his nose." Then rising, and asking the
others to rise that he might look them in the face, he saw that
one of the servants, instsa.d of exposing himself to hie eumina-
tion, was trying to oonceal his face by looking at lOme pictures.
"Behold the thief," said t h e . ~ ; "I can see very plainly
the white spot." The servant, being afraid, confessed all, and
the merchant recovered all his property, making the servant pay
dearly for it. How does your friend succeed in his undertaking?
I sca.rcely know; he makes a great deal of money; but he has
been ungrateful to me. What has he done ? Well, he has been
endeavoring to enlarge his busin688 by saying that I have too
much to do, and that; I cannot attend to all the commissions that
are given me; he would probably have sllcceeded in injuring me,
if a good friend of mine had not made me aware of his secret
manmuvnng. I am very sorry; but can he not injure you now?
No, he cannot. I have already nipp8d the evil in the bud. Who
is that lady on your right? I do not; know her personally; but;
I am told .that she is proud, and prodigal of her promises, bUt,
after all, she never accomplishes what ahe says.
DigitIZed by Coogle
168
DDIV ATIOlil OP WOBDB.
LB880B' XLIX.
DERIVATION OF WORDS.
338. THE effect of civilization, and the need of
representing ideas by words in common use in
a nation, have, to a great extent, contributed to
the increase of the vocabulary of the various idi-
oms. ",When a word borrowed from one language
is adopted into another, it generaIlypreserves its
radical or elementary letters, but suffers a change
in its primitive termination. This change varies in
nations according to the nature and tendency of
their language; and, if no remarkable alteration
takes place in the original termination, the word
becomes naturalized, and is christened in the new
language with a mark of nationality by the change
of its pronunciation. This change of termination
or pronunciation is peculiar to each language.
The English, with a calculating and contemplative
mind, and in their origin influenced by the Druidic
religion, express themselves in a language full of
monosyllables and short words,. of sharp and inartic-
ulate sounds, and exhibit their national type by com-
pressing and condensing the newly-adopted words.
The Italians, with a more :Bowing and graceful ele-
gance, give to the new words, as a characteristic
of their language, a polysyllabic nature, and an easy
and musical articulation.
339. 'this difference of the two languages, though
)(AXJl(8 ..um FIaURBB O:r SPEECH. 169
obvious in itself, is made more sensible by simply
examining those infinitives and adverbs which,
retaining the same radical letters, assume a charac-
teristic termination. For example: Comparing the
infinitives to fi'TIriBh, to per-mit, to 8ack, with the cor-
responding Italian fonw-e, per.met-te-re,
re, it will be easily perc;eived that infinitives in
Italian have one, two, or three syllables more than
those in English. Likewise, comparing the adverbs
1Yrie/.:t1l,.1U-di-cioU8.:t1l, with the corresponding Italian,
bre-ve-men..te, it will be seen
that the termination l1l of the adverbs, used in
English without a marked accent, and only to pre-
sent the word in an adverbial form, iB in Italian
expressed by mente, a termination of two syllables, .
with an accent on the first, which, as illustrated
in the above examples, a state of mind
(numte) disposed to brevity and judiciousness.
MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH.
Tenere uno in croce.
To keep one on the croB8
.&twa 1a gvtmcia.
To amite one's own cheek.
} To torture one with anxiety.
} To repent of anything.
Morderli 1a mtmO, Ie dita. }
To bite one's own hand or fin- To be in despair.
gars. .
Allargare ltJ mtmO. }
To open the hand. To be open-handed.
Lcmorare 60tt' acgua - } .
T k der
To work nndarhand.
owor un wa...... .
DarunolU fronds e poea u"". }
To. give many leaves and few Great cry and little wool.
grapes.
DigitIZed by.Coogle

180
Bgli eHfttlb ". .".. .10
Jralfllo.
n """0 _perino no. rai pille,.
Egli ,eri"rA " buona 'dura
do_ai.
He intrusted '111'1 bzotbar witll.
eecret.
I do not like )'Our pen-kDi&.
He is going to write & good letter
to-monoll'.
EXERCISE XLvm.
It baa been observed, that when a nation has the opportunity
of coloniaing a new pJaoe, it gives to it the impreBII of ita pr0mi-
nent national tendencies: the Spaniards build a convent, the
Italians a church, the Dutch an exchange, the Engliah a for-
tress, and the French a theatre or a dancing-hall. Cato re-
gretted that he had made three great mistakes in the cauna
of his life: the first was, to have intrusted his wife with
IIIIC1'et; the aeoond, that he had ridden when he might have
travelled on foot; and the third, that he had spent one day in
idleness. What do you think of laSt night's lecture? Not
much; the orator was eloquent, but notinBtructive. It is often
-the case that to lectures may be applied the proverb, "Great
cry and little wool." How did my teacher like ray Fronch c0m-
position? He did not like it much i he said that you had
written better ones, and he hopes that the composition you are
going to write to-morrow will be better than any of the others.
Lord Bacon BaYS that in counsels it is good to see dangers, but .
in execution it is better not to see them at all, except they be very
great. Walpole aftirms that nations are mOBt commonly saved
by their worst men, because the VirtuouB are too scrupuloUB to
attempt to &rouse the people against their tyranta. The voice
of the people is likened to the voice of God; for it has been
observed that an universal opinion has an extraordinary power
in ita prognOBtications, BO that it B88DllI to have a aecret vir-.
tue of foretelling ita own happiness or misfortune.. :Beware of
everything which may do harm, and can do you no good i con-
llequently, in the presence or absence of another, never Bay with-
out neceBBityanything which may displease him. Remember,
at the same time, that it is fooliah to make enemies without a
purpose. and that civility coata nothing and buys everything.
DigitIZed by Coogle
DBBIV ATION OF WOBDS. 161
LEBBOll' L.
DERIVATION OF WORDS, continued.
340. WORDS which originate from other words of
the same language are mainly verbs derived from
nouns; as, cantare from ca.nto, or from an adjective;
illustrare from illustre, or from a preposition; ap-
p1"688are from pre880.
341. Sometimes noUDS and adjectives are derived
from verbs; as, aclorazione, admaMle, from adorare.
342. By prefixing a letter or a preposition to the
primitive word, many of the ItaJiaIl words Q.Ssume a.
different meaning. Almost all these prefixed letters
and prepositiops C8Jl be illustrated in connection
with the verb mettere, from which alone twenty.four
verbs have beell formed; as,
.l ..... tltln. FrG_lter,. P".-metter.,. ..
COIIa-tadtIr,. lJA.flTo-m.etler,. Pr"",.,.mdllr,. S-rutllr,.
Irlfr..".,Iter,. PrIHACUtr,. SOfIMIItItIr'.
Di-meUer,. Iftler""IMIteT,. Ri-cOfIMIItltlr,. Sotlo-rAeUer,.
DiI-ruIter,. Ifitro-meUere. Ri-meIteTe. Spro-m.etler,.
:E-tMttIr.. O'IMIter,. Rim-pro-metleTe. TrllMllltlei
340. It is to be observed that di8 or 8 prefixed to
a. verb gives to it an opposite meaning; as, .
,Pr,giGr. To apprecIate. Du.pr-f(JiGr.. To undenalue.
Curir.. To HJr. To 1UI88W.
N. B. - Some of the nrbi have die or, in their primithe lInDa-
tiOll8; u.
Bni.",.,. B"..,fIIr', DieHft{IVI1',. DUcorrere.
8
DigitIZed by Google
1-61 VAXIXS ABD I'IG1JBE8 OF SPEECH.
344. Bi prefixed to a verb expresses the repeti-
tion of the same action, and corresponds to the
English again,; as,
IAtIJp, To read. Bilewcr'.. To read &gaiD.
Dire To -'1. BiIlire.. To -'1 &gaiD.
342. Bi prefixed to a verb has, sometimes, the
meaning of reamoo, opposition,; as,
Mil""'" To IIIld. BStuIlllar,. To IIIIlCl baot.
Dir. To -'1. BiIlir,... To oppoI8,nth wardI.
N. B. -Bi II often the radicIJ. otprimitlTe wurdII ; as.
Biallr,. to ~ Bitll.tJfICT'. to nmaiD.
MAXIMS AND FIGURl!S OF SPEECH
. a.e col,. "..,.; ill mcmD.} .
To remain with hand in hand. To Btand Idle.
lTII jiqre ROIl fa ",..;m.era. }
O
001_.. ~ '- One swallow doea not make ..
. ne JlUwar "oee no. In&&e a
Bummer.
~ . .
Tcaer l' --coi itmlj. } T ha ~ .. , h'd t 1:".
To hold the lOul by the teeth. 0 ve a .&ewe o. 0 ......
Gtmjiare ,. gole. } be .......
To inflate the cheeks. To PUIl_ up. .
&rifI!Jeni n.clle apaIlt. } To decline compliance by ..
To abrug the shoulders. ahrog of the ahoulden
.AMtulare ,. ""',.. } To submit pati-.tly to what;
To drop the shoulders. cannot be helped.
])ani tWla ICUrt nl pWe. }
To out; one'. own foot with the To bite one'. own nOl8 011'.
UAI.
MttIttJr gli occAi ~ atl tIIlO.} m I k th .............
To
,.- the ... 0 00 on one WI _lIIIUwOD.
p-.a 8)'811 on one. . .
Far IfJ7Ito t1i ~ . . } To ~ greatly.
To make 10 bIg a heart.
DigitIZed by Coogle
I &Ill told that he fa here.
He thinb 10 too.
Let this boot be o1f'ered to him.
Go r.nd .. him to-morrow.
Xi Ii dice cAe egli pi.
Egli pete_ IIftCAe cod.
168
CAe gli Ii pr_ftli lJIH'to libro.
.8.rulGte II tIetlerlo doIaIIfti.
XUX.
I am told that Mr. B. baa bought a little cottage the __
shore, in a vffrJ remote pIace;about two hundred miles from. the
city, and that he is determined to give up aocietyand the world.
Can I believe that a man 10 ambitious as he is could ever be
happy in IOlitude and retlrement'l I am told 10; but I believe
onl,. those things which J see with my own eyes. It is difticult
to believe that a man who baa always had an eye to the main
chance would, all at once, give up all biB schemes of life. I am
inclined to think that he baa been disappointed in lOme of biB
anticipations. I think so too; I give no credit to those who
prate of loving quiet, and of giving up bUBineea because they are
weary of ambition; for they almost always think otherwise in
their hear.; if they are reduced to a private and quiet life, it
is either through nBCeBBity or fully We see examples of this
fmSr1 day. Let the least. chance of greatneBB be offered to suoh
men, and they will funake the quiet they boast about 10 loudly,
and rush upon it as funoualy as ftre does on drJ wood. In a
free country fJVffrJ man is bound to ahow biB devotion and
attachment to the laws he baa adopted, and to the magistrates
he baa elacted. This i8 not to be required from a man who lives
under despotism. Life is a book of which man haa read only
one page, if he baa eeen only biB native country. A man must
have the good aenee to conform himself to the usages of the
people among whom he livea. In a republio men apeak much
and 8uft"er little; but under despotism they au6er much and can
speak but little. If you have nothing to do, I wish you would
go IIoIId visit our neighbor, becauBe he is in trouble. and if no
lends him a helping hand. he will undoubtedly be forced to-
beg. I cannot go now; I will try to go there nut week. if I
llava time. I am afraid that if you go there nut week you will
tnd him starved to death, and then. with all your generosity,
you would be of no UBe to him.
DigitIZed by Coogle
1M
I'OBKATION 011' WORDS.
LHBBO. LI.
FORMATION OF WORDS.
343. IT has been observed, from the preceding
lessons, that Italian words, with few exceptions, end
in a vowel, and that 0 is the letter characteristic of
the masculine, as a and u of the feminine, and i of
the pluraL
3"- The following remarks are here added, for the
correctness of the use of some of the terminations:
1. nouns are principally formed by add-
ing to the adjective the termination ttl or e..a j as,
Poeerla,/tilritA,/.'icita, tnm potIITO,/Gho,/elit:,.
BiG"eM .ea, dol".e.ea, grarule.ella, from 6itJ"co, dole" gra ...
2. The termination ione denotes an aCtive state,
and is generally added to words derived from verbs;
it corresponds to the English ticm j as,
BpetlUIoft" .".iriou, from. aped"", "ubi"",
3. The ento denotes a :passive state,
or moral affections; as,
J\lWrimmlo, (,"_"., eoraItftlo, IJHIwftIo.
4. The termination tore expresses thQ cawe i as,
CrI/Jtor., piUor'! leriUqr ..
5. The termination lura expresses the rid j as,
C,.,."'ra, pillvra, .crihr".
6. The termination ata is used for words express-
ing a collective number of persons, or a continua-
tion of a period of time; as,
.IlrflUJl/J. 6or/lflltJ. gioNUJllJ, fIOIIaItI.
DigitIZed by Coogle
VAXDIS AND FIGUBm OF SPEECH. 185
7. It is also used to express a blow, or a tlwwe
tDitAj as,
BlIIttmaIG, colklltJIG, pld4tG.
8. If the collective number of persons is homoge- ,
neous, the termination eria is used; as,
FaftllriG, arHgleria, eaNllerla.
9. This termination is also used to express local-
ity; as,
Libreria, octeria, 'P'%ilritl.
10. The termination ahile is chiefly used to form
adjectives derived from the verbs of the first conju-
gation; 88,
Canllllrilt, a!llll6ile, from eafllar't a .....
'MAXIMS .AND FIGURES OF SPEEOH.
To give a kick to the good of ~ up lOOlety aD .... .
Dare un ccrkio ai - tkl mcmdo. } To' d .. ..
the world. wor
TauIere Ia maIIO II gucrlcrmo. } To lend one a helping-hand.
To put.forth the hand to one.
7lmtknt la maIIO.
To stretch forth the hand.
}TObeg.
7'oa:anIuna eo .. COlI mGJIO. }
To touch thing with one'll To 1188 with one'll own eyes.
own hand.
Far Ia npptJ Ml ptmiIJre. } m mak b'aka th t ~ .
To
--'--"" th '-__ '- ... 0 e n WI ou D_W
............ e80upm e ........ et.
Romptn Ie UOt1/J ~ p a r a i ~ . } To prevent the aocompU'bment
To break the eggs m one II bas- of a project nearly completed.
keto .
Dar ptmfJ II eli _ Aa pis tlenti. }
To give bread to one who hall no To give UBilltance too late.
longer teeth.
DigitIZed by Coogle
You will ftnd thiII :room. coldlrtr.-
ble, 88 well 88 the lither.
It is very eaail7 done.
You mould do thill, 88 it is india-
pelllable and 1IIIe1bl to :you.
The di1Iioult)' is to do thiII well.
J7'oi tr __ quata dGua con.-
fortolJik come I' altra.
Pub far';' facili"ifAIIfMftl,.
J7'oi cIot7rutl farlo, ".",dovi in-
tliIpIraaa6ill III utilI.
fia fill farlo 61""
EXERCISE L.
Men are free under a government; they are slavea
under the rule of despotism; yet they are equal under 4eBpotism
88 well &8 in the republio. How can that be? It is very easily
explained; the reason is this: Under a republic men are every-
thing, under despotism thili are nothing. Have you studied.
your 18lllOn? Yea; I DOW it, eJ:C8pt the poetry. Is it wry
difficult to commit a few linea of French poetry to memory? It
would have been wry eaB1 for me to do 80, if I were inclined to
repeat things like a parrot ; I do not know why it is desirable to
bow things by heart. The teacher does not 8&y that it is india-
pmsab1e to know a pieee of poetry by heart, but he thinks that
those who have a good memory should exercise it, 88 it is profit-
able and 118et'ul to them.; and, beside, he does not like to bave
soholan in his 8Ohool who oanD,ot recite or declaim. without look-
ing at the book, which he thinks (to be) a sign of stupidity. But,
suppose that they are stupid, will they become wise in commit-
ting to memory half a page of V'ttgil or Milton? No, they Will
not become wise, but this is a sure indication of their iDt:a1 ..
lectual capacity. Allow me to tell you that IBm nohl your
opinion, because I know by experience that many m_ are int:a1-
llgent and have a great deal of 8eDI8, and yet they could not com-
mit. to memory two lines from Shabpeare, were they to try ten
years. Is it not true that every man sees the objects with the
color of the spectacles which he wears? Yes, it is true; and 80
every man should endeavor to wear a pair of good, clear, trans-
parent spectacles. The difficulty is to know where to buy them.
A man has no greater enemy than himself, because all the evil
and excess of trouble he experienoes proceed from nothing but
his own IIhOrHightedneBII.
DigitIZed by Coogle
J
VAXTXS AND Jl'IGt1BBS OF SPEECH. 167
LESSON LII.
MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH.
Mtuticare le parole. }
To masticate the words. To think before you speak.
Cono&c:ere il ptm.e dai 1IJIri. }
To know bread from a stone. To know what's what.
Awn il cerwlltI fIIIlle calcogruJ. }
To have the brain in the heels. To be empty-headed.
Meltere cervelIo.
To put brain.
} To become wise.
Aver ltJ tuttJ tlv.rw.
To have a hard bead.
} To be thiok-headed.
Anlar colla taIiJ 71111 'fICCO. }
To go with the head in the bag. To rush into anything blindly.
8tIpet'e u7&ti t:DMI IJ mente. }' .
To know a thing by mind. To know a thiDg by heart.
To go with one's brow uncov- To har. va nothiDg to be ashamed
An4tzre 'IJ fro7lte ICOperta.} .
em.', o .
FtJr ff'OfUe IJ qtUJlcu7lO. }
To make ~ to one. To oppose anyone.
LavortJrll IJIl occAi cAitui .
To work with one's ~ shut. } To work blindly.
Gvsrdaie colltJ cou dell' oAio. } .
To look with the tan of the eye. To Cut sheep's eyes.
1tJ galliJUJ. A bird ill the ~ d is worth
E meglio ogg; l'uooo cAe domcmi I
Better an egg to-day ,han the two in the bush.
. chicken to-morrow.
TDCCtIf' IlllApf'llIo lteI.o taID. }
To play alwaya upon the IllUDe To harp on the same nring.
note.
DigitIZed by Coogle
188
SYlITONYIIS.
SYNONnfS.
SBRV ANT, SERvrroRE, SERVO.
&nntore ill the man who ill actually, and of hill own will, in
the service of another man.
&roo ill the man in bondage.
In a despotic government all men &fa IInli, but many of the
""" have 1ef'Ditori.
In the United States of America, we find in the North only
1IJf'fJitori; 'in ttle South, IIrffitori and """.
At the end of a letter we would write, Your aervant, f1Oltro
1eI'I16, 88 a mere matter of etiquette; but in lI80ying 'tJ(),tro "",;..
tore we should 8Xpre118 more devotion and a senile attachment.
DEVOTION, DEVOZIONE, DIVOZIONE.
Devozione ill the _ ~ t a t e of being. dedicated to a particaIar
purpoee.
DifHJzione ill the yielding of the heart and aft'eotion, with rw-
erenoe and piety, to the Supreme Being.
We show 4evozione when we sacri1ice our happin_ for the
welfil.re of our fellow-man.
We show ditJozione when we perform an the duties and
iDjunctions of our religion.
We lI80y that a man ill tlifJoto tli DiD, and tletJOto alla palri".
I do Dot know the Dl&llDer in
which this book Is printed.
My friend is permitted to go out
whenever he likes.
They part, but they will meet
again.
It;you permit 10 much mODey to
be gll'8ll to him, I do not know
what to think (about it).
10 ,",R to COllIe qfHIIo IllJro l
.tGrn.pato.
8i perfMtte til rn.w Grn.lcO di UlCire
quGftdo flUOle.
8i 'epG,.GRO, f/I.G Ii URi,.GftRO eli
ftUOflO.
8e fIOi p',.rn.eUde cAe, gli Ii dl4
tGrato ",",,.0, W fIOft to core
debbG peRlG,. ...
DigitIZed by Coogle
1 ~
EXEROISE LI.
Have you ever heard of the Count of Carmagnola? No; but
I. should like to hear IIOmething about him. Well, he was
one of the great captains who llouriahed at the time of the Ital-
ian republics. Being in the service of Venice, whoee dominions
he had largely extended through his bravery and military Bkill,
the patricians, jealous of his popularity, and fearing that it
might prove injurious to the liberUeII of the oountry, oondemned
him to death. .A1eaaandro Manzoni, the celebrated novelist,
generally known in the literary world by his historical romance
"I Promuri Spori," has written a tragedy on the subject. Will
you be 110 kind 88 to make me acquainted with the manner in
which this tragedy is oonduoted? I would do it with pleaanre,
but I prefer to make you translate lOme parts of the tragedy,
and invite you to read the original by yo1U'8elf'. I am very
much obliged to you. I wish to begin with Manzoni, because he
is a writer. whoee main object, in all his productions, is to develop
the beat part or human nature. and because he inapirell every
one with pure and noble sentiments of morality and religion.
The following piece, which you are goiug to translate, is the lut
scene of the tragedy, in which the oount, a few momenta beCore
his execution, is permitted to see his wife and daughter, and part
from them to meet again in a better world. He Bpeab thus:
"0, unhappy oneil! Heaven knOWB that these lut moments
are terrible to me only for your aakea! I am . aooustomed to
oontemplate death, and to await it calmly. .Alu! fOr you ouly
have I need of oourage now; and you, you will not take it from
me; is it not 110 ? When God permits miBCortune to fiJI on the
head of the good man, He giVell with it the oourage to bear it
patiently. Let, then, your oourage now be equal to our misCor-
tune. Even this lut embrace is a gift from Heaven. Let us
rejoice Cor these lut momenta, which are aacred. It is true that
the patricians have done UB great wrong, but among the evilB
there is a great joy - the joy of pardoniug the ofl'enCell. .. I must
Btop here, because I know that you have many other things to
do, and I do not like to fatigue you too much with a long
exercise; I will contiuue in my next leem.. I am mUClh
obliged to you.
DigitIZed by Coogle
1'10 .AXIV8 AIm I'IGt1B111 OJ' SPEEOJL
LB880. LIlI.
MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH.
Tenere gutIlctmo in toM.
To keep one in tone.
} To keep one to his duty.
Vokr, lJalltJre e cm&tare.
fo wish to dance and Bing.
TtIll/mIIIiJ tIJlWltIttJ.
}
To $r;y to row way and look
another.
}
To mob a qW!lltion BUell u
To BUoh a tune BUch a dance. answer.
Not to pc-. enough to make Not to to buyaaU
N"'''''''ftlf'ttlllltlNuncieco.} .
bliDd IlIAD 1IiD8. fur one s pomdge.
ba capo tli ""did mai. '
At the head or twelve months. } At the end of mcmthB.
DtIf'IJ il capo tl'tmM. }
To give the head or the year. To wish a happy new r-r.
FtIf' 117111 cola .. capo. }-
To make a thing hom head. To begin again.
come pane e eaeio. }
To be like bread and cheell8. To be inaep&rable mends.
Tmere lc matolc. }
To hold the poktick. To rUle the roost.
Non euer pane pei denti di qual- }
CUM. To be out of one's :reach.
Not to be bread for one's teeth. .
La farina del tliavolo va tutta in I
cnuca.
The llour of the devil all goes m-gotten gains bring no good.
to bran. .
CaIcare il cacio lUi macc:l&eroni. }
To have falling on the To be unupected1y1Ortunafle.
_
DigitIZed by Coogle
BYNONYllB. 1'l1-
SYNONYMS.
LABOR, FATICA, TRA VAGUO.
FatictJ lIi the eB:69t or l4voro. 'It is sometimes used in the
meaning or lavoro and opera, to express the difticulty under which
we labored to accomplish the l4voro or opera.
We may have lavoro without fatica. bnt with fa.ticS there is
always aI!IIOCis.ted la.txwo
7rtJuaglio is neither fatica, nor opera, nor l4voro, but only a
painful 88IlII&tion. It has been used by some or the claMics fbr
kworo or fa.tica.. to express hard and exhausting labor.
PROUD, BUPERBO. HAUGHTY. A:I.TIERO.
These two words have in Italian a contrary meaning to that
which they convey in English.
Altiero comes !rom AigA, elerHzted. and is a.pplied to a maD who
IICOftI8 everything mean and baae.
~ is .pplied to a man who has a general contempt t.
every'person or thing.
A man mperbo considers himself' auperior to other men. and
mingles'with them only to keep them in aubmisaion.
A man a.ltiero seta himself' apart !rom the vulgar, and &aI9-
claWs oply with those who can sympathize with him.
We praise a woman when We call her a.ltiera.
We blame a. woman when we call her mperlJa.
Assist me. and let me not be de-
prived or ;your valuable help.
I see him writing in the other
mnall room.
Trust in me!
Are ;you working for me f
How ooald I have IIlept, had I
not praJed before m;y guard-
.. up! to eend to me neat
Ileep! -
Alriltefemi, , !lOll tni laeilltc
priflO del _It'o tuJllfIOl, aivlo.
I.o ",do ,triwr, lIel" aUra pic-
cola """IIa..
AMri jidsciII ill_I
state IIIf1OTantlo per _ .,
Coru allTA io potuto dtwmire It
!lOll .""" pri_ pregat.o iZ
-1If4I/elD CIIIIotle tli .........
UII dolce 1011110 I
DigitIZed by Coogle
1'r2
EXERCISE LII.
Did you not promise me to continue to-day the piece which
we commenced in our lad lealOn? Yes, I did (promise it). It;
D 10 interesting and 10 aft'ecting, that I long to hear the end of it.
I am ready to comply with your wish, but I have forgotten where
we left 011'. It 'W88 where the count says, " The joy of pardoning
the oft'enOOll." 0, y., I remember; let us continue. "If death
were invented by man, it would be detestable and inBupportable;
but death com. from Heaven, and Heaven accompanies it with
such conBOlation 88 no man can give or take - the comfort that
there D a reward for the just. Listen to my last words!
I bow (that) they fall bitterly on your hearts, but they will
perhaps one day alleviate your grief. You, my wife, live, and
conquer your miBCortune; live, and let not this unhappy orphan
be deprived of both father and mother. Fly from Venice, and
I
t
~
,
reconduct your daughter to your relatives. She is of their ,
own blood, and you, you younelf were once too dear to them.
If the love which they bore you 'W8!' in part lesiiened when you
became the wife of their enemy, it will b6 revived, now that you r
go to them unhappy and without him, the object of their impla-
cable hatred, who in a few momenta will cease to emt. And
thou, my daughter, Wh088 spirit came 10 many tim. to cheer I'
mylOul in the roaring of battl8ll, why art thOu now. casting
down thy head like a tender Hower? 0, the thrfIIJtening storm
D raging, thou trem.bl8llt, and thy heart seems ready to break I
with the intensity of ang-Db! I feel thy warm tears falling
abundantly over me, yet I cannot wipe them away! Mathelda, I
my child, art thou appealing to me for help ? Alas! thy father
. can do nothing for thee ; but there D a Father for the forsaken ;
thou boweBt it; trust in Him, and live. He has certainly des-
tined thee for tranquil, if not happy days. How could' He have
poured out all this overwhelming torrent' of anguDh in . the
morning of thy life, had He not preserved all his mercy for thy
remaining Ye&rll? Live and conBOle thy mother. 0, that she
might one day make thee the happy wife of a worthy husband."
Now that you have tranBlated theee few lin. in plain pr088, I
would direot you to read the l!I&D1e piece in the original. Yoa
will1lnd it on page 227.
DigitIZed by Coogle
H.aL.BB Allli PIGUL8 F PLCR. _7:
E S Ii L V
MAXIMS AND FIGURE::; OE
RUpettare il cane per amore rkl )
pa..rone.
h e l!JI( th do fo Love me, love my dog.
the love of the master
.lADat' la tata aU' tJftno. ) To try to make a Bu.I: pu!llb out
'W ih e ad f e 8f r f !()'\ Be'.
er ril' in !po } .
To have in the To be whimsical.
hea .
J .. ilLi zz el QI e ca
mft ke ht the dog'Blegs t To waab a negro white
..!/lUZzare 9li ouhi. )
o s1..rp..... t ey. ; T- 10- sJ- P at nr'rln-
em r :hi n.-ICC IJ<-I
un" ,
To plant eY88 m tae mce of I T
colo b dl
on j
arl e a lUI' 0 'r;Ai
To apeak at four 8Y88. i To Bp.x..k t&- -te .
.umttJno aogll ociha lontanu da.
1
.
cu
Far fwo.nm t.lIe e 88 Jar from the t Out of Bignt, out of mmd.
heart. J
i-ser 'oJi ri d n
he ig 8y of ne.
To be the right-hand man.
'\ Perdw d' occkio qualcu.no.
To 101M! from the eye.
J'T 101 si to on
bo ..... H . IU 01. ent 111 ca [N .iliL 0 ta.' .d .. it1 . a..
fl en rB m m uth r fro
p. .,. colla morle in bocca. ,
To bewitndea.th in the mouth.
J

T
be t t P mt fd th
Ilglt 1 oy :n... 'e, _
SYlIOlTYlIS.
SYNONnfS.
OOJD'08l'rION, COJIPONUlBNTO, COJIP08IZIONB.
Compo1IimeJato ill a production of the mind.
CompoNione ill a mixture of material 81lbstancea.
~ e poet makes rmnponimtmti, the apothecary compo;iJon;.
Using thees words figuratively, we 88.y eompo,izione when
we speak of a productioa &heady finished, and rmnponimento
when not yet done.
We made a good compolizione yesterday, and we hope to
make a. better rmnponimmto to-morrow:
GRATITUDE, GlU.TITUDINE, RICON08CENZA.
Gratitudine ill a noble and generous B8D.timent of the BOUl.
RiconollGefJZ(J ill a duty.
We show rico7W'cenza for 8. benefit by repaying it doubly,
and then we ma.y forget it.
We show our gratitudine by .. conBtant and, sincere attach-
ment to the penon.. who baa benefited us.
The man who feela rictmtnCe7WJ, and ill unable to indemnify
his benefactor, is always in a state of torment.
The man who feela gratitudine cherishes always the hope of
seeing his benefactor happy and prosperous; and, if unable to
contribute to i ~ , he shows hill sincere wish by a word, a Bigh, or
a tear.
I am. obliged to go away.
I am. V8r1 fIOrl7 to hear you
oomplaia of 10V friead 10 bit-
terly.
My friend is to be fOund at the
llbral'T'
You have my belt wisbIl&
Without further delay. ,
They came fonrard. from either
Bide.
80ft cOltrItto di partir
'.illi dilpiace moltiali_ di untir.
cAe tIOi tIi dolete del vom-o lltAico
II IIlIIlIrlllll.nte.
Xw /rtJtello pv'b 'r_rli IIlIII
librerilJ.
)7', 10 deridero ,. cuor ..
8,n:&11 piil dau"gGr",i.
Eali Ii 111I1I/JZllroflO tlIJU' tlfIII
dIIll' IIltrll pari
DigitIZed by Coogle
EDDlOlBll .
EXERCISE LID.
Where could I get Mamoni'. works? I cannot tell you ; bilt,
if you are desirous to obtain them, I am aure that you Will suC)-
ceed in finding them. I must have his works, at any rate, even
were I obliged to to Europe. I am very glad to hear, you
say 80 ; and, &8 I 888 you 80 well diBpoBed to become acquainted
with this great Italian writer, I will now give you a few more
apecimena. I am extremely obliged to you. I will try to make
you tranalate into pl'088 a chorus which is to befeund in the
same tragedy of "n Conre di Carmognola." It i.!I too long for
one exercise, but Do not be alarmed becauae I say that it
is too long; I will divide it into three I am not
alarmed, air; but I have but little time for my Italian lesson,
and I wish to make my tranBlation thoroughly, and without
miBtakea, if poBBible. You have my beat wishes, and I begin
without further delay: "The 80und of a trumpet ia heard from
the right. Another trumpet IUI8W8l'8 from the left. The hlcls
trodden oy armed men reecho from either Bide. Here a bd.Dner
is aeen advancing, and there another unfolded banner. Behold
an army, proceeding in formidable array; and behold another,
which is steadily advancing to meet the foe. .Al!eady the
ground which aeparated them has disappeared; they are &.ce to
1J,oe, they fight sword in hand, they thrust them in each other ..
breut; though the blood Aows fioeely from .the already gaping
wounds, yet they redouble their blows with unrelenting ibry.
Who are theBe warriors? In which of the two armieB are to be
fonnd the strangers who dared to come to subdue this beautiful
land, and on which Bide are the ItalianB who have swom to save
their country or die? .AlaB! they allllpeak the same language,
the common lineage is imprinted on the brow of each; they were
all bom in this land, which they are nowataining with their
blood; this beautiful land, which Datura hu 88t apart, and ear-
rounded with the Alp!! and the ... " You will hear the con-
tinuation of this chorua in the next le8llOn. I am very much
obliged to you, air; becauae, although thiII exercise is extremely
I cannot give more time to it, being obliged to
get ready for a ball. Go and enjoy youraelf.
DigitIZed by Coogle
1'18 'nvs AlID J'JCJ11BI8 OJ' SPUCH.
LE880. LV.
MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF. SPEECH.
EuIr l4rgo di itHm.
To be with a large mouth.
} To be a great taIbr.
FtIwlltJn "loa 1tmIfI. } 1) _1... with
1)0 spea.k with a mouth half 0 ur-
ti
mute cau on.
Avere il CU/Jf'C m 6occa. }
1)0 have the heart In the mouth. To be candid.
Ltuci4r 1tJ lingua II QIItI. } To remain silent, 01' unoommu
To leave the tongue at home. nicative.
1A ingu """. __ il tl4Jat4
tluole. .1 One is apt to talk of what in
The tongue strikes wheze the . tereats him the JIIOIt.
tooth aches.
Rimmttn " dati tut:iWti.
To be left with dry teeth.
F_m.onNo.
To make a good face.
fhtt. IUl fIiH UM co ...
To throw a thing in the face.
Romperli il collo.
To break one's neck.
&rivere con 6tum incl&ioltro.
To write in good ink.
}
To be disappointed in one'.
expectations.
}
To be pleased with something ;
. to welcome.
} To throw a thing in one'. teeth.
} To be seriously injured.
} To write in strong terms.
Non mi tlO. il auwe di }
Not to me gives the heart to Not to dare to ..
F. cuore. }
To make heart. To give courage.
Una C06S dtz ItrapptJJ"e il cuore. } A thing which overwhelms u
A. thing to match the heart. with grief.
DigitIZed by Coogle
l
,
BD'O!TfllB.
SYNONYMS.
LBAF, FRONDA, FOGLIA.
Foglie are the leavtl8 of a plant without branchtl8.
lirontk are the leavtl8 of a tree, or a shrub.
We pluck a. ff'rnula from an oak-tree. /
We pluck a foglill from lettuce.
177
The poets are crowned with ff'ontk, and not foglie, of laurel.
IF We may .. y fogl" or f"Ot/Ile of a tree; but we must a.lwa.1I
-'1 uu foglia, and never u,", ff'ontla, of leUuce.
PURITY, PURlTA. PUREZZA.
Moral and abstract objects have punta.
Physical and natural objecta have puf'e%Z(l.
The wine, water, and gold, have pure:eza. and not punta.
The mind, thought, and IoIIpirationa, have pwita, and not
~ .
TImBO&, TERRORE, SPA VENTO.
Ten-ore is the superlative of timore.
~ l I I l m t o is the superlative of ptJUf'a.
Temwe is accompanied with grief.
8pavmto is a.ccompanied with wonder.
A great calamity CIoWMl8 tetTON.
An imminent d&nger CIoUlltl8 8p4W7&to.
This is not m:r property. Quato nOft mi appllrtUn,.
My book is oovered with duat.
I .. ved myaeltbylight.
They laid down their arms.
My boob are leIaened in num-
ber.
n miD lib,.o i eoperlo di 1'01_,.,.
.Mi ,al"ai colla fuga.
E,Ilino e"",.o I. a,.mi.
I mid lib,.i IOno ,eemati di ...
me,.o.
DigitIZed by Coogle
178
EXERCISB LIV.
When did Manzoni live? Mamoni waa born in the yitar
1784, and he is Btill living. I hope so, at leut; but let us not
10le any time, but continue our chorus, because I remember
very well where we left oft" 1aat time. I am ready. "But who
of them waa the first to unaheathe the ~ e g i o u s sword, and
plunge it into his brother's breast? What is the exciting cause
of that bittAlr strife? AlaII, they know not (it) !they are come
here without animosity, to infliot death OJ! to die; they are BOld
to leaders, and they fight without knowing why. 0, mWor-
tune ! But have these foolish warriors no mothers, no wives?
Why do they not go to snatch their husbands and IlOIl8 from
that ignoble contest? Why do not the old men, filled with the
peaosful thoughts of the grave, endeavor to appease that mad-
dening crowd with kind and softening words? Alas! they are
unmoved, and speak of their brothers slain, and their cities
burned, with that inditrerence with which the husbandman, Bit-
ting at the door of his cottage, points to a whirlwind which is
devastating fields tly,t are not his property; the children are
attentively listening to their mothers, who speak to them of
hatred and revenge; the women are ms.kiDg a show - of the
neokls.oes and girdles whioh their husbands and lovers have
taken from the bereaved women of -their conquered brothers.
The fleld is already covered with dead warriorll; the noise
inareues, the fury redoubles. One of the armies, lessened in
number, is obliged to retreat, and the soldiers, in despair,
endeavor to save their lives by flight, and disband; but, whilst
the cavalry pursues them, and they are spread over the vast
plain like the grain when thrown into the air by the winnowing-
tan, a troop of armed men attack the fugitiv811 in front; they are
obliged to lay down their arms amidst the shouts of the victorll,
whioh silence the laments of the dying warriOrll. A courier is
despatched in great haste. AS he ps.sB8II through the villages;
all hasten to ask for the good -news. Have you forgotten whence
he com8ll? Can you ever expect good news? Hear the vfie
news he brings: "Brothers lmve slain their brothers!" I think
that this _ is enough for to-day, and so I stop here, to fln.ish this
lid recital in our next lesion.
DigitIZed by Coogle
VAxnrs AND I'IGUBES OF SPEECH. 179
..
LESSON LVI.
)fAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH.
VolttJre Ie Ipalle. } '.Il thdra to tr to
To tum the shoulders. 0 Wl :w, re eli
6ptIlle. To forget; not to care for
Buttarli un off"" dietro Ie }
To thro:w a thing behind one's thing.
moulders.
Fer, IpQlltI II gualcrmo. }
To lQake sh.oulder for one. To back one; to uaiat one.
Parlar ,otto wee.
}TO :whisper.
To Bpea.k under voice.
Mi t:IJIltmo Ie braccia.
)4y arms fall to me
} I am discouraged.
.MiIurGr tutto collo IteIIO 6rtM:t:io. }
To measure everything :with the Not to allo:w aDY diatinotion.
aamearm.
PorlIIre tIM in palmtI di mClllO. } m h ld' 'd
..... e' th _1... f th .. 0 0 one m great COIW era-
.l.uflliR1on m e _ 0 e ti
hand. on. .
Euere "" _0 alia _0. }
To be a man at the hand. To be kind and aft'able.
Dar l' tdiima mtmO ad "" 1tJ.}
"oro. To put on the finishing touch.
To give the ~ hand to a :work ..
Avers tIM co,a fra ltJ ~ . }
To have a thing among the To have a thing handy.
hands.
Fare UM COItJ a mtm ,al"a.
~ o do a thing at sure hand.
Uta _go fuor di _M.
A PIi.oe out of hand.

} To do a ~ :without danger.
} A remote, solitary place.
DigitIZed by Coogle
180 SYNONYIIS.
SYNONYMS.
LIB, MENZOGNA, BUGI.A.
Meuog7JII is an error. BugifJ is a crime.
If we make believe a thing in jest and for a pastime, the lie
is meuogM, and not bugifJ.
If we take advantage from ."hat we make believe, the lie ill
bugia, and not mmzogna.
We .y, generaJly, una piccolt.l_gna and 1UIfJ grtJ7& bugiG.
The untruth B8iII8rted to benefit others at the injury of OV-
"ves is _gna, and not bugia.
Tallo has ennobled- this word by calling it magna.niJnoua.
" .M'tIg7Itmima tlllm.Zogna! " he uclaims, when Sofronia, in order
to .va.all the Christiana from the wrath of the ldngof the
Turb, makes him. believe that ahe had taken and burned the
image of the Virgin.
LIGHT, ~ U J C E , LUCE
.LvDe is the oaUIl8. Lume is the effect.
The moon aen.ds down lume, and not
The SUD aen.ds down ., and not lume.
Lume is generaJly used for thoee bodies whioh throw light on
1OD18thing, moh &8 a qa.ndle, a lantern.
Lvt;e is generaJly used for luminous and ahining objects, moo
&8 a star, a fire.lly.
WORK, OPERA., LA VOBO.
Opera is the production of the mind.
LmJoro is applied to anything acoompliahed by the hand.
The oreation of the world is the opera of God.
The coat I wear is lmxJro of my tailor.
TO GO OUT, USCIRE, BOBTIRE.
UlCire is used to 8Xprelll the act of departing frOm any place.
&rlire, in the J!eaning of going out, is limited to military
purpotI8I. and only used to upra!II the mdden rushing out of a
body of troops from a fortified plaoe to attack the besiegers.
EXAKPLES AlID BXEBCISE. 181
_ cleICacled the m01Ultain in
great bute, ad lied.
What would you pin in 10 dot-
bag youneltf
This is the reIIOD. why I am here.
BC,"TO dallG II&OfIItJgu di gr""
JTdtG, j'vggiTOf&O.
elM cae. "."" f/IMIIltIguT. ttI-
jliggelMlotJi IIInto 1
Beco pcrcM _ gut
EXERCISE LV.
" The temple already reechoes with hymns and lOngs; homi-
cidal hearts are ofreriDg thaDbgivings which Heaven can
abhor. Meanwhile, the Btranger appears tlom the II11JIIJDit of
the Alps, IIIIeI the wamOl'll a1aiD, and counts them with cruel
joy. BaateD, ltaJ.iaDs! away with feutinga! return. to your
ban.nel'll, aaaemble tOgether, the stranger is coming! he is near!
Victol'll, you are DOW feeble and few, and thiB is the reaIIOD why
he deBC8Du the Alps, and challengea you in tl;l0B8 same ielda
in which you, brothel'll, have Blain your brothel'll. 0, UDhappy
Italy! mtalland, which _eth too amall for thy children, who
are never united and in accord, bow now to the stranger; it is
DOW that the judgment of Divine Justice begiDB over thee; an
enemy whom thou haat DOt provoked mult DOW Bit at thy table,
eat thy bread, q.nd rule over thee. He, alIO, the stranger, is
fooliBh in 10 much rejoicing. HaB a nation ever enjoyed happi-
neBB fur having inflicted wrong and outrap on other natioDB?
Sul'ering iB not reIItl"ed for the vanquUhed alone; the momentary
joy of the impious is BOGner or later changed into woe. If
Divine Justice dOClll not alwayBBtrike the 0ppreBlOr whilBt in the
height of his pride, it marks him, watch. and waits ; it reach.
him, at laBt, at the point of death. The image of God is reflected
alike on the brow of every DIaD; in every part of the globe
where we may are all brothel'll, all children of the eame
redemption, all bQund with the !I8oDl8 compact of mutual love.
CurBed be the man who diaregardB thiB compact; CUl'IIed be he who
takes advantase of thll feeble ill IOrroW IPld miBfurtune; CUl'IIed
be he wpo a&licta the 101\1 Qfman, which is an immottalspirit."
You can now read the original, which you will ftnd at the end
of the book, and if you have a good memory I would advise you
to learn it by heart.
DigitIZed by
18! . VAXD18 Al1D PJOOBJIB OP BPDCH.
LliBBOlf XVII .
MAXIMS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH.
No" tItI mai CGnIe IeJI%4 OUO. }
There '. no leah without bonl!ll. Every 1'018 hal It. thom.
Sal_ la pel'. } To eacape by the akin of ona'.
To lava tha akin. teeth.
Ne IIa la tlita. }
It goes life for it. Life is at .tHe.
tlitG. } ,
To gain one'. life. To get one. livmg.
Dtlrli .u. blum tImpo. }
To give to one'. aelt' life and To enjoy one'a aelt.
good time.
n jiM eoroJ&/J l' tlpfrG. } All 'a well that ends well.
The end crGWDI the work.
TOCCtIJ'I il cielO col dito. }
To touch heaven with the fIn- To be at the height of fortune
gar.
RUolfJere,u due piedi. }
To on two feet. To resolve on the spot, at once.
To have foot in two stir- To have two atrings to one'.
Awre il piede iJ& due l16J/e. }
np. bow._
Nor& ,.,.. guM ,.. _riM .
iJ& wno 1tiwJle. l Not to know enongh to go iD
Not to know how many feet go when it mini.
ina boot.
Mettwa la trJ/I7IO cal ttlOre. } To appeal to colllCienee Cor jue-
To put one'a hand on his beart. tice. .
LtucitJt' tiel pew in una coia.
To 1018 some hair in a thing .

} To coat dear.
DigitIZed by Coogle
SYNONYJIS AND ELUIPLES. 183
SYNONYMS.
NEW, NUOVO, NOVELLO.
NflP'Jo hae refereRce to UI!8, or to the time in which an object

NotHJlIo hae l.Qforence to age, or to the time in which an object
ill made.
We put on a new coat un abito 1I1IOtIO, though it waa made
ten years ago.
P'" It newly made. we call it alBo ahifo nuotlO. because we expreaa
the time ji1 which it is ued. and not the time in which it!,8I1l made.
We lI&y un J&OVIllo Dmico,l'alIxJ nouelltJ, becaul!8we have refer-
ence only to time.
SlIA.JO, ONT.A, VERGOGN.A.
Onta ill an injury. accompanied with contempt.
Vergo!J'fUJ ill a demonstration or modest ingenuousness.
We are ready to revenge, if we feel oma.
We are ready to reform, if we feeltJergo!J'fUJ.
To tum a thing into ridicule.
To meet with great au_.
It is oustolll&l')' here to sing after
brealdBst.
I have a great desire 1br money.
They ran with lightning speed.
MeUM'. una CO.II in ridieolo.
.8..,.. grlln ncc,ao.
E qui coawme di cantan dopo
aver faUo colll2:ion ..
Ho gran duitUrio di deAMO.
Carrano calif!. rapidita dtl6aleno.
EXERCISE LVI.
Count Vittorio Alfteriwas hom at Asti, in Piedmont, in the
year l749.. Slow in hill progress, he had arrived at the age of
twenty-Cour without knowing even the elements or hill native
tongue. The classical heroism or the Greeks and Romans
inspired him with a taate ror poetry and poetical composition.
After lOme imperfect attempts, he wrote a tragedy, Cleopatra.
DigitIZed by Coogle
,
186
_ ........ to it .liWe piece lite. &.rca, in which he __ y-
ond to &una m. own t.ragedy into ridioale. Bat ilia pi_ ~
with gnU _, Uld he appJiecl himae1f to caltivate m. drr.-
IDIotic tute, Uld in the 001l1li8 of six yan produced iwaD.tJ
tngedieI, which mJed ilia void of the uatioDallitentme. li:Ds-
land has a 8babpean, PJance a Bacine, Spain a Ca.lderoD, Italy
loll .Alleri. The power of m. Vagediea reeulta chie8y from the
8I1argetio ainceriiJ of the poet, who has embodied his own pu-
lion a.ncl feeling in m. writings, ol"ering aimpliciiJ in the plot.
finlthtblnell in the cha.ra.cterI, IoIld vehemence, e1ega.nce, and
harmODY, in the oompreheuive dictioD. The following extract
is taken from the tragedy Orate, in which Pyladea relates the
nppoeed death of m. friend: "Ii 1fa8 C1I8toma.ry in Crete to
renew games and aacrificea to Jupiter flVtq fifth year. OreItea,
IoIlimated by a desire for Came, and oompelled by m. 'reat1eaa
'rigor, went to that shore with m. iDleparable friend, Pyladea.
There,longiDg for hODor and pry, he entered the wide a.reD& in
alight car, to obtain the Doble palm for rapid 8teeda; and there,
too intent for victory, he 10lt m. life. Too fierce, heedl_, and
impatient, DOW, with a threatening voice, he preaaed forward m.
ill-trained oounars, and DOW, with a whip 8tained with blood,
lashed them eo vigol'OU8ly that they lew beyond the aEgned
limit, more mettlesome 88 they were more swift. .Already rega.rd-
1_ of the bridle, and the criea with which he seeks in va.in to
quiet them, they emit fire from their Doatrila; their aha.ggr
maneI float in the air, and, wrapped in a thielt cloud of d11lt,
they run at their own will over that YUt plain with a lightning
speed. The tortuous whirlinga of the chariot bring flVerywhere
fright, terror, diacomfitme, and death, until, the fervid axle
8triking with violent shock against a marble 0011llQD., Orestes,
being overtluowD., fell, and, dragged by the reina, he stained the
ground with m. blood. Pyladea ran to m. help, but in vain !
Orestes breathed m. lut sigh in his 8.1'J118." JJfieri died in .
J'lorence, in the 1fIIZ 1803, and W8I burilld in the church of
Santa Croce, where a splendid mODument is to be 1188D, at
the aide of Machiavelli, Michelangelo, and <Wileq. His worD
are printed in twenty-two volumes, quarto. (See the original
of the above utract, page 232.)
DigitIZed by Coogle
K.4XIVS AND FIotJBES OF SPDCH. 186
LliBBOll LVIII.
VAXTVS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH.
Cerctwe il pelo 'MIl' uovo. } To be ~ v e l y partiOl1lar in
To seek for hair on an egg. everything.
NOA IIIt'r.tn WI pelo fill WID. }
Not to twist ODe hair of one. Not to touch a hair of the lad.
Nio. Vice may change ita garb, but
n lupo ctmgitJ il pelo mtI ntm ill
The wolf changea his hair, but remaiDa the aame.
not his vice.
Chi tlorme ntm prenu puci. }The aleeping fox catch. DO
He who aleeps takes no fish. poultry.
NOA entrtJre in un qJfare. } Not to have anything to do
Not to enter into an afJiI.ir. with an all'air
.M.mtnt l' eriG c:rat:e ;; ~ 18} ,,'_1... ha hi! th _ ... ...
oIWULe J'W e e IUD ....... .
~ 7 ' thehorle While the docton dispute the
eli
e e grUB groWl patient di ..

&ar fruuJ.
To be fresh.
&ar ptmItI per ptmItI.
To ltay point for point.
8ltIr ltn&tao.
To ltay fino.
} To be alwa,. at variance.
} To dwell a&r off.
A_ 14 tulll tI1trDw. }
To have the head somewhere To thiak of other WDgs.
e1Ie.
F ... ilunto. }
To mate the saint. To play the saint.
DIIr I'tIMllD.
To give the ring.
9
DigitIZed by Coogle
188 snrOllDlB .oJ) UAlIPL18.
SYNONDfS.-
OlUJ'l'!', ABTlJT(), FlJRBo.
.bIvIo II laid of a man who aeeb to obtain aD object without;
detection.
}\rio II laid of man who aeeb to obtain aD object bJ
deceiving others.
The man tIIIuto is often a man of honor. The man firio ill
neYer 10.
The gtDeroaIIman may reproach the ,"",,0 Cor hia want of
~ ; but the generoQlman and the alvto both agree in
ezpoaiDg and diIcarcliDg the fut6o.
JrIBST, PRIMO, PRIMIERO.
PrimD II merely aD ordinal number, which II u:pected to be
followed by aecmatl,l1inI.
Primiero is a. man elevated a.bove the othen.
In aD army the interior may become the flnt, il primiero.
In a play in which we are not well entarta.ined, we may1ea.va
.t the fint act, III primo tIIttI.
The pnsident of a Iep'lblic is the firR of the nation, il pri-
IIIiero tlelltJ ncuiotae; bu.t not the flnt president, il primo prui-
dat,.
The liAlw1'elDlhll 01 my beloved
IOJI.
To trample unda- IIoi the iDn1t-
IDcbuner.
LalpOgliIJ aani.., del tAio diletID
ftglio. -
Ctdpatare l lHIn4ierIJ innlllJ-
trice.
EXERCISE LVll.
Torquato Tuao WB8 bom in Sorrento, near Nl.lplea, in the
year 1544. J'arly apPlying himself to the study of his prede-
OBOrI, Dante and Petiarch, and of the lAtin and Greek clu-
_, hia mind IIOOJl became pzoductive. At the age of 88T8Dteea
h. wrote hia Aminta, pastoral play, full of grace, BimpliOJ."ty,
DigitIZed by Coogle
EXEiwmE. 187
and tandeme. or apreBon, which aroused the attention and
admiration or all the literati or his age, and which alone would
ave made his known and respected in the Republic or
Letters. But the young poet was not satisfied with his SUCOfll!ll.
Endowed with a productive mind, and able to expl'tlllll his crea-
tions in a IODOrous, eatIJ; and pathetic language, he had only
need or a subject in which he could embody the intensity or his
t'eelinga. the purity or his heart, and the religioUBlIeIltiment which
pervaded his mind and thoughtB. He consequently produced
his masterly poem, JertIIIIlem Deliwretl, wmch immortalilled his
DaDle, and added much lustre to the italian literature. And was
there, indeed, any subject which could dord a wider 6elcl to
a Christian poet with a mbicl like his, a (arvid imag-
ination' The SavioUr or the world dies fur redemption or
JDaDkind ; the land where the Divine word had. cllil"uIed 80 many
muima or morality and religion, the B&Cred spot which had been
sprinkled with his holy blood, was now profimed by the barbar-
ous Moslem. It was not permitted -to the (ollowers or their
Master to visit the dread enclosure whers his liCele. remains
were kept; to fortify themaeIves in the new fiUth by the Bight or
those places which bear witn_ or His BUil'ering and or His
death. The whole or Europe, aroused by the voice or an enthu-
aiaatio hermit, moves in a JD888 to free the land,' and to deliver
the brother ChristiaDs kept under the cruel yob or a cruel des-
potism. They fight desperately; they endun with constancy
and perseverance the hardahip or a long and war.
They conquer, at last; they trample under (oot the inaulting
crescent; they plant on the walls or Jerusalem the croI!8, 88 an
emblem o( ,)ory and "triumph, and hasten with reverence and
awe to worship their own inheritance, the holy BepIllchre.
Nothing more pathetio, nothing more sublime. The JenuaIem
lkliwretl was by the poet dedicated to the Duke or Ferrara,
AlfODZO d' Este, that ambitious despot, who, 8U8peCting that the
poem might be dedicated to lOme other Italian prince, rewarded
the poet by keeping him fur BeVen years in the insane hospital.
and making him drink to the last drop the oup or bitterne..
'fuso died in Rome, in the ye&r 1595. His last worcJs were, "I
am unhappy because the world is uDjust. "

DigitIZed by Coogle
188 VAJ1V8 A!1D l'IoAB18 OJ' SPaCK.
LliBBOll' LIX.
MAXDfS AND FIGURES OF SPEECH.
p .... tlJ WttIgrata.
To pal with one'. hee1a. } To abecond.
PrO'lMttere fIIIIri II moUi.
To pomiae ... and moantaiu. } To be prodigal of pomiaea.
P""" III 6uIolII.
To be the eompua. } To be at a loaI.
Correre "'"' grtI1l ""'6CG.
To run a great norm. } To run great rialt.
Dar fooco. }
To giTe fire. To 18. on fire.

Dal detlo al fa,. c' "" gra}
From the aid to the done is a tbinp.
great apace. .
Awn! tiel heM tlJ Dio.} .
To have of the good of God. To worldll bIBnga.
F",., "'"' COH in tift tniIJ.
To do a thing in a cned.
} To 00 a tbiDg off-hand.
Ntm cretlIJrealltl'llto .. fttmftJ ill .
mirtM:olo. To credit onllwhat is apparent
Not to believe in the aaJnt un- to the 18QI8I.
leaa he pertorma the miracle.
Awn! "" tJUo }
To have the look of an a:com- To have an uglllook.
munioated perIOn.
}
To. take it in holl peace. To be resigned.
AfIIIaU tJ ftJ'l'tJi iIlr&Iltlire.
Go to get JOunelf ble.ed.
} Go and attend to JOUr owa
baaineaa.
DigitIZed by Coogle
BnlONYHB Aim EXAHPLBS. 189
SYNONYMS.
1'0 REPEAT, RIPETERE, REPLICARB.
Ripetere baa the meaning of saying again what lIdI been said
before.
Rep,licare baa the meaning of doing again what baa beeJl done
before.
The teacher uka us to repeat, ripdere, our lellllOD..
We cry aloud" replictJ," when we wish to 1188 again. aome
808Il8 in & new performance.
g- WhID. replieGr. is 1IIIed fbr words, it has the meauiDg of con-
tradlct.iDg or opposing with worda ; as,
L' ordi", erG elJl'rieciolO, _ """'"0 GrdiN replieGr
RELATION, RELAZIONE, RAPPORTO.
RIIpporto is the relation of an incident, of lIOJIlethlng which
baa just taken place.
RslaioM is the relation of & great event, or of a long journq.
A corporal mak. hill rapporto of the discipline of hill oom.-
pany.
A general in chief mak. hill relt.J%iou of the battle he baa
gained or lost, and of all the difliculti. he baa encountered.
The relations among Menda and relatives are relGzioni cia
amicma, di parentela, and not rapporti.
EXAMPLES.
I have read many Italian po8DIII.
It is generallylUppoeed that he
is 'fery atilful.
Whilst I am alive you have noth-
ing to fear,
When I may be permittlJd to go
cut, then I Iha1i go to him.
JIll book is sW1 uiatiDg.
Eo letto molt. pom. BGliGne.
8i erede dIJ lulti eke egli i molt.
aile.
Menln 110 flits, non GMe ftlllla
dIJ "mer.
Quando fAl 'GrA permeuo eli
uacir" GllorG Gntlrb dIJ lui.
n IUD lilwo uiIIe tuII/J",.,
DigitIZed by Coogle
~
180
EXERCISlI: LVDI.
One or the m.oet; celebrated charactera in the literary world ill
Francia Petrareh. We are chiefly indebted to him for the z..
toration or the latin tougue to ita purity. He contributed
greatly to the rerival of leUen in Italy, and, through Italy, to
the other realma of Europe. His latin works give evidence of
hill abiliti. 88 a politician, theologian, and pbilOlOpher. He
clothed many uce1lant pnceptB of morality with all the gracea
of pure and cluBica.l laugua.ge. -'1', that bl rea.diDg
the moral writings of Petn.rch, we visit, not .. barl'aD. deaen of
dry diBpuation, but a fruitful garden of elegant obl!erva.tiODB,
tun of the choic.t (owen of literature; yet Petrareh's filme
depends DOW entirely on hill Italian poems, a collection of about
three h1lDdred od. and BOnDete, which he wrote 88 the light
rela:mtiODB of bia mind, almoat axclllBively given to latin works,
which were the object of hill serious applica.tiona, and on which
alone, it ill auppoeed, he baaed all bia c1a.ima to the admiration or
poeterity. It is laura, that mod.. and neat maiden he ..
for the 1Int time on the morning of a Good Friday, 1327 (on tha.fI
day in which the sun 101t all ita brightneaa through pity for ita
Creator, Era it tn eM al 101 .; M:Olortwo pw 1tJ tIt!l ""' Fill-
tore i rai), who inspire. him, and he poura forth thole bea.utifal
venea which celebrate the a.ccomp1iahmenta and bewail the fate
of bia cheriahed idol. Wbilat laura is alive, the cbarma of her
person Ioat conatantly before him, and he pours forth all the
aweetneaa of bia heart in .. gay and Anjmated strain. La.un.
di. ; and the mourning poet do. not layaaide hill harp, but the
earthly paaaion give. WAy to a purer a.t'ection, and he aiDga, in
.. aolemn and hopeful tone, hill laura, 88 she appea.n to him in
drea.ma, 88 he IIIItlI her in the concentration or bia mind, the
embodiment of heavenly bliss, a guardian angel conatantly guid-
ing him, watching over him, and bidding him be resigned, and
look with eager delight for the day in which he may be permitted
to share her joy and happineaa. Petrarch W88 bom in.Areuo,
in the year 1304; and died at hill villa. in ArgU, near Padua, in
1374. He W88 found dead in bia library, with hill head
r.ting on a book. The chair in which he died, and aevera.1 other
n1ica, are atilJ. existing, and are acrupuloully preaerved from the
iDjurieI of time. .
.:
DigitIZed by Coogle
mlOIUTIO Bn"BE8SlONB. 191
LliIBBOll' LX.
IDIOMATIO EXPRESSIONS.
To be about a thing.
To abound with everything.
To absolve frQm
To abstain doiDg .. thing.
To abuse the po"...
. To be accompanied by .. friend.
To be acquainted with one.
To addrMa one.
To adorn with. .
To be atrected by .
Agitated with mch a thought.
To be amazed at a thing.
To be uin with a penon.
To anawer loJ: a thing.
To approye of a thing.
To argue upon a thing.
To be armed with
To arriYe at
To augment in
Bathedwithtean.
To bear one a grudge.
To believe
To beBtow upon
To beware of
To charge one with
To be clothed With
To come near to
To comply with one'.1riBhes.
To confer on
To confide in .
To be contented with
To be oopioaa in
Star /fIIl4II _ COld.
Ah60ntIare di ogai COM.
Auoluere tlei ptCQIli. _
Altenerri di fare ..
.AbuIare del potMe.
EutJre aa:ompag7ItJIo "" ___
Omolt%f'e tuIO.
Fawllare fill tuIO.
Atlor7&t.we di
EutJre intenmto ""
Agitaw 4tJ un
Esser '0fJ1fY!MJ di tiM CHII.
EutJre IdegMto di _,..."...
RentIer COfIItI di _ CHII.
ApprOfJfll"e Untl COM.
RagitnuIre tli _ COM.
.ArmarIi tli
Amvare ill
.AJ:cruoer,i di
BtlfrNllo di ltJgritae.
Voler ma1e fill tuIO.
Dar/_a .
Om/erirea
Guardarri tli
ACl:lllare UIIO di

AtltlicifttWli a
Om/_Ii al ""leN tli tatO.
eoa,lerift II
JU4r1i di ...
Euer t:fnIbmto di
AliItntJIIre tli
DigitIZed by Coogle

192 JDIOJUTIC UPBIBSIONB Al1D BX.UIPLF&
Covered with
(IJowned with
aaaIed with
10 cleUghi in
ro demand of
ro he diappointed in .
ro he dDpleued with
ro he aaraged ai .
To f'ace ODe.
To &ll in loTe with
To t'eedon
Tol1I with
To fortifJ with
To fumiIh ODe'. self' with
To he &I good &I one'. word.
To have done.
To hinder from
To inftame one with
To kill one'. hand.
To he laden with
To laugh at
To lavish upon
To let one moW'.
To load with
To look at a thing.
To look for a thing.
To look upon a thing.
To lose Bight of one.
TheN is another thing to be done.
lrIoD81 ill a mere nothiDs in oom-
parlaon with hoDOl'.
I'or liar of being too lcmg.
Han ill the ely hero in Chris-
tianl'1.
When I reached the 81IJDDIit of the
mountain, I belt and prayed.
Copmo tiL
Cortmato tli .
A1iitJgliolo tlIJ
Dilt:tttJm tli
DomarultIre "
Euer tlMuo tli .
Euer _gutsto tli
Blare ~ ctnIIrtJ
Far frtmte ad WID.
.liuItmIonni tli. .
Nut,.;,; tli
Empiere tIi ...
Mtmiretli .
PtOfJuet1erri tli
lY"mItmere la paroltl.
AwrJi_.
Itnpetlire tli .
Aa:mdere WID tli . . .
Bat:iare la _ ad UItO-.
Euer ctri:o tli .
Bejfarri tli
JTodjgare "
Far ,.,., ad WID.
CariccIrI tli
Guardan tmtI COlli.
O:n:are Untl COItI.
Guardare ad UM COItI.
PerWre uno tli tMta.
Pi I II.' "zit'" COIG tla, lar.i.
n det&aro I II. _0 .ulla " cor&-
Ironto lleU'OADr ..
nmeAdo di dilllng"rmi If'oppo.
Nel CridiamrilllO AOA t7i I "zlf'o
,roe eM l'uomo.
Qua.do giuAri "zl" NIt" dil
I'IIOfIIe, ""Iraginoccldd , FflGI.
DigitIZed by Coogle
JDDBCISE. 193
EXERCISE LIX.
Who ia this newly-born child, brought to the church of St
.John the BaptiBt, in Florence, to be baptized? Why does the
age rejoice at his appearance into the world? Has he not &
h1lDUloD. form? Is he noi of leah and bones? Yes; he ia a child
like all other children; but the Omnipoteni God baa touched
his forehead with his Divine finger, and baa imparted to him the
gift of a creati.ve mind. The child becomes & man, and, with
the voice of an inspired pmphet, cries out to a Ilumbering nati.on
Rile! and the nati.on, at the sound of that BtirriDg trumpet,
awakes &om a lethargy of twenty ages, and riaea to light and
POlY. This great geniua, befOle whom all men of mem have
bowed with wonder and admiration, W88 the 1Irst to perceive
that art and llCience mot harmonize with zeligion; that for a
Christian the m1l"eringa, joys, hopes, and interests, of thia world,
were but a mere nothing in comparison with the imm8D118 hap-
pin_ of an eterna1life; thai between the birth of the 1irat man
and the day of the Jut judgment there W88 humanity; thai
between the Genesis and the Apoaal;ypae there W88 a book to be
made, and he imagined and produced it, e1evati.ng man, by the
gradual and progreeaive development of IeDtimenta, emoti.0D8,
and upirati.ODS, from a handful of dot in human ahape, to a
epiritaal being contemplating the Divinity, and longing for a
world of joy and blilB. This great star in the horizon of modern
literature is Dante Alighieri; the wonderful book is the Divine
Comedy. Far from imitati.ng Homer and Virgil, in representing
gods, demigods, imd heroes, with the gravity and solomnity of a
style mOle elevated than the language commonlYlpoken, the
Christian poet felt that the only hero in Christianity is man ; thai
the principles of charity and fraternity had already proecribed
from the human race eyery mark of diltincti.on ; that men were all
equal ; that the humblest among them W88 the 1Irst in the light of
God. Overruled by this grand idea, he endeavored to represeni
man ae he is; and, adopting the common languge, he gave to his
producti.on the title of Comedy, which wae afterwards acknowl-
edged ae ~ e Divine Comedy. I mot c101e here, for fear of being
too long; but I wUl endeavor to ftniah my coune ofaxerciBee by
giving 10U an outline of the poem in my nen and 1aet Ie.on.
DigitIZed by Coogle
1N
mIOJU.TIO UPBBSSIONB.
LlIBBOlf LXI.
IDIOMATIO EXPRESSIONS.
To take notice of a peraon.
To be obliged to one for
To be offended at .
To ofl"er one to
To omit to
To oppoee lOme one:
To pardon one for a fault.
To part with
To permit one to
To pillage a city.
To play upon an instrument.
To be pleased with
To praise one for an action.
To present one with a thing.
To pretend'tO
To prevent one 'from
To. prey upon a thing.
To pride one'a self in .
To profit by
To promise one a thing.
To propoee to
To provide one'a self with
To put on a fair face.
To be qualliied for
To question a thing.
To receive of
To recompense for
To reflect on
To refuse to
To ret'uee one a thing.
To 1"t\ioice at ..
To rely on
~ repent for
&lut.tlrt U7&4 pem17lII.
Euere oIiJligalo ad tmO di
Offeruler6i di
O.ffrire ad tmO di
Omettere di
0pp0r6i a qua!cu7lO.
Perdtmare un falltJ ad tIM.
Diifn di
Permeltere ad tmO di
Dare i1 MICCO ad UntJ cittll.
&nare U7IO ,tf'UfllDlto.
Compiacer6i di
LJdare l' G%ione tli V7IO.
Donare U7&4 COIla ad U7lO.
Far IIemlJUmte di :
Imptdire ad 'U7IO 'di..
DiVOf'tZioe U7&4 COIla.
Gloriar,; di
Profittare di
Promettere una COIla ad uno.
Proporre di
ProwetIer6i di
Fare huon viIID.
Ener ben alto a
Dubitare di una COIla.
Ricevere tla .
RU:ompmllare di
, Riflettere II
RicuIIare di
Negare una COIla ad tmO.
Rallegrar6i di
Far capitale di
Pentir6i di
DigitIZed by Coogle
mrOIU.TIO EXPBDISIONS AND EDBOlBE. l8G
To require .. thing of one.
To reeemble one.
To with '.
To be respectful to .-
To reward for '
To be wi,th
To scatter with
To seem to be BO.
To I18t one at liberty.
To ahelterone.
To sit 'for one'. picture.
To be IllDitten with

To &teal a thing from
To take eumple from one.
To.tUe from one'. hand.
To ake one in.
To teach one.
To think of
To .
To throw one'. I!fIIl on
Tired with
Trample upon a thing.
To fall a victim to
To make much ofa person.
To make free with
To make one Ia.u.gh.
To make!, Prplllllllt ofa thing.
To ma.nelat ....
To be JD&Iter of a thing.
To meddle with
To meditate on
To take notice of a thing.
Ridailere U1IIJ COla tla tmO.
&migliare aIluo.
...
Euere mpeuo.o wrlO

Contentar,; eli
8pMgere di
Parer co.n.
Dar la lilJert4 all tUIO.
Dar ricorJero all tUIO.
Far,; .-ngere.
FMere inlltmlOf'ato eli
Doler,; di,
RubtJre U1IIJ COla II
ImittJre '''10.
Tor di mt.IIIO all tUIO.
Ingannare tUIO.
IMegt&11t'6 fill tmO.
ptmIaf'e II
Pncipitar,; di
Laraciar,; II
8U!.tu;o eli
Calpaltlre U1IIJ COla.
Eller la 4i .
Far eitJiltG fIIlafIG perlONl.
Non. ftlf' c:erimtnIie con.
Dar eli eM ,..,., fill tmO.
Dof111t'6 U1IIJ COla.
t1i
&per,perfettammte U1IIJ COla.
Impiccitzr,; .....
MediItIre di
U1IIJ COla.
EXERCISE LX.
The spirit which penadeII the whole poem of Dante is that of
religion and morality. The DitM&e OmiMly is the upreMion of
a man eminently pious and devout, the pov.ring out of a head
DigitIZed by Coogle
188 UDOISl!I.
be&tiDI with iDt.aaIitr of fee1iDg, to benefit aad' matruci 1II&Il.
kind. The poem is dinded into three parta: Hell, Purgatory,
and Paradise; in other words, Punishment, Expiation, and
Reward. The peraonagea mOBt promment are three: Daate,
Virgil, and Beatrice. The Inferno baa nine levels; the Purga--
tono, nine degrees; the Paradise, nine spheres. The Inferno is
repreaented .. an inverted, h o l l ~ , truncated cone, commenciDg
from the BUrtace of the earth with a diameter of three hundred
mil., and reaching its centre with a diameter of half a mile. In
following the poet through the dark abyaJeB, we find that this is
not the place for the out down, and for thOll8 deatitute of meana to
buy a p8IBpOri to heaven; but, on the contrary, it is destined for
thOII8 who are really wicked, without excepting cardinals, popea,
ancl peraonagea of high rank. In this firBt part of the poem,
viewed with a lICientific eye, the poet limits himself to queatiODlJ
concerning geology ancl mineralogy; but, what is more impor-
taat to be noticed, aad what, I think, baa been overlooked ~
many, is, that Dante waB acquainted with the thIICry of the cen-
tre of granmtion of the earth - a discovery which waB, II8Veral
ages aft.erwards, attributed to Newton. The mountain of pur-
gatory is placed on the 81ll'J&oe of the earth; its 1brm is just the
revene of that of the inferrw. Here the BufI'eren, instead of
being attracted to the centre of the earth by the weight of t;heir
BinI, are patiently toiliDg in &llCending the mountain, and, becom-
ing gradually lighter by repentance and expiation, they reach
the summit, where they find the terrestrial paradise. Here the
poet, left by Virgil,-repreeenting human re&IIOD,-findu new
guide in his Beatrice, symbolizing Divine Wisdom. The Para-
dise of Dante is' baaed on the aystem of Ptolemeua, that the earth
waB the nucl81lll or centre of the univene. Here the poet, true
model of a man eminently religious and devout, felt the impoeai-
bility of our limited intelligen.ce to define the Supreme Being;
coDBequently, after having IIO&l'8d upon the winge of an exalted
imagination from sphere to sphere, and dellCribed the various
degrees ofbleeaednalll oCthe happy beings, which he could deteci
by the gradual increue of rapidity in motion, and of intensity
in splendor, he reach. the lOurce of every light and motion,
and boWl down before the Dinmty in wonder and amuement.
DigitIZed by Coogle
191
CONJUGATION OF THE Aum.JARY VERBS
A VERE, TO HA YE. E8SERE, TO BE.
GERUND.
Awalo or eoll' 1IWI't, having. Euado or Mil' UIII"e, beiDg.
PAST PABTICIPLE.
Atnao, had. 8tato, been.
INDIOA.TIVE ](OOD.
10 lao.
7\& _.
PIUl:8BN'r.
l1gi M, poet. AtIw.
Noi aMJiamo.
Yoi GWIe.
Eglifto 1acm7lO, or 1acm.
DQ'DI'BCT.
10 1OftO.
7\&
Egli 8.
Noi 1itImo.
YoilieU.
Eglifto 1OftO, or 60ft.
AMIG or tJIHfG. ..&40
A_. .&i. ,.
A .. or tINtI. ..&a.
Awuamo. ErfJIIllimo.
AwvlIte. .EnnIGte.
At18wIM or tINtIRO, p.lIIMJao. vm.o.
D1Ji.
AWIti.
DiIe.
Awmmo.
AW8Ie.
Biwro or tiJIMr.
Aura.
AMIi.
A w ~ .
AtInImO.
AvrtII.
AtWfJIIftO.
l'DJ'BC'1'
nrruu.
Ai ..
Folti.
.n.
Fummo.
Fom.
hrtmo, p.fwo or",.
&ri.
&roi.
&ri, p. ji4.
8tmmD.
&znt..
...,.", p. jiIIu.
DigitIZed by Coogle
COllDmOB'AL.
A ...... or fIDI"iII.
A"""';.
AweiiI or 1IIriI.
A_.
A_".
A1WIi6Iro or 1IIIf'iano.
Brni, MritJ, p.ltIt'fI.
&ruti.
&nliJe, Mlrifl, p./f1N.
&remmo.
&rule.
&rtJiJero,IIIriao, p.j?JrtIu.
BUBJUNcnvE KOOD.
OM io td6itJ.
CAe '" 1166i ..
OM egli .aN.
OM fIDi cr66iamo.

OM eglino Gbbitmo.
PBaD'l'.
CMio".
eM"'_, or ...
CMtgli".
CAe 'Mi Mmo.
CAe tIOi lillie.
OM eglino .MM.
DIPJIIII'BC'l'.
&io"";.
&"'.",;.
&eglitmUU.
& ftOi tmUIimo.
& tIOi tIWIU.
& egli'M atJUHI'O.
&io/o",
&"'1=
& egli foue.
& ftOi /ouimo.
&tU1if"
& egli'M /tJIItiI'O.
.A.66i.
AMitr.
...t66iGmo.

.Ab6itmo.
DIPBlU.TIVE KOOD
Siior".
SitJ
BilImD.
8iQtc
SImaoor.-.
N. B. - The compound teues of t.heIe auDIar7 Terbl are 1brmed
b7lddlug the put pr.rtlclple of their own TerbI to the idmple .....
10 lao 1IWt0,
Io tlNllfllIWtO,
ID ".".. tJWto,
10 60f&0 61alo,
10 _ 6ttIto,
Io 6t.If'fi Malo,
DigitIZed by Coogle
:.
181
GEBtnm
.AnwmtIo, loYiDg. TenHRtIo, CeariDg. PfIrl-entlo, departing.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
.AnHto,loTed. n-uto, feared. Part-ito, departed
PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
I
ArIHIIte, loTiDg. TmHIIte, CeariDg Part-enU, departing
.
IlmIOATIVE MOOD.
PBlIImft'.
Am-o. Tena-o. Part-o
AIrH .
Tem-i. Part-i

Tem-e. Part ...
.Am-4Gmo.
. Tan-iamo.
Part-ia-
.Am-Qte.
Tem-ete. Part-Ue.
l-mo. Tem-oao.
P"""'o.
1JIPJIUml'.
.Am-.tI. Tena-eva or ea .
PIIf"t-itIa:
.Ana-aDi;
Tem-etIi. Part-ivi .
A_."
TmHI1/J or ea. Part-irxl.
Am-GtIamo. Tem-euamo. Part-itlamo.
Am-GtIate. Tem-euat,. Part-ivate.
Am-inumo. TerrHvtmo or Part-ltumo.
PDJ'BC'l'.
Am-IIi Part-ii.
.AnwUIi. Thn-Uti. Part-Uti.
AnMl. TerIH or eu.. Part-l.
Am-ammo. Tem-emmo. Part-lmmo.
ArIHItI. Tem-Ute PIIrl-lItI.
.Am-Gnmo. 2llnHnmo or Pe&rt-irou.
DigitIZed by Coogle
JOG BBGl1LAB VBBBS.
1'1I'1'UJIII
.AlIHnl. 7inwri. PtIr't-iri
.ArJHrai. TIfIHnri. P,..,...,...
T ..... a. PGrt-ira.
T ..... emo.
...... ete. TIIIHr6te.
..t-aMo. Tem-erauo. PtIf't-irimrw.
CONDITIONAL
.AnHr. or ma. 7'mHr. or ma. or itkl.
.AnHrUti. T ..... Uti
..trJHrWe or ma. 7'mHrWe or ma. PtIf'MrWe or N .
.Am ... -.mo. Tem-er-.mo .
.AnHre... TIIIHrUte

.AnHrWero. T ..... Wero
ptJrt.4rWero.
SUBJUNCTIVE )(OOD.
PBlI8D'1'.
CAeio ..... TerJH. Ptlrt-G.
CAe"' ..... TerJH. Part ...
CAeegli ..... TerJH. Part-G.
CAe noi tJrJHamo. TenHamo. PtIf'Mamo.
CAe t70i am-iate. TenHate.
CAe eglirw lrm-irw. nm-. PlJrt-Grw.
DIPBBPBCT.
& io tIIIWu,;. TmHui.
.
Part-Wi
& '" t.rm-Gui.
Tem-U.ti. Part-Wi.
& egli anWuu. Tem-U&e. Part-We.
& rwi -a..imo. PtJrt-luimo.
& t70i .....a.te. Tem-Ute.
& egli --.ro .. PtIf't-V-O.
DlPDATlTJi.
.Am-a. Tem-i. Part-i
Am-i. Tn-4.
PtIf'I-G.
Am-iGmo. TenHamo Part-illmD.
..(-ate.
Tem-ete. Part-Ue.
lm-irw. nnwmtJ. PlJrt-Grw.
DigitIZed by Coogle
IBBEGULAB vEBBs. "201
IB.B.EGULAB VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION
n r D ~
!'O GO.
A1&tiGftdo.
AfttiGto.
Vado. _
VGi.
Va.
AftdiGmo.
.AMtrte.
VtIJUIO.
Afttiawa.
Andaui.
A1ItIatuJ.
Aftdavamo.
~
AfttImHmo.
AntIai.
Aruituti.
AndO.
ARtItmrmo.
A7IClcute.
AntltIi'tmo
DIFllIITlYE MOOD.
D.I.BZ, F.I.BZ, 87'.I.BZ,
!'O GIV1 !'O DO. !'O BUY.
GERUND.
DtnulD. Facmdo. &mulo.
PAST PA.RTICIPLE.
1JfIto.
Falto &Mo.
INDIOA.TIVE MOOD.
l'BIID'l'.
Do. Faa:io or fOe EIto.
DGi. FGi. &Gi.
Drs. Fa. &4
.DiamD. Faa:iamo. 8ttJmo.
Date Fate. 1!Jt4te.
Dcwao. Famao. 8tmmo.
IIIl'DI'.a'l'
DawI. FtICeI1fI. BtmH.I.
Davi. FGCeIIi. &arn.
DawI. FtICeI1fI. &tma.
1JfIfJII1IIO FaceoQmo.
8tatxJttw.
DtIfHIIe. F(II;(JI)Qte.
&tJWde.
~ . FtJCeIHI7IO 8It.IIUmO.
PBIIUC'l'.
DiItli or tletti. Feci. &etti.
Dati. FtICtIIi. Btmi.
Dietk,tldte,dia. Fece orft. &ette.
Ihmmo. Ftammo. 8temmD.
Date. F_te. &ate.
Diedero, deuero. Fecero orfmmo. &d1tirO.
DigitIZed by Coogle

..tR4nl.
A __
A,.."...
A ..........
A __
AII4nmno.
..4.,",",.
AfIIlrati.
AatlnlJ6e.
AIItInmmo.
Aadrate.
AIIIlnil6ero.
V_.
V_.
V_.
A,.....
AfIIliate.
V __ .
Anclam.
A1Itl&vi.
Afttitwe.
A.ndtIuimo.
,Andtute.
ArultJuero.
JBJUDCJtJLAB TBBIJ8.
nrruu.
Dtri Fori. &trio
DtmIi .
F"';. &.ai.
Dcra. FfIt'a. 8'itlri.
lJGrentiI. FCIIWIIO. .......
1JfIt'fIe. FardIl. 8tareu.
~ . FtIf"IImIO. &1InImIO.
OONDmOnL.
DtIni p. tIIriJ. Farei, p. faritJ. 8tartri p. 1ttIritI
Darati. Fflt'Uti. &fIt'ati.
Dart/JIM. .FimlI6e. &tweIN.
~ . F_. St.r-no.
DtJraI8. F_te. &area
lJGrtJiJero. FfIJ'tiJIJero. &fIt'eIiJero.
SUBJUNOTIVE ](OOD.
J'aBIBlft'
Dia. FGCdG. StitJ.
Dia. FGCdG. StitJ.
Dia. FGCdG. BtiII.
Ditzmo. Faceidmo. &itzmo.
Diate. Facciate. &;ate.
Ditao. FIICCitmo. BtitmD.
DIPDI'BC'l'
Dtwi. FOt:eIIi. &ua or 1tuJi.
DtI6IIi. FfIIIli. &.,,; or II ...
DtI6IIe. Fat:aIe. &tI6IIe or sIeItIe.
DtI6IIimo. Faceuimo. 8ttI6IIitno or 1IUIimo.
DtJIIe. F_te.
&GIIe or llelte.
DtI6IIero.
FfIIIIer'O.
8ttIIIef'O or 1IeIIero.
IF The following compound verbs are aJeo irregular:
RitmdtJre, to go again.
RitItJre, to give again.
1Ji6Icre, to bs diltant.
AtldtwIi, to addict.
RimJre, to stop.
&pnut ... , to delay, to tampon..
DigitIZed by Coogle
"
VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN WHICH
THE TERMINATION [seo IS INDISPENSABLB
Abbellire,
Abbomre, .
Abbrividiie,

Abbroetolire,
Abbruttire,
Abolire, .
Abortire,
Aooalorire,
Accanire,
Aooolorire,
Aooudire, .
Aoetire,
Addolcire,
Aderize,
Afti.evolire,
AI'ortire,
AfI'ralire,
Aggrandire,
Agguerrire,
Agire,
Alieggerire,
Allenire, '
Alleetire,
Amarire,
Ambire,
AmmRDiN,
Ammansjn,
.Amm&ttire,
Ammollire,

Ammorbidire,
Ammortire,
.AmJ:Bu tire,
Ammutolire,
.Annegbittire,
Ann8rlre,
Annicbilire,
Annobilire,
Appa.rire,
Appuaire,
Appetire,
AppicciDire,
Appigrire,
A.rdire,t
Arricchire,

.Arroeairai,
Arroetire,
.Arrozzire,
Arrugginire,
Arruvidire,
.AsaaJire
,
.AIII8rire,
AIaopire,
AIaordire,
AIaortiie,
.Asaoggettire,
Atterrire,
Attribuire,
Attriatire,
Attutire,
* Bee lid ollrreplar ftl'bI.
Avvilire,
Avvizzire,
Balbuttire,
Bandire,
Benedire,
Biancbire,
Blandire,
Brandire,
BruDire,
Candire,
Capire,
Chiarire,
Circuire,
Colorire,
Colpire,
Comparire,
Compartire, .
Compatire,
Conoepire,
Condire,
, ConCerire,
Conatruire,
Contribuire,
Contrire,
Costruire,
Cuatodire,
Dererire,
Definire,
Demolire,
DiI"erire,
Diflinire,
D .
Jg81"ll8,
Diminuira,
Dilasprire ,
DiM8ppellire,
Diatavorire.
Diafinire,
Diagradire,
Diaimpedire,
Diaparire,
Diapartire,
Diaruvidire,
Diatribuire,
Diau'bbidire,
DiivigOrire,
DiauDire,
Erudire,
:Ellll.l:tdire,
FAurire,t
Esibire, .
Esinanire,
Falllre,
Futidire,
Favorire,
Ferire, .
Finire,
Fiorire,
Fluire,
ForDire,
Fruire,
Garantire, '
Garrire.
t to dare, bonon tram .... , to daN, the WOIda erinlo, ""_, -.r.
'--...,..., orcIi<Ite, ......."" lIeIaas to the TUb .#lere. to bani.
i PIA puIIaI.ple .-'10 l1li4 __ '0.'
DigitIZed by Coogle
1M .APPDDIX.
GedIn, ImIm1Wre, Inca1vire,
Infievolhe,
Ghermke, Immagrire, Inaanoherire, Infingudhe,
Gioire,
Tmmalinconire, Incanlltire,
Infistolire,
Gradire, Immalvagire, Incaparbire, ln1luire,
Grancire, Immarcire, Incappocc1lire, Infiillire,
Granire, ImmaWre, IncaponJre, InCortire,
Gnmire, Im.padroJiir$, Incapriccire,
In1racidire.
Grugnire.
Im.pallidire, Incarognire, Infragilire,
Gaaire.
Im.paurire, Incatarrire, Infialire,
Gaalcize, Im.pazientire,
IncatoDo1ire, .
Infrigidire.
Gaarire, Im.pedire, Incattivire,
Ingagliardire.
Guamire. Im.pervertire, Incenerire, Ingeloeire,
1U&idire.
Im.picoo1ire, Incerconire,
Ingenti1ire.
Illanguidire, Im.pidocohire, Inciprignire,
.1Dgerini,
llling11idire, Im.pigrire, Incivilire,
Ingia1lire,
Im.baldanzire, Im.poltronire, Inoodardire, Ingiovanire,
Im.baldire, Impoaemire, Incollerire,
Ingobbire.
Im.balsimire, Im.po'f8rire, Incoragire, Ingrandire,
Im.bandire, Im.prosperire, Incrudellre, Inlividire,
Im.barberlre, t Im.puntire, Incrudire, InnuzzoUre,
Im.barbogire, Im.putridire, Indebo1ire, Inorgoglire,
Im.butardire, Im.puzzo1ire, Indocilire, Inorridire,
Im.butire, Inacerbire, Indolcire, Inquisire,
Im.bellire, Inaoetire, Indolentire, Imralvatiohire,
Im.beatialire, Inaoidire, Indoleuzire, 1Daanire,
Im.bianohire, Inaoutire, Indurire, Inaobiavire,
Im.biondire, Inagrire, Inerire, Inaerire,
Im.bizzarrire, Inalidire, Infim:ire, 1Daignire,
Im.bohdre, InfiIatidire, Inaignorire,
Im.bonire, InCellonire, Inaipidire,
Im.bottire, Inaainire, InCemminire, InIolentire,
Im.beuacchire, Inaapire. Inf'erire, InIollire,
Im.bricoonire, Inavarire, InCerocire, 1nIordire,
Im.brunire, Incagnire, Inf"ervorire, Insoepettire,
Im.bruschire, Incallire. Infiaochire, Insozzire,
DefecI:In III the IIrd u4 .-d ~ plural fIt!he two pwa&
t 0fteD WII&IIIIl hhr6Grlre.
DigitIZed by Coogle
IDatnpidhe,
IDauperbire,
Intenebme,
Intenerire,
Intiepidire,
InUgnoshe,
Intimidire,
Intim.orire,
Intirannire,
Intirizzire,
Inti8ichire,
Intorbidire,
Intormentire,
Intorpidire,
Intriatire,
Inumidire,
Invaghire,
Invanire,
Inveire,
Invelenire,
Inverminire,
Invigorire,
Invitire,
Invincidire,
Inviperire, .
InviBcidire,
Invizzire,
Involpire,
Inzotichire,
Irretire,
Irrioohire,
Irrigidire,
Irritroaire,
Irruginire,
:r..t.erilire,
APPENDIX.
Iatituire, Rancidire,
Iatolidire, Rapire,
Iatruire, Rattiepidire,
IArgire, Ravvilire,
Lenire, Ravvincidire,
Maledire, Redarguire,
Ma.rcDe, Reetituire,
Kunile, Retribuire,
Obbedire, Riabbellire,
Olire, Riagire,
Ordire, Riapparire,.
Oatruire, Riarriochire,
Partire,' Ribadire,
Partorire, Ribandire,
Patire, Richia.rire,
Pattuire, Rioolorire,
Percepire, Riooncepire,
Piatire, Ricondire,
Polire, RiOO8truire,
Poltrire, Riferire,
Preferire, Ri1iorire,
Preaagire, Rimbambire,
Preterire, Rifrondire,
Prot'erire, Rifronzire,
Progredire, RiDgentilire,
Proibire, Ringioire,
Pulire, Ringiovanire,
Punire, Ringiovialire,
Putire, Ringrandire,
Rabbellire, Rinaanire,
Rabbonire, ,Rinaavire,
Raddolcire, Rinaerenire,
Raggentilire, RinBignorire,
Rammollire, Rintenerire,
Rammorbidire, Rintiepidire,
205
Rinveaire,
Rinvigorire,
Rinvilire,
Ripartire,
Ripartorire,
Ripulire,
RiaaJ.ire,
Riaarcire,
Riabaldire,
Riaquittire,
Riateochire,
Ritroaire,
Riunile,
Riverire,
&lire,.
Saporire,
Sbaldanzire,
Sbalordire,
Sbandire,
Sbigottire,
SbiDatrire,
Scal8re,
Scamire,
Scaturire,
Schermire,
Schia.rire,
Schiattire,
Sciapidire,
Scipidire,
Scolorlre,
Scolpire,
Scomparire,
Scompartire,
Semenme,
Seppellire,
DigitIZed by Coogle
-
aftl'hoe,
SIDin,
Sfombe.
Sprin.
SS .......
ap..atire,
Sgradin.
SmasriN.
Smalme,
SmarriIe.
SmiDuIn.
BaIlDbe.
Sopi!e,
Sops_Un.-
Sonin,t
SoaitDbe,
S
. -
pann,
Bparibe,
Bpaarire,
Bpedbe,
Bpenerme,

SqaiWre,
Btabilin,
Brapain.
Btamutin,
...... f6I1np1ar-'le.
8Wuire,
Bt.eochiIe,
Bt.erilire,
Btiaire.
Btolidire,
Btordire,
Btormire,
Btramortlre,
Btrem..me,
Btupicli!e,
Btupile,
BftDin.
BYe1enire,
Sa...,
BuppUn.
TracJiIe,
Traf'adze.
'.l'ramortin.
TraafarUe,
'.l'raIpedin,

Truricobin,
Ubidire,
UDire.
UlUoapire,
Vaps.
t kIV.,1Io dmr IDII,'" IIM..-& Ill .... 1 ba& .... ,*".110 P Gat, II ......
_ftdI.
LIST OF VERBS or THE THIRD CONJUGATION. WITH
THE PRESENT ENDING BOTH IN 0 AND ISCO
Abbomn,
Adempin,-
Appludile,
.A.aporire,
.A.orbize,
AnwtUe,
Bollire,t
Carpin,
Com
-
pan,

DiaiDghiottin,
Divertire,
.......... .
...... poe,
rorbile,
Im.paain,
Inghiottin,
Invardire,
Inv.me,
Lambi!e,
LaDguire,
Menme,
Muggire,.
Nudrire,
Nutrlre,
Ofl'rin,1
Otrerire,1
Pervarti!e.
Rifurbi!e,
Binvardire,
Binveeme.
Ragin,.
Bchemi!e,
SofI'rin,I

ToIsire,
Traftltin.
'rbe pre ... III II taken the nrbIlIIlmpl., _,m ..."c., .. u4
......... ."",..
t ..... , 110 lioii, --..."..., "'"-'-1 ..... to-', toUllrl lIIII-c
110 11M TUb tollliJr., 110 -'-
tW ..... aIIolq -wrri, ... ".,.eo; -reI,-.e.
, ..... ....",..., .......... ...."uo ............... .
I ftII .... putlclpIe II .,-m ..,..., .
DigitIZed by Coogle
IRREGULAR VERBS.
Lm OF IRREGULAR VERBS.
IF Verba marked with aa & will be 1bUDd in separate liat.
Tel'llO!D. lJUID. 1' .. t.
Acoendere,' Acceei,
Appeadere, Appesi,
Appnmdere,
.Arrendere, Arresi, r.
Attendere, Attesi,
.Ascend.ere, .Ascesi,
Compnmdere, Compresi,
Condi.soendere, CondiBcesi,
Contendere, Conteai,
Difendere, Difesi, r.
Diaappnmdere, Disappresi,
DiBoendere, Discesi,
Distendere, Distesi,
Eetendere, Esteai,
Fendere, Fessi, r.
Imprendere, Impresi,
Incendere, Incesi,
Intendere, Intesi,
Intri.prendere,
OJrendere, 01l'esi,
Prendere, Presi,
Pretendere, Ptetesi,
Protendere, Protesi,
Prostendere, Prostesi,
. Bendere, Resi, r.
Riaocendere, Ria.ceeIi,
Ripnmdere, Ripresi,
Scendere; Scesi,
Scoseendere, Scoecesi,
Soprappnmdere,
Sopraintendere, Soprainteiai,
Spendere, Spesi,
Sopraapendere, sOpraapesi,
Sorprendere, Sorpreai,
JPuhH.
&g.
&g.
&g.
&g .
&g.
&g
&g.
&g.
&g.
lUg.
&g.
&g.
lUg.
&g.
&g.
&g.
&g.
&g.
&g.
&g.
&g.
&g.
&g.
&g.
&g.
&g.
&g.
Reg.
&g.
&g.
Reg.
lUg.
Reg.
&g.
1' .. t put.
Acceso.
Appeso.
Appreso.
.Arreso.
Atteso.
.Asceso.
Compreso
Condisceso.
Conteso.
Difeso.
Disappr*
Disceso.
Disteso.
Esteso.
Fesao, r.
Impreso.
Inoeso.
Inteso
. Intrapra:ro.
01l'esO.
Preso.
Preteso.
Proteso.
Prosteso
Reso.
Riacceso.
Ripreso.
Soeso.
Scoaoeso.
Soprappreso.
Soprainteso.
Speso.
Sopraapeso.
Sorpreso.
DigitIZed by Coogle
208 IBBEGULAB VEBBS.
........ ..... 1' ....
h'_
1'Mt ....
8teadere, BteIi., Reg. SWo.
Teadan, Ted, &g. TeIo.
Truomdere, Truceai, RAg. TnaceIe
Villpendse, Villpeai, Reg. Villpeao
.......
Addarre, AddUllli, Addurrb, Addotto.
Indurre,
induE, Indurrb, Indotto.
Dedarre,& DedUllli, Dedurrb, Dedotto.
Condurre, CondUllli, Condurrb, Condotto.
Pzodurre, PzodUllli, Pzodurrb, .ProcJotto.
........
Apparin, Apparvi, r. &g. Appano, r.
Comparin,t
Comparvi, &g. Compano.
DiIp&rile, Diaparvi, &g. Diaparito.
Riapparire, Riapparvi, r. &g. Riappano, r
Sparin, Sparvi, r. &g. Bparito.
'baIparire, Truparvi, r. &g. Truparlto.
Aprire,l
Apeni,r. Reg. Aparto.
Coprire, Oopeni, r. &g. Coperio.
Dillcoprire, Dillcopeni, r. Reg. Dillcoparto
Ricoprire, RiooperU., r. Reg. Riooparto
Booprire, Boopeni, r. &g. Booperto
... ,w,. Ani, Reg. Arlo
RiarBi, &g. Riano.
-Utlll'ii. .Aaliatere, .Aaliat-ei or etti, Reg Aaaistito.
lilaiatere, Eei8t.el or etti, &g. Esiatito.
A...am.ere, ..&...mai, Reg Aaaanto.
Consamere, CoIl81Ul8i, &g. CoJ18llnto.
Deaam.ere, Deeanai, &g. Desanto.
Preaumere, Preiunsi, r. Reg. Prelanto.
RiaaIamere, RiusIlDli, Reg. RialBunto.
-tlln. Dire, DiE, DhV, Detto.
:Bendire, :BendS, :Bendirb, :Bendetto.
BeDedire,&
:Bened-iEi or ii, Reg. Benedetto
. Contraddire, ContmddiBli, Reg. Contraddetto.
.4ntIre ud .......... mq be 11IeclllllMl4(1f .,....., ...........
to...,... ud....,.... an ue4lD1te14 (If....,..,.,.., ..............
t Petzueb 11M 11114 .",..l1li&814 (If ......
,1t'I&Ia "'1I1IlIIIIar7 nrIII-. ud -.re, III 1tI-.-..t ......
DigitIZed by Coogle
,..... b.IID.
M'&ldire,"
Jrf&ledire, ..
Pndhe,"
IKBEQULAB VEBBS.
P .. t. htve.
Maldisai, &g.
&g.
Predisei, &g.
Bern, bevei, :HerO,
Caddi, Oadrb, r.
P .. ,UL
Ma1detto.
Maledetto.
Predetto.
Bevuto.
Caduto
Bare,"
....... Cadere,
ADeadere,
Decaftere,
DiIIuadere,
Rioadare,
Bcadare,
Acoaddi, AooadrO,r. Aocaduto.
Penaadere,
..zere. Oalere,"
Valen,"
Preftlere,"
.u.n. t Oedere,
Ooaoedere,
Int.cedere,
Ledae,
Suooedere, .
Chiedere,t
Riedere,'
-lulwe. Chiudere,
Alludere,
Aochiuciere,
Oonchiudere,.
Deludere,
Inohiudere -
mudere.
Bacohiudere,
RiDchiudere.
"re. Oonoepire,
Peroepire,
Decaddi,
DiBBuui,
Rioaddi,
Scaddi,
Peraaaei,
Ca1ai,
VaJai,
Preva1si,
ee.i, r.
Ooncel8i, r.
InterCe.i, r.
Leai,
Sucoai, r.
Chi.,
'Df;f.
Chiuai,
Alluai,
Aochiuai,
Conohiuai,
Deluai,
Inohiuai,
mUBi,
Bacohiuai,
Rinohiuai,
Conoepii,
Peroepii,
-1TIII _Ill tile tbIId penaa.
DecadrO,r.Dec.duto.
&g.
Djaauuo.
Ricadrb, r. Rieaduto.
Scadrb,r. Scaduto.
&g. PerBUaIIO.
&g Oalut.o.
VarrlI, Valuto,1al8o.
PrevarrO, Preva1uto.
&g. Ceduto
&g. Oon_,r.
&g. Interoe8lo, r.
lUg. Leao.
Reg. Suooeiao, r.
Reg. Chieeto.
lHf.
Df;f.
Reg. ChiIllO.
Reg. AllIllO.
lUg. AochilllO.
Reg. 00nchi1l8O.
Reg. DelIllO.
Reg. InohiUlO.
Reg. m1l8O.
Reg. Bacohi1l8O.
Reg. Rinohi1l8O.
Reg. Conoepito.
Reg. Peroepito.
t _"'r . . F""" _npIIr
,1'Iae .. GIlaablllpl, III JIO*1. to,,; ... ..,.".,UIeWtI. ....... til oAiIA,
eAUI&
.Ota ....... -zurr., .........
10
DigitIZed by Coogle
110 .APPllRDIX.
,--.
Jab. ~ .... tue. P .. tUL
...... 0aa0I0are, CoDobbi, Reg. OoIIoIcium.
RiconoeoeN, Rioonobbi, Reg. RiocmoIIciuto.
8ccmOl108re, Soonobbi, ~ g . Socmoeciuto.
-lwrere. Carrere,
Colli, . Reg. Colao.
Aooorrere, Acoorai, Reg. A.OOOIIIO.
Coacorrere, Coneorai, Reg. CoaoolllO.
Deccmere, Deoorsi, Reg. DeoolllO.
DiIoorrere, DiIooni, Reg. Dilcorao.
InCOftele, mooni, Reg. mOO!8O.
Oooorrere, Oeooni, Reg. Oooono.
Peroorrere, Pareon1, Rtg. Panmao.
Preoorrere, Preooni, Reg. Pncono .
Ricorrere, Riooni,
. Reg.
Rioono
Soooorrere, Socooni, Reg. Socoono.
Tr8aoorrere, Trasooni, Reg Truoono.
........ Creaoare, Orebbi, Reg. CE.ciuto.
Aeareacere, Aqcnbbi, Reg. Aocnaci.uto.
DeereIcere, Decrebhl, Reg. Decneciuto.
Increacare, mcrebbi, Reg. lnonBciuto.
Meaoere, Mescei, Reg. MWo.
Rincreacare, Rincrebbi,
Reg
Rinereacium.
-ucln. Oucire,& Cuell, Reg. Caoito.
Scucire,& Scuell, Reg. Scaoito.
Sdracire,& . Sdruell, Reg. Sdruoito.
-uere. 0u0Clel'8, Coeai, CocerO, Cotto.
Concuooere, ConOOlllli , Conoocerb, Conootto.
Nuooere, Nocqui, Nooerb, Nociuto.
Riouooere, RiOOl!lli, RioocerO, Riootto.
-\vere. Neg1igere, NegIE, Reg. Negletto.
Dirigere, DireBa:i, Rtg. Diretto.
Erigere, EreIai, Reg. Eretm.
F.igere, F.igei, Reg. EBatto.
-mgv-.Distinguere, Diatinai, Reg. DHttinto.
EBtinguere, EItinai , Reg. 1iJatinto.
T ... wfth &be clIpIdIaaq .. CIIIIIl &be " wheMnr &be ~ IIaIIs OIl arrr ....
wnI bat &be oltbl. dJpIdIuqr, GI' __ IIIIon4 ~ 4IIaI* --.
DigitIZed by Coogle
APPENDIX. ill
'-ndII. . !da. :1' .... lP1lt1aft.
:1' .. , lIIIfto
DcmJre,a Dovei or etti, DovrO,
Devuto.
J'on4ere, Fwd, r. Reg. l!'U&, r.
Ocmtondere, ConfUai, &g. Omdbso.
Aaoondere, .Asooai, Reg. A.ooso
Diftbndere, DiIitai
,.
Reg. DiI"uso.
EAbndere, EftWd, Reg. EIbso.
Intbndere, Int\ui, Reg. lDfaso.
Bitbndere, , Rifaai, Reg. RilwIo.
SooIlf'ondere, Soonfui, Reg. Soonfuso.
Trastondere, Trasfbai, Reg. TraefllSO.
N8800ndere, N8IIClOIIi, &g. N88OO8to.
-Clkre.
EspeUere,- .
FApulsi, Reg. EIpulso.
Di\'ellere,a Divelai, &g. Digelto.
Impellere,- Impulsi, Reg. Impulso.
Repellere,- Repu1ai, Reg. RepuIso.
Compellere,- Compulsi, Reg. Compulso.
Convellere, -
Convu1ei, &g. Convalso.
Bvellere,a
Sve1ai, &g. Svelto.
..enwe. Fervere, Fervei, Reg.
J.
Fieciere,t
FiedQi,
J.
. Dtj'.
-g\re.
Gbe,a
Gli, Reg. Gito or Ito.
. -Otlere. Invadere, Invui, &g. JnvaBO.
lWiere, Rui, r. Reg. Raso.
-1ggere. Figgere, Fi8IIi or ftsi, Reg Fitto or Fisso.
Afliggere, .Aftiaai, Reg. Aftiaso.
Configgere, ConiisBi, &g. Confitto.
Crocifiaai, Reg. Croci1iIBo.
Prefiggere, Preftaei, Reg. PreftBso.
Soonflggere, SoonflBsi, Reg. Soonfitto.
TrafIggere; Tra.fIIBi , &g. Trafitto.
AfBiggere, A.fIliBsi, Reg. AfBitto.
Priggere, FrlIBi ,
R'!I.
J'ritto.
Sol'riggere, Sol'riaai, &g. SoB'ritto.
* Of bat little 11M fa the 1aDgaap.
t,.,.. Ia deIIIot.ltf fa the IIn& mlll-.l p\IIIaI of the IDIUaa&lft ...
Iab,Iaactlft pnRDt, ml ba\ IIWe aNd.
DigitIZed by Coogle
111 APPIIIIDJX.
...... IJda, .....
,. .....
JPut.-.
....,..,. Gi1aDpIe,-
....
1I6g. Gimdo.
=. =.
1I6g. AgimltG.
1I6g. <lcIqi.anto.
IDP ...... 1JIIl..t,
lUg. lapnto.
Bagi ...... BagiUll. lUg. Ragi1Ulto.
8ogiu .... Sogl1ll1li. 1I6g. 8ogi1Ulto.
-Wm.
Bldere. Rill.
lUg. RiID
.Arriclere. AniIi.
1I6g. Aft'iIo.
DericleIe,
DeriIl.
1I6g. DeriIo.
Diftdln. Dina. lUg. lliriIo.
J:licleIe. BIiai.
lUg. :BIUo.
IDtricIeN, IDRiIl. 1I6g. IDtriIo.
I:rriden. Irrial.
&g. IftiIo.
Sorriden. SorriIi, lUg. SonIIo.
Saddi'ficlele, Saddhili. lUg. IWcti:rilO.
..... Legen. Le.i.
BIi
LIMo.
1:1 .... Ji3ai. 1I6g. JIetto.
Oorngere, CoInIIi.
1I6g. Cozntto.
PIotegere. PIot.eB.
1I6g. ~ .
Regen. Belli.
1I6g. lWto.
Rll .... Bi1eE.
1I6g. BiWto.
8onegeIe. &rn.l.
1I6g. Sorretto.
8ccmegere, Soozrai.
lUg. Boomtto.
..",.. Jrqere. Jlni.
1I6g
Dt;f.
Emergere. Emeni.
1I6g. Jilmeno.
I:mmerpn. Immeni.
lUg. 1Dameno.
Dimerpre. Dimeni.
. &g.
Dimeno.
Bommergere, Bommend.
&g. SomDuno.
Tergere. Teni,
~ .
TtIao.
, .Aapergere. AIpeni.
lUg. .ABpano.
AnIrgen.
AIterIi, 1I6g. Adeno.
DetergeN. Deteai.
lUg. Deteno.
..""... :Me&tere. :Miei. ~ .
Mao
Ammetten. AmmiIi.
&g. Ammao.
.AJmettare. AmlC!lli. r. &g. .AJmao
CommettaN. CommiIi.
& g ~ eomme.o.
01 boat IIWe _ Ia tile Iaapap. - vert. fIIIIlIDc Ia .,ere oft8Il ~ tIM
., wbeD tile 1bIIcnrIac .......... or " .. ,..,.., """'" or "".,., "..,c.
Digitl,ed by Coogle
.lPPIIII1DD:. 21S
......
JdB, 1' .... htue. 1' .........
Colmettare, CoJlJleE, r. &g. CoDJ1_,r.
Dimettare, DimiIIi, &g. DimeBao.
DiametteIe, DimDiai, &g. DiImeeao.
1'Iammettare, FrammiBi, &g.
bammlltlllO.

Intromettare, Intromiai, &g. Introm_.
PromettUe, Promiai, &g.
Prom_.
,
Rimettere, Rimiai, &g.
Rim_.
800mmettare, Soommiai, &g.
Soomm_.
800Dnettare, SooJlJle.i, r. &g. SooJlJl_.
Sprometten, Bpromiai, &g. Bp!'ODle.G.
-IwtIere. Kordere, MorBi, &g. MOllO.
Rimordere, RimorBi, &g. Rimono.
..m. Morhe, Morii, Morro, Mono.
MoIBi, Moverb,
)(08).
Naoqui, NBIOIri, Nato.
-frlre.
0I'J:ire, Ofl'erai, r. &g. Ol'erto.
SoIrire, Sol'end, r. &g. Bo&rto.
-ffrire. Proferire, Profimli, r. &g. Prot'erito.
Ri&rfn, Rifeni, r. &g.
. Biterito.
........ Opprimere,
Oppnad, &g. Opprao.
00mp1'imen, Compral, &g. Comprao.
l!lsp.rimen, EIprai, &g. :r.pre.o.
Imprlmere, ImpnlBi, &g. Imprao.
Daprimen, DepnlBi, &g. Deprao.
..
Beprlmere, RepnIBi, &g Reprao.
RecUmere, RedeDai, r. &g. Redanto.
...... Parere, Parri, ParrO, Pam, r
....... Perdere,
Peni, r. BIg. Peno, r.
Diaperdere, Diaperai, &g Dilpeno.
...,.,.
Piaoare, Piaoqui, &g. Piaoiuto.
Compiaoere, Oompiaoqul, &g. Oompiaoiuto.
Dilpiaoere, Diapiacqui, &g. Diapiac:iuto.
GiaoaN, Giacqui, &g. Giaoiuto.
Bipiaoen,.
Ripiacqul, &g. Ripiaciuto.
8piaoere,.
Bpiaoqul, ll#g. Bpiaciuto.
Taoere,
Taoqai, RIg Taoiuto.
..,... PiaDgere,
Pfaui, RIg. PiaDto.
DigitIZed by Coogle
IU APPJDma.
,......
Ida hat. h ..... 1' ........
J'raupe, Fraui, BIg Franto.
..... PiDpre, Pbud, RIg. PiDto.
DipiDpe, DipiDli, RIg. Dipinto.
AttiDpn, Attiui, RIg. Attmto.

TiDIi, RIg.

RitiDgere, Ritbtai, RIg. Ri&iDto.
StriDgere, StriDai, RIg. Stzeito.
Fbapn, FiDei, RIg. Finto.
1DiDpe, 1Idlui, BIg. lDfiD.to.
\
CiDpe, CiIIIi, RIg. Cinto.
"
AoaiDpn, AcciDIi, 1&g. .A.ccmto.
InciDgere, InciDIi, RIg. lDciDto.
RiciDgere, RiciDIi, RIg. Biainto.
SciDpe, SoiDIi, RIg. Scinto.
SpiDgere, SpiDli, RIg. SpiDto.
BeBpiDpn, RespiDIi, RIg. Beapinto.
&.piDgere, SoepiDIi, RIg. SoIpiD.to
..AatriDgere, AItriDIi, RIg. Aatntto.
Coatrinpn, CoetriDIi, RIg. Coeaetto.
DiatriDgere, DiItriui, RIg. DiItntto.
RiatriDgere, RiatriDIi, RIg.
I Bistretto.
-mw.. PiGnre,
Piona, ,..
RIg. Piovu.to.
-otere. POHle,- Potei, Potrb, Potuto.
-Orgttw. Porgere, Poni, Porgerb, Porto.
Aocorgere, Acconi, RIg. Aooorio.
AIIorgere, AIIorsi, RIg. .A.orio.
B.iIorgere, lUIoni, BIg. Riaorio.
SooJr,ere, Sconi, RIg. Soorio.
Scqse, Soni, &g. Bono.
-Om. Pone,a Poai, Porro, POeto.
<lomparre,. Compoai, Comporrb, CoIapoeto
. Opporre,- Oppoai, Opporrb, Oppoeto.
Sooaporre,- Soompoai, Soomporro, Sooapoato.
IDtarporre,- Interpoei, Intarpom, mtarpoeto
....... SoiDdere,
SoiDIi,' RIg. SoiDto
.. '
"JJdIaUore, 11114 Cllll71a IIIi I1drd
.. ,
DigitIZed by Coogle
APPDDIL 116
,.....
ImIII. I'ut. hnn.
:bat M'o
Diacindere, DiIciDai,
1l9.
Diacinto.
Resoindere, ReIcinsi, &g. Resointo.
Ri1lettei, &g. Riflettuto.
1Dflettere, ID1lettei, &g. lDfleBBO.
OircoD1lettere, OirooD1l.ettei, Reg. Okecm1lao.
Genu1lettere, Genu4ettei, Reg. Genu1leaao.
-fd,g",. RiCuJgere, Rifulsi, Reg.
JJV.
...... Rilucere,
RilWlli, ,..
&g.
JJV.
-maere. Rimaneret Rimaai , Rimarrb, Rimaato.
-Imtlere. Riapondere, Rispoei, Reg. lU8poeto.
-Mere. Rodere, Roei, Reg. Roao.
Oonodere,
Oorrosi, .
Reg. 00n0I0.
Ruppi, Reg. Botto.
Oonompere, Oorruppi, Reg. Oonotto.
Dirompere, Dirappi, &g. Dirotto.
. Iniaftompere, Interruppi, :&g Intarrotto.
Proruppi, Reg. ProroUo.
-Glln.
Salire &
.. .,
Salii, &g. Balito.
.A8Ia1ire &
. ,
AMaJii , &g. AIaalito.
SopruBalire,& Sopraaalii, :&g.

RilaJiret
RiIalii,
1l9. Rialito.
...,ere. S!reperet Seppi, Baprb, Sapu.t6.
-eglief'e. Scegliere,& Soe1si, Reg. 8oelto.
Preaeegliere,& Prescelai, Reg. P.aoelto.

Trucelai, :&g. Truoelto.
-Oglief'e. Scioglieret Sciolsi,
1l9. 8eiolto.
Dilciagliere,& Dillciolsi, &g. Diloiolto.
Proaciolsi, Reg. Proaciolto.
-lwre. ScriIIBi,
1&0.
8erit&o.
AIori,.,re, .AJcriEi,
1l9.
.Aaitto.
OoeoriTere, 00II0riBBi,
1l9.
ec.cruto.
DeIoriTere, Deecriaai, &g. Deaitto.
Isorivere, IacriBIi, Reg. Iaitto.
Pnecrivere, Preacriad, Reg. P!eearitto.
Pzuaarivere, PzoacriIai, &g. PrGearitto.
Riaarivere, RiIcriIIi, Reg. Riaaritto.
Soeorivere, SoecriIIIi, Reg. 8oacritto.
DigitIZed by Coogle
118
...... baa. hmn. .....
Sotacrif8le, 119. Bottolcritto
....aw.. Soaotare, SooIai, Sooterb, Soo.o.
Pemaotere, ParcoMi, Percuoterb, Parco.o.
BiIaaotere, RiIooeai, BileuOMrO, B.iIcoIao
..... Seguin,- Sagaii, 119. 8egaito.
CoaIeguire.a CoDllllgllii, 119. Coll8egllUo.
PIoIeguire,. Proeeguii, 119. P1'oIIegaito.
Suaeguire,- SIIIIIIg'IIii, 119. 8uBeguito.
Dolan,- Dolai, Dozm, Doluto.
SoJen, Dtf. Dt;f. Solito.
VoIaIe, Volli, Vorrb, Voluto.
-Grgtn. Spargere, Spani, 119. Spano
...... 8pegneze,- 8paoai, 119. 8paa.to.
-iIggerI. 8truggere, StnuIi, 119. Btrutio,
DiItruggere, Diatruai, 119. Dimutio.
..... Tenere,- Temd, 'larrb, 'rmuto.
Appanenere,a Appariemli, Apparlerrb, Apparielluto.
AtteDni, Atterm, Attelluto.
Contenere,- ConteDni, Conterrb, Contenuto.
Ditenere,. DiteDni, Diterrb, Ditelluto.
Mantenere,- ManteDni, Manterrb, Kautenuto.
Ottenare,- Ottenni, Otterm, Ottanuto.
Bitenere,- BiteDni, Biterrb, Ritenuto.
8oetenare,. 8oetemd, Soeterrb, 8oetenuto.
-oglilre. Cogliare,t Colai, OogllerO, Colto.t
Aooogliare, Acoolai, Acoogliem, Acoolto.
Bioogliare, Ricolai, Ricogliem, Bicolto.
Togliare, Tolai, Torrb, r. Tolto.
DiBtogliare, Diatolai, Diatom, Diatolto.
Bitogliare, RiBtolai; Bitorrb, Bitolto
..m:.r.. Toroere, Torsi, 119. Torto.
Attorcere, Atiorsi, 119. Attiorio.
. Contorcere, Contonl, 119. Contorto.
Dinoroere, Diatorei, 119. DiRorto.
*II! &be PMlIlll4I1dare Ii maUl JW eoIUo, ... aolUo, ..
t 0fteD wrI&ta corre.
l'!be 0 III tbtII put lJIIriIoIpIe IIu II IIban 1WIId. CdUo fa aII4 III JO*7 ..

DigitIZed by Coogle
...
APPD'DIL 21'1
~ JlUIB. Mt. htan.
:PUt""'
JIlItorcere, 1I'iItorIi, Reg. Eatorto.
ltitorcere, Ritoni, Reg. Ritorto.
8t0r0ere, 8tom, Reg. Storto.
-Grre.
Tra.!1'e. - .
'l'ruIi, TrarrO. Tratto.
Aatrarre.- Aatraaai,
.AstrarM.
Aatratto
Attrarre,- Attruei, AttrarrO, Attratto.
Oontrarre,-
. Oontruei,
OontrarrO, Oontratto.
Detrarre,- Detruei, DetrarrO, D'etratto.
Eetrarre.
F.etra.i, EstrarrO, Estratto.
Ritralre,- Ritruei, RitrarrO, Ritratto.
Protrarre,- Protruei, ProtrarrO, Protratto.
Bottrarre,- Bottruei, 8ottrarrO, 8ottratto.
-Were.
Aaddere. Aadai, Reg. AEiIo.
Uccidere, Ucciai, Reg. Ucciso.
Oonquidere, Oonquiai. &g . Oonquilo
Decf.ciere, Decisi ,
. Reg.
Deci8o.
Precidere. PreciIi, Reg. Pnmao.
Recidere. Reoisi, Reg. BeciIo.
Ucoidere,
Uccisi. Reg. Ucciso.
........
Udire,- Udii, UdrO, U"dito.
....... Vb-ere, ViIIIi, Reg. VJllJuto, r.
Oonvivere, Oonn.i, Reg. Oonvivuto.
Rivivere, Rin.i, &g. Rivivuto.
Bopravvivere, Bopravvillli, &g . 8opravvivuto.
...... Vedere,- Vidi, VedrO, Veduto.
Antivedere, Antividi, AntivedrO, Antiveduto.
Avvedere, Avvidi, AvvedrO, Avveduto.
Divedere, Dividi. Divedril, Diveduto.
Provvedere. Provvidi, ProvvedrO, Provveduto.
Prevedere, Previdi, PrevedrO, Preveduto.
Ravvedere,. Ravvidi, RavvedrO, Ravveduto.
8provvedere,. Sprovvidi, SprovvecIeri, Sprovveduto.
Travedere.- Travidi, TravedrO, Traveduto.
Sedere,. 8ed-ei, etti, Sedro, 8eduto.
Riledere,. &g. RiJedr(), Riseduto.
POlledere, PoIIeciei, Poesedrb, POIIeduto.
lIdeaUft ......
DigitIZed by Coogle
218
....... JdL hnn. .......
Sopruaeclen,. Bopruaedei, SopraaaecJm, Bo...-Iuto.
.. n. Vadn, Vemai, Verrb, V.uto.
AneDiJe,. AneDDi, An.uto.
Addiftaire,a AclcIivemrl, AddiTerrb, Addi1'eDuto.
CoD'ftIDIre, Con1'8llDi, CoDterrb, ConV8lluto.
DiftDiJe,a Divemrl, Di1'erriI, DiTenuto.
PNnahe,a PNreDDi, Pn'f'erri), PreveDuto.
PIo1'eaire,. PIoYemai, ProvarM, Plftauto.
Rin'ftlDlre,a Bin1'8llDi, Binterrb, RiImIIluto.
Sopra1'1'l!llhe,. Bopranaauto.
aon.un,a Sonaani, Bonerri), Soneau.to
..-.... ViDcare, Va, &g. V.to.
Anincere, Aniui, &g. Aninto.
OoIl1'incere, Con'f'iDli, &g. Co1l1'into
......... UICire,a Uaoii, &g. Ueaito.
Bi1IIIGire,a RilllCii, &g. Riucit9.
VoIgen, Volli, &g. Volto.
AnoJgere, A1'1'olIi,&g. Anolto.
Imolgere, In1'OJai, &g. . Imolto.
81'Olgere, 81'oJai, &g. SYOlto.
Tla1'Olgere, Tra1'OlIi, &g. TIavolto.
VJ:BBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION WITH THE
ACCENT ON THE LAST SYLLABLE BUT ONE.
Calero, Godero, Sedere, Tenere,
Cadare, Parere, Bolere, Valere,
Dolen, Piacere, &adere, Vedere,
Dovere, Potere, Tacere, Volere.
Giaoere, Sapere, Temere,
REGULAR VERBS 01' THE THIRD CONJUGATION.
Couantirll, Dormire, Pentirai, Sdrooire, Veatire.
ConventirQ, Fuggire, Segu.ire, Semre,
Cuc1re, Partire,. Sentire, Borfue,
With their oolBpounda; ..,
DigitIZed by Coogle
APPDDIL
219
LIST 011' EXOEPrIONAL JRRBGULABlTIFB OJ' V1mBS.
Atltlwn, formerly
Prelent Ind. AtIduco,: tztltI1u:i, tIIItlvee, tultlut:iGmo, ___ ,
tJt1dw:oM. -- -
Imperfect. addUMJi, atltltu:etHJ, tMltJu,.
cet1tIte-, addtu:eVa7lO.
hulurre, like tIIltlurre.
DedutTe, like addurre.
CInulut'f'e, like adtlurre.
Produrre,like atldurre.
Dire, tormerly tlicere.
Preeent Ind. Dico, did, dice, tlidt.rmo, dite, tlieono.
Imperfect. Dict:rxz
Btmtlire, like dire.
Benlire. Two present, one in iIco, the other like dire.
Contraddire, like lJerudire.
Maldire, like dire.
MalerIire, like dire.
Pretlire, like dire.
Bere, tOl'JDll the present and imperfect, fJom 6evere. B_, 6eoi

Colere, defective verb, tUed only in the third per8Ol)8 j as, t.Gle,
calewJ, cal_, Cllglill, CtJlu8e.
Yam, Prell. Ind. Valgo, wi, tHIle, ualiGmo, tHIleIe,- txU!JOftO, or
fJaglioM.
PretHJlere, like fJfJkre.
Riedere, defective verb, 1llI8d only in the present indicative and
lIubjunctive, and in the imperfect.
Cucire, Prell. Ind. Oucio, cud, cuc:e, cru:it.mIo, cucite, cucimIo.
&ut:ire, like cudre.
&lrucire, like cudre.
lJorJere, Prell. Ind. DerJO, or UIJIJo, deDi, iefJe, tloIiJiGmD, tltIw.Ie,
derxmo.
Prell. Sub. lJtIJbG, tW6G, tW6G, do61JitImo, iDNIiate, tW6Gno or
ilefJtmo.
In poetry, it ill 1llI8d, dtggio, dei, dee, MggitImo; demIo, .,.
giono, or detmo.
SoelItt.re, Pr.lD.d. &ello or 1tIelgo, 1Wlli, "',-MllifImo, 1WllfIe,
nelltmo, or nel!JOftO.
DigitIZed by Coogle
DieelM, lib ..... .
Gin, DeC. Va. It ... 0DJ.y';-,,-, giU, ill the two ,...
.. - iJa,..me. It .... 7 be 1IlppU.d bJ the !Au ftl'b
.... ; u, tHIlo, ., till,""', giU, t1GJIftO.
JItwitw, Plea. ID4. .Muro or DIIIDiD, .....,.;, 1IIVDt'W, fIIOr'iGru.
moriIe, fJIUOf'OIIO or MIIOiono.
PtII'Ire, PnI. Ind. PtJio,,.n, pm'8, ptIf"ilItno,,..., ,..".0 or
ptIifto.
PitIt:Ire, PnI. Ind. PitM:cio, piei,,-, pilciarao, pitIctIe, ,;...
dDM.
Plea. Sob. PitIa:itJ, pitlt:t:itl,,;.cc;., ,;...
citmo.
Imperative. PiIId,,uxa., piGct:itImo,
CompiGcen:, like pitItJere.
DilpitJt:ere, like pitItJere.
GitJcere, like pitItJere.
BipitM:ere, like piI.are.
BjIitare, like piI.are.
TtJt:ere, like piI.are.
PtIItn, PnI. Ind. POlIO, poi, ",.,u-o, ptltde, fHJ"OIIII.
PnI. Bllb. POlIti, poutz, PO'''', pouatI.
Imperative. POIMJ, politi, pouitzmD, po ...
p""." from ptmere.
PnI. Ind. POJ&8O, poRi, fIO'I*, fHYIWOIIO.
Imperfect. PtmeVtI, ptnI8f'i, po1IIH
ComporTe, like porre.
Opporre, like porre.
&:omporre, like port'l.
It&terporn, like porre.
RimtIratJrI, Ptea. Ind. Bimtmgo, rimai, rimtms, f'ItIIIJaiGmo.
rimtmetI, rimtmgtmo.
&lire, PnI. Ind. 8tz.{fo or 1tIliIctJ, Nli or..rilci, ifill or 1tIIiIrA.
roglitzmD, 1tIliIe, lIIlgcmo-or 1fIliIc:01lO
PnI. Sa.b. &(fe, ralgG. '., roglitzmo, roglitzt. or ".""
ralgGno.
AuGlire, like MIlin.
8oprtzutz1irt, like 1fIlire.
RiMIire, lib 1fIlire.
DigitIZed by Coogle
8Iptre, PnI. Ind. Bo,";, N, ... , 1ItIJItIO.
PreI. Sab. s.p,itI, 1fIJI1IJicnto, 1tIpPiste,1ItIppimw.
Imperati'N. Sappi,.,
211
,
Ihg&re or xern, PnI. Ind. &eIgo. 1flIi, lflie, leW...",
1fI'"'-,
Prell. Bub. or lfllia, or lfllit.mo.
Imperative. $agli, .. or lfIu, IflliIImo, IClfllitU, __
gfIIUI or _gli_.
1CfJgliere.
like IClflliere.
IJeiDglitJre or Idorre, PnI. Ind. &iolgo or ICioglio, ICiogli,
gie, 1ICOg1iamo, at:itJglide, at:iolgo'IUI or _glitmo.
DUciogliere, like _gliere.
ProIdoglWe, like Idogliere.
&pire, PnI. Ind. 8egvD or 1ieguD, upi or ... , .... or
Iiegue; MgUOftO or Iieguono.
Coueguire, like gUire.
PergUire, like gUire.
like gUire. "
like gUire.
Dolere, PnI. Ind. Dolgo, tivoli, tluole, iDglillmo, iDiete, iMgorw.
PnI. Sub. Dolg", dolg", doF, dogliflmlJ, doglillU, dolgmao.
Volere, PnI. Ind. Yoglio or tIO, woi, wole, f1oglillmo, t1Olete,
f1oglitmo.
PnI. Bub. Vogu, tIOfIu, tIOfIlia, tIOglillmo, f1oglillle, fNl!lliIIJIo
Imperative. Vogli, tIOfIu, tIOglillmo, tIOfIliIIIe, f1oglifllUl.
PnI Ind. 'JH!rM, tpepifImo, ..",..,.,
1JIrIf!IOfII'.
7aere, PnI. Ind. Tmgo,IiIRi, Iiene, tMifImo, *"'",Ienf!ortD.
APJHIt'IeItert, like tefter8
.Atterwe, like tefter8.
OmteMre, like tefter8.
DiItm,ere, like tefter8.
like tefter8.
ou--e, like tefter8.
RiIeun, like
&Itasere, like ......
7Nrre, ft:om "..,." PnI. Ind. 7l'wo, tM, "., 1nIIitawI,
".",., 1rtIggtnto.
DigitIZed by Coogle
.AIItwn, like Ir'tIrn.
AUrtIrre, like trarre.
Cntnrrre, like tram.
Detrarr" like trarre.
:&mitT" like trtlt'rtJ.
Ritran-e, like IrtJrrtJ.
Protr'tIrrtJ, like trtJrrtJ.
&ttrarre, like trtlt'rtJ.
Utlire, PnI. Ind. Otlo, odi, oM, vtlitJrno, vdite, odtmD.
Uuire, PnI. Ind. E&co, uc:i, tJ6CtJ, usdGmo, tIIGte, "COM.
R;uaoire, like ....,.
'Yedere, PnI. Ind. 'Yeclo, wggo or ""!/!foI, _, __ , tItJfliGmo or
fJe!JgiflfllO, verleu, fJe!JgtnIO or tJIfIgiono.
A1Itivedere, like Wtkre.
Auwdenr, like .... .
RitJedere, like .... .
PrOf1fJtJflere, like Wtkre.
Prewtlere, like ".e.
Rmmetlere, like "edere.
Imprf1l1f1et1ere, like .... .
7hn1ct1ere, like .... .
&dere, PnI. Ind. ~ or uggo, 1iMli, riede, Mlieto, . ..,.,
.wJono or ."tmo.
RUetIere, like .we.
POI .... , like MJIlere.
Boprtu __ , like .we.
'YtJftire, PnlInd. YMge,.,;"n,.,." Wftiamo, tItJIIite,.".....
Awmi,." like wmre.
AtUitJeAire, like .",.;re.
Om.",.;re, like wraire.
lJiwnire, like .",.;re.
Pf'tJfHIJ&ire, like wnir,.
Prownir" like wni,.,.
Riwni,." like wraire.
Binwni,." like tItJIIire.
8ortItJIIi"" like wraire.
&pt IIDDI1eJUnr, like wraire.
~ , like WIIire.
DigitIZed by Coogle
HASCULINE NOUNS ENDING IN A.
.Amacoreta, -
ADagramma,
.Analemma,
Ana __ ,
.An.tagoniBta, -
Apoetata,-
Apoetema,
Apotegma,
Artiata,
AaIioma,
Aama,
AtaiIta,-
Ateroma,
Automa,
&rea,
Calvinista, -
Chitarrista, -
Clima,
Deicida,-
Delata.-
Dfadema,
Dilemma,
Diploma,
Domma,
Dramma.,
Duca.
Emblema,
Enimma,
Epigramma,
EDsimena,
Entomata,
Eremita,-
Ereaiarca ,
Fantaama,-
Fiamia,
Fraticida,-
Geau.ita,
ldioma,
ldiota,-
Ippocrita,-
1rIacchiDi8ta, -
MateriaJista"
Matricida, -
. OIl&l'Oa,
-
Omicida.
Papa.
Parricida, -
Patriarca,
Patriotta,
Pianeta,-
Poeta,
Poema,
Priama,
Problema,
Proclama,
Profeta,
Programma,
Realista,-
Regicida,-
Beuma,
Scimna,
Sistema,
SoSema,
Sofista,
Sperma,
Stemma,
Stntagemma,
Tema,
Teonm&,
Tetra.rca,
Timiama.
NOUNS ENDING IN CO AND GO, WHICH TAKE OR
REJEOT THE H.
Analogo,
Apologo,
Astrologo,
Chi:rurgo,
Dialogo,
I
Dittongo,
Domeati.co,
EquiTOCO,
Farmaco,
JrfeDdico,
Monaco,
Pratico,
Becip!OCO,
Salvati.co,
Stati.co.
DigitIZed by Coogle
AMDo,
JIn,ooIo,
BacWlo,
Oe.Jcapo,
Oarm,
0u&eU0,
Oenbio,
CIneIlo,
Oiglio,
Colte1lo,
Oomapdam8Dto,
Como,
Oaoio,
DiteUo,
Dito,
mo,
"ODdam.to,
I'rammcmto,
FruttQ,
l'iii0,
Geeto,
Ginooohio,
Gomito,
Granello,
Grldo,
Gucio,
IAbbro.
Lepo,
Leamolo.
Letto,
KemhIo,
:Mulino,
)[UIO,
0re0aId0,
0.0,
Peocato,
Pomo,
Prato,
Pagao,
QqadnDo,
RiIo,
Sa.ooo.
Strldo,
TiDo,
Urlo,
V .. ,
VeRimeDto.
NOUNS .AND .ADJE<1.In'ES ENDING IN CO .AlQ) 60
PRBCJm:ID BY A VOWEL, wmCH TAKE AN H IN
THB PLURAL.
Abaoo.
Abbaco,
Antioo,
Aprico,
BecoaIao,
Cacluoo,
Carioo,
. Cutiso,
C&talogo,
Dialogo,
Dbnentioo,
DittoDgo,
I'armaoo,
Fondaoo,
Impiego,
Intrigo,
JrfaDioo,
)[onologo.
Obbligo.
Opaoo,
Parrooo,
PeIago,
Pedano.
Publico.
Preeago,
Prodigo,
Prolago.
Pudioo,
Bammarioo,
Ripiego,
Bacrilego,
Scarioo.
Stomaoo.
TraIioo,
Ubbriaoo,
Ulbergo.
DigitIZed by Coogle
Abate,
Barone,
Cane,
Canonico,
Cantante,
Oonte,
Dio,
Diavolo,
Dottore,
Duca,
Elefante,
:Broe,
Pattore,
I'iboib,
AcarIIa.
q"",.
&i.
e...
ColIeuo.
Dati.
Delti.
ErctJ.
Fello.
Pule.
Legs.
Ugge.
LtM.
- Leuo.
, Mlle.
M.".
PIMXI.
PIICO.
APPJD1DlL
IB.UGULAR F.DfININliB.
Bacleaaa. Gallo, Gallina.
Baron ... Leone, Leon ...
0agDa. Marohele, March ...
CanoDichelBa. Mercanie, Mercantaa.
Cantatrice. Oate, one.a.
Contaa. Padrone, PachoDa.
Dea.. Papa, Papell&.
Diavol ... Pavone, Pagon ...
Dottore.a. Principe, Principell&.
Duohell&. Pastore, PutonUa.
Elefante.&. Priore, PrioreIIa.
Eroina. Proteta, ~ .
Pattore.a. Be, Regina.
1'il000i'8IIa. Sa.rtore, Sarta.
* 11114 0lIl7 til c1erfIIaa.
LIST OP EQUIVOCAL WORDS.
Elite, in met.
AD .
He cu. into alioeI.
Thou drinkest.
Wax.
LiWe hill.
Thou didst give.
Words.
Bait.
Redid it.
You did it.
Hebinda.
lAw.
Boiled.
Bed.
Apples.
:Mules.
The8lhing.
I fIah.
Emonopm.
ReaccepU.
He""
Beautitlll.
.Aspect.
Collected.
Awaken.
I gave.
Go out.
Pelon.
I'elti.ftlII.
A league.
Henadl.
Izead.
Read.
. Honey.
1Ianeaf;.
A peach.
A pea.oh-bee.
DigitIZed by Coogle
iiS APPDDIL
Palc. Trampled. Plague.
Tac. l!'ear.
Theme .
TIIIIi. Thour.r.t. Thanes.
YW-
I watch. Oldmm.
Yello. See him. A.1kin.
Yali.
TwentJ
WindL
o dole.
o 0JIffI.
ACCIWf'e. He ruJI8. Tonoeive
Attrto. I shorten. Prudent.
Bolte. Acuk. BloWi
Colla. With the. Glue.
Colle. With the. A hill.
Collo. With the. Neck.
Coloro. I color. ThOle.
ColIo. Refined. Gathered.
Corn. Heruna. To gather.
Co_.
Ii; ooeta. AnD.
Folia. Crowd. Iclo it.
Foue. Were he. Ditchea.
bulotlo. Induced. Ignorant.
. Dna. Now, hour. He pra)'l
Omo. To &dom. Arid ...
Poni. To put one'8118lf'. IoI'tnd.
Po.e. He put. FalllBl.
Poli. I put. Utt him reate
PoRa. Placed.
The poat.of&oe
Ricorre. He baa reooune. Hereapa.
JljpoIi. I conoeaJ.ed. Rests.
RoMI. Rotten. A rose.
&opo. laweep. Scope.
Bole. Theaan. He is aocuatomed.
80M. I am. I pJay.
-Torno. Uill. Volume.
TOfTe A tower. To take away.
. Torta.
A pie. Twisted.
Vop. The p1ebeiaDa.
I tum.;
Volto. Face. Tamed.
VoID.
Vow. Vacant.
DigitIZed by Coogle
EXTRAOT FBOM:
IL OARMAGNOLA OF MANZONI.
o mUe, ... il Cielo
Che pel' TOi IOle ei m'e tremendo. A.VV8ZlO
10 IOD. da lungo a contemplar 1& marte,
E ad aapettar1&. A.h! 101 pel' voi biaogno
Ho eli coraggio; e voi - voi non varrete
Tormelo, e varo? A.llor ohe Idelio lUi buoDi
Fa oader 1& 1ICiagum, ei dona &Bcora
n cor eli I08tener1&. A.h! pari il VOIItro
A.lla IICiagum or aia. Godiam eli queeto
Abbraccia.manto: e un don del Cielo anch' ao.
Figlia, tu piangi; e tu COBlOrie! A.h! quando
Ti feci mia, II8I'eIli i giorni tuoi
Soorna.no in pace ; - io ti ohiamai compagua.
Del mio tristo destin: queeto peDlliero
}fi avveleaa n mom. Deb!lb' io Don veggia
Quanto pel' me II8i aventurata!
}: graa.de n tarto j
Mao perdona, e vedrai ohe in meao ai mali
Un' alta gioia &BCO riman. - La morie !
n pih crudel nemico altra non puote
Che accelerar1&. - Oh I gli uomiili non hanno
Inventata 1& morte: ella IJ&l'la
Rabbioea, inaopportabile : - dal Cielo
Ella ne viene, e l'accompagna ~ Cielo
Con tal cont'orto, ohe ne dar ne torre
Gli uomini ponno. - 0 BpoII&, 0 JIglia, - uelite
Le mie parole .trame: amare, il VIgio,
Vi piombano aul cor; ma un giorno anete
Qualche dolcezz& a rammentarle iDaieme.-
Tu BpoII&, viTi - il dolor vinci, e viTi ;
Qu8lta int'elice orba noD. aia del tutto :
Fagi da queeta terra, e toetO ai tuoi
. La riconduci - ella e lor a a n g u e ~ ad .-
Foeti al cara un eli : - COBlOrie poecia
Del lor namico, il foeti men; Ie crude
227
DigitIZed by Coogle
228
Ja eli saio and feul pua tempo
De' Oarmapola e de' ViIaoDti n DOJIle.-
tu riedi int'elice; n triato ~ t t o
Dell' odio ~ tolto : - ~ un gran Pder Ja mone.
111 a, teDero ftor, a alae Cral'armi
A nJIesran n JDio pelllier .-in,-
Tu chiDi n capo; - oh! la Mmpelta rage
Sopn. eli te- tu tnmi, eel al aiDgalto
pm DOll "B88 n tuo .. - .. to aul petta
La ae infocate lagrim.e ClIIdermi ;
111 telprle DOll polIO'; - a JD8 a II8IIlbri
Ohiecler p., Matilda; ah! nulla n padre
Pub &r per te ; - JII& pei diaerti, in cielo
V' ~ un padre, n .u. - Oodda in _, e'riri
Ai cD. tnnquilli, 18 DOD lieti.; ei aerto
Te Ii deItiDa. Ah I perah8 mai venato
Tutto n tomBte dell' aagoaai& am.
Sal tao .aWn, 18 DOD IIIrbule al nato
Tutt. Ja IUA ~ 7 - Yin, eGIIIIOIa
QaIIfa cloleate madre. - Oh ab' ella un giorno
A un cIepo .. ti ooncluea in bneeio ! - ..
OORO.
S' OD. a deatra uno aquillo eli tromba ;
A IiDfma. riIponde uno aqui1lo :
D'ambo i Jati oalpeato rimbomba
Da caftlli. e da fanti n temm.
Quinoi I!p1IDta per l'aria. lID ?8i1l0 ;
Qaindi. un altro I' alaD. spiegatO:.
lIIcco appare \m drappello aohierato ;
Jilcoo un altro che inC!ODtro gli nan.
Ga eli meao sparito ~ n terreno ;
Ga Ie apade rispiDgon Ie spade ;
L'un dell'altro Ie immerge nelllellO;
(honda n lIImgIle; mddoppia n ferir.-
Chi lOB .7 Alle belle oonVacIe
Qual De veane lIfnniero a In- guerra 7
DigitIZed by Coogle
..
APPJIIJIDIL
Qual quai che ha giarato, Ja tan.
Dove ueque, &or .ba, 0 morir!
D'1IDA tan. IOJl tutti: un 1iDgaagio
PwJan tutti: frate1li Ii dioe
Lo 1InDiero: n oommune ligDagg10
A ognun d' .. dal TOlto traap&l'.
terra fa a tutti nudrioe,
Questi terra di B&Dg1le ora intriJa,
Natura dall' aUn ha divila ..
E recinta coU' Alpe e col mar.
Am! Qual d' .. n II&C!rilego brando
n primo n fratello a ferire!
Oh terror ! Del ocmftitto 888OI&II.do
1:.. oagione 888OI&II.da qual' 81-
]a 1I&IUlO: a dar moria. a morhe
Qui .... ira ognun d's V8Iluto ;
B veaduto ad un duoe veaduto.
Con lui papa, e DOD chiede n
Am mmtura ! )Ia BpOII8 DOD hamIo
Non han m.acJri gli stolti guer.riari !
mtte i lor earl DOD'VUIDO
Dall'ignobile campo a Btrapp&l'!
E i yeg1iardi che ai caati peuieri
Della tomba p lIOhiudon ]a mente,
OW tentan ]a turba furenta
Con prudeD.ti parole p1acar ,-
Come 8IIiIo Wvolta n villano
Sulla porta del cheto abituro
Segua. n Il8IIlbo che II08DCle lontano
Sovra i eampi che arati ei DOD ha i
Coal uchesti oiucun che aicuo
Vade lungi Ie armata coorti,
Baooontar Ie migliaia de'morti,
E ]a dell'ane
U. pendenti dal]abbro materno
Vedi i &gU. ahe imparano intenti '
A diatinguer con nomi di achemo
Quai che andranno ad uooidere un di ,
-
DigitIZed by Coogle
Qui, Ie doDae, alle vegUe lacenti
Dei JIlOIlIll &.r pompa e dei uti,
Ohe aile deJUle deaene del. Witi
n marito 0 l'aaumte rapi. -
A.hi aventura! lVentum! aventura f
Gala terra coperta..d'ucciai;
Tutta I&Ilgue la vasta-pianura;,
Creace n grido, raddoppia n furor.
}fa negli ordiDi manohi a diviai
Mal Ii tegge, gm cede 1UI& BOhlen. ;
Ga Del volgo, obe vincer diBpera,
DellLrita riDaace l'amor.
Come n grana lanciato dal piano
Ventilabro nell' aria Ii epande; ,
Tale intomo per I'ampio terreno
Si aparpagliano i vinti guerrier.
}fa improvv:iae terribili banda
.Ai fuggenti I'aft'accian aul calle;
}fa Ii Benton pin prtlllllO aile lpalle
Scalpitare n temuto deatrier.
Cadon-trepidi a dei nemici,
Rendon I'arme, Ii daIlIlo prigioni :
n clamor delle turbe vittrici
Copra i lai del tapino che muor.
Un cornaro aaJito in arcioni ;
Prende un foglio, n ripone, e'avvia,
Sfena, sproD.&, divora la via;
Ogni villa Ii deeta alromor.
tutti aul pesto cammino
. Dalle 0&88, dai campi accorrete ?
Ognun chiede COD anaia a1 vicino,
Che giOOODda Dovella recb ?
Donde ei veuga, infelici, n _pete,
E sperate cbe gioia favelli ! -
I tratelli hanno uccieo ifratelli :
Questa orrenda novella vi do.
Odo intomo t'eatevoH gridi ; .
S'oma n templo, a riauoD.& del canto ;
DigitIZed by Coogle

..
APPENDIX.
Gu. a'iDDAI_D dai cuori omicidi
Grazia 8d inni cha abbomiDa n Ciel.
Giu dal carohio dell;Alpi fiattanto
Lo ltaniero gIi sguardi rivolve ;
Vede i forti ahe mordon]a polve,
E Ii cont. eon gioia crudeI.-
Afi'rettat.evi, empite liIr aohiere,
Sospendete i trion! eel i giuoohi,
Ritornate alla V08tre bandiere ;
1.0 Itraniero disoenda; egIi e qal.
Vincitor ! Siete deboIi a poem?
}fa. per qQesto a sfidani ei diBcenda ;
E voglioeo a quai oompi v' attende
Ove n V08Ro fioatello perl. -
Tu che angusta a' tuOi figIi parevi \
Tu ahe in pace nutrirli non sai, .
Fatal terra, gli estranei riaevi:
Tal giudizio comincia per teo .
Un nemico che 01'880 non hai,
A tue m8lllle inBultando I' uside ;
Degli ltolti Ie spoglie divide;
Toglie n brando di mano a'tuoi reo
Stolto anch' eB80 ! Beata fa mai
Gente alcnna per langue ad oltraggio?
Solo a1 nnto non toocano i pi ;
Torna in pianto dell'lqIlio n gioir.
Ben t a l ~ r nellUperbo viaggio
Non I'abbatte I'eterna vendetta :
}fa. 10 segna; ma veglia ad upetta ;
}fa. 10 coglie all' estremo BOBpir.
Tutti fatti a aembianza d' un Solo;
FigIi tutti d' nn 8010 riBcatto,
In qual' ora, 'in qual parte del lUolo
Trasoorriamo quest' aura vital,
Siam fiatelli; siam stretti ad nn patto :
Maladetto oollli che 10 infiange,
Che 1'bm&1za su11iacco che piange,
Che COData uno spirto immortal !
. 231
DigitIZed by Coogle
282
APPDDIX.
EXTRACT FROM ALFIERI'B ORDmll
AlmCA. 1III.DD ogni quint' &DDO in Orela
Giuochi riDnova e II80CriIIii a Giove.
DeI\o eli g10ria e utmal vaglaa
Tragge a quellido II gioTinetto: a1 &moo
PiJade egli ha DOD elivilibil maio
Calda bmma d'onor nell' amp' arena
Sa. lieve ca.no a contrutar 10 apiDge
De' velooi COllier Dobil palma ;
Troppo a viDoere intento, ivi ,. vita
Per 1& vittoria ei 6 . . . . . . . .
Ferooe tzoppo, impuiente, inc.uto,
Or colla 'fOO8 miDaccw. iDeala,
Or del fIagel, _ aDgUinoIo ei ruota,
Si fOrte batte i deetrier lDoi mal domi
Oh' oltre 1& meta volano, pih ardenti
Quanto velooi pih. am IOIdi a1 &eno,
Git. BOrdi a1 grido, oh' ora invan gli aoqueta
loco Ipiran Ie D&ri; all' aura i oriDi
Bvolauan irti: e in deDIo nembo anolti
D'agonal polve, quanto it ftIto II circo,
Corron, ricorron come folgor ratti.
Spavento, orrora, ~ ICOmpiglio e morte
Per tutto arreca in lorti giri II ca.no
linohe pe1'COIIIIO con orribll urto
A marmorea colODD& II fervid' ...
Riveno Oreste c.dde
10 DOD dirb, come eli augue II piano
RiguIe, orribilmente atruciDato
PiJade 80001II8 invan f:ra Ie IDe braccia
Spirb l'amioo, ...
DigitIZed by Coogle
PBoNUNCLlTION,
AOODT,
RBADIlfG ExlmcJsJ:,
Nouns,
Definite Article,
INDEX.
Personal Pronouns; Auxiliary Verb to "litle,
Formation of the Plural,
POIIfIeII8i ve Pronouns,
Articles affixed to Prepoei.tions,
Auxili&ry Verb to II.,
Adjectives,.
Verbs, First CODjugation,
Demonstrative AdJectives,
Personal Pronouns,
Indelinite Article,.
Partitive Article,
Formation of the Plural, continued,
Months, Days, Ses.sons,
Irregular Verbs to go and to gi,,"
Conjunctive Pronouns,
Irregular Verbs to make and to .tay,
Use of the Definite Article,
Relative Pronouns,
Demonstrative Pronouns,
Regular Verbs of the Second Conjugation,
Omission of the Definite Article. - Interjections,
Conjunctions. .
Numeral AdjectiYe8,
11
!'.lO.
m
v
1
5
9
11.
18
14
16
19
21
22
24
27
80
82
85
86
88
89
41
48
46
48
51
54
50
57
08
60
DigitIZed by Coogle
234:
INDEX.
Interrogative PronOUlll, 64
BegaIar Verbs, Third Conjugation, 67
Hours of the Day : Halt put, quarter put, . quarter ot.. 68
Conjunctive PronOUII.I, continued,. 71
Table of Compound Conjunoti'Pll PronOUII.I, 78
Remarks on the Regular Verbs, 75
Collective and Distributive Numbers, 76
Ordinal Numbers, 78
Proportional Numbers, ,.... 79
Irregular Verbs, til
Agreement of Verbll. - Uee of the Imperfect and Perteet, 86
Comparatives. 89
Superlatives.. 92
Irregular Comparatives and Superlatives, 98
P.-ive Pronoull.l, continued, 95
Uee of the Subjunotive, 98
Past Partioiple,. ., . 102
Pormation of the Plural. continued, 105
Augmentatives and Diminutives, 108
Adverbs, . 111
Indetlnite PronOUII.I II.Ied substantively tor PeI'IIODIl, 116
Indefinite PronoUII.I used substantively for Things, 118
Indetlnite P r o n ~ used substantively for Persons and Things, -.111
Indetlnite PronoUII.III.Ied adjectively for Persons and Things, 124
Formation of the Feminine, 127
Prepositions di. II, 180
Prepositions dll, per, infuori, 183
Uee of the Third Person Feminine, 187
Idiomatio Expressions with the verbs IIl1ere, to have, and e"ere,
to be, 188
Of the Pronoun Ii, . . . . . . . . . . 140
Synonyms: Pear, }'HIura, timore; to rub, Btri!ftnare, dropicciare.
-Idiomatio Expressions with the Verbs andare, to go, and
atare, to stay.. . 141
Ellip8C!8,. 148
Idiomatlo ExpressioDS with the Verb dare, to give, .144
EUip!e!!, continued. . . . 146
DigitIZed by Coogle
,
INDEX. 235
Idiomatio Expressions with the verb fare, to make, 147
Diminution of Words, 149
Maxims and Figures of Speech,. 150
Diminution of Words, continued, 152
Maxims and Figures of Speech,. 153
Transposition of Words, 155
Synonyms: Step of a staircase, gradino, BeaUno,. 156
Derivation of Words, .158
Maxims and Figures, .. 159
Derivation of Words, continued, 161
Maxims and Figures, 162
Formation of Words,. 164
Maxims and Figures, .165
Maxims and Figures, 167
Synonyms: Servant, sertlitort, ,ertlo; devotion, detlOlJioM, di_
zione,. 168
Maxims and Figures, 170
Synonyms: Labor, fatica, tratloglio; proud, BUperOO; haughty,
dtiero,. 171
Maxims and Figures, 173
. Synonyms: Composition, eomporiziont, componilMflto; grati-
tude, gratitudine, ric01IOIel1lza,. 174
Maxims and Figures, 176
Synonyms: Leaf, fronda, foglia; purity, purita, purezzll ; ter-
ror, terrore, 'p4t1ento, 177
Maxims and Figures, 179
Synonyms: Lie, me1lzogna, bugia; light, luee, l_e; work,
latloro, opera; to go out, UBcire, .ortire, 181
Maxims and Figures, . 182
Synonyms: New, 1IUOtIO, 1I0fIello; shame, onta, tlerfJOflflo, .183
Maxims and Figures, .185
Synonyms: Crafty, a.tuto,furbo; first, primo, prim.jero, 186
Maxims and Figures. 188
Synonyms: To repeat, ripetere, replicare; relation. relaziont,
rapporio,. 189
Idiomatic Expresaions, .191
Idiomatic Expressions, .194
Conjunotion of the Auxiliary Verbs to Aatl' and to be, .197
In1leotions of the Regular Verba of the First, Second, and Third
CoDjugation, 199
DigitIZed by Coogle
236 INDEX.
Irregular Verbs of the Firat Conjugation. .201
Verbs of the 'l'bird Conjugation in which the termination ist:o is
in.u.pea.ble, . ~ . . . . . . 208
Verbs of the Third Conjugation with the preeent ending in o'or
ilco, . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 2()6
List of Irregular Verbs. 207
Verbs of the Second Conjugation with the accent on t h ~ Penulti-
mate. .218
Regular Verbs of the Third Conjugation.. 218
Exoeptional Irregularities ofVerbe. 219
Maaculine Nouns ending in a. 223
Nouns ending in co and go which take or reject the A in the Plural. 223
Maaculine Nouns with two Plurals. 224
Nouns ending in co and go which take an A in the Plural, though
preceded by Vowel, 224
Irregular Feminines. 225
List of Equivccal Words.. 225
Extract from Manzoni. 227
Extiract from Alflerl, . . . . 282
DigitIZed by Coogle

Italian Text-Books.
OllendorH"'s Italian Grammars.
PROIARY LESSONS IN LBABNING '1.'0 READ, WRITE,
:AND SPEAK. THB :ITALIAN LANGVAGBo IIIITBoDvaroaY
'-'0 '.l'IIII LABGu GBAlIJU.L By G. W. Gaun.
18mo. 238 pagel. Price fI8 cents.
eLLBNDORFP'S NEW lIIETHOD OF LEARNING '1.'0
BEAD, WRITE, AND SPEAK THE lTAL:lAN LAN-
GVAGE . WITH ADDITION. AND CoBRBOrIONB. By K. FZLtX Foaan, LL.D.
limo. 683 pages. Price,l 60. KEY-Price 76 cen1:l. Separate '901.
In Ollendorfl"'s grammars is for the first time presented a system
by which the student can acquire a conversational knowledge of
Italian. This will recommend them to practical students I while at
the same time there is no lack of rules and principles for those who
would pursue a systematic grammatical course with the view of
translating and writing the language.
Prot: Greene's Introduction should be taken up by youthful
elasses, for whom it is specially designed, the more difficult parts of
the course being lert for the larger volume.
The advanced work has been carefully revised by Prot: Forese,
who has made such emendations ad additions as the wants of the
country required. In many sections the services of an Italian teacher'
.cannot be obtained; the Ollendorft" Course and Key will there sup-
ply the want of a master in the most satisfactory manner.
Italian Reader.
A CoLLlOC7ll0. O. PIIIOIIS nr ITA.LIAlf PB08l1, DlO81Gmrn AS .\. BlOADmo-BooJt PO.
8TvD_ o. TWI IT'\'Lt.\.N LANQv.\.QIL
BY E. FELIX FORESTI, LL.D.
lamo. 298 pageL Price 11"
In making selections for this volume, Prof. Foresti has had re.
course to the modern writers of Italy rather than to the old school
of novelists, historians, and poets; his object being to present a
picture of the Italian language as it is written and spoken at the
present day. The literary taste of the compiler, and his judgment
all an instructor, have been brought to bear with the happiest re-
lUlu in this valuable Reader.
DigitIZed by Coogle
FRENCH EDUCATIONAL WORKS
.
PUBLI8IDD B1'
D APPLETON eli COMPANY .
... -...
Ollendorff's French Grammars.
'JB8T LEII8OlOJ III THE J'BDCR LAlfGl1AGE: BmIrO Alf llmIoDV_
." OLLDDO ..... 'I L.uan G&.UIlUL By G. W. Gil..... IGmo. 188 Ne&
Price 18 eent&
OtLDDOlLl'J"8 !lEW JIE'l'iOD 01' Laulmro ." BIIAD, Wun, AlfD 8PU11
'filii FIIDCIl LAKGV"'G.. W1TIl I'1JLL P ,uulaD U 'rIQ x.&VUII AlfD D
IIEGVLA" A.VXJLU.IIT, RU'LIII1rIVII, AlfD hIPIaeoll'u' V_ BT .1. L. .1_.
lft'T. 12mo. 408 PIl8"'" Price II SI!.
UT TO EXERCISES. Separate v"lume.' PrIce 'll5 cent&
IJLLDDOBFF'B !lEW KETllOD 01' Lummro ." BIIAD, lVun, AlfD 8PB-"1I
'filii FIIIIlfCll 4110V"'01l, W1TIl lf1JJlllllove CoIlllIlOTlOIla, ADIIrnolfB, A1fiI
1MPIIO?IIJIIIlf'III, IVl'fnLIIlJ01I TIlI8 Co11lft'llT. To WBlCIlllll -"DDIID, V "'LVII"
8T1T1111 01' FIIIIlfOIl PIIOlf1JlfOUTlOIl, ma GUlDU.Tlon 8DonD, '" N_
IlfD.x, AlfD 8110llT MODIILI 01' CoIIUBPOlO__ BT T.
V A.L UE. limo. II8S papa. PrIce II 211.
ItEY TO EXERCI8l!:8. Separate volume. PrIee 'll5 eent&
Onendorlr'l G_ have been N1'ore the pubnc 10 long, aud have bel
&MIr merits 10 generally ackDowledpd, that It la UDn8C8lllll'J' to entar luto BUY de-
IIdIect deecrlptlon of their .II"U1IarItleI or leDStbylll'glllll8Jlt In their lavor. 8ulllce U
to .y, that they are ft>ullded In nature, and 1bI1ow the ame COt.. "lie that a cblld pur
In ant acqulr!Jog hla _tl.,. tongue.
Prof. Greene'. Introductton, tile ftI'IIt of the worb named above,""". be ronnel
_fal for young beg\Dnen. In It are presented the fundamental prlnl'lp .... of the
IIIgbIlge, caretaJly out, 11114 Uluatnted with euy uerelll8lL It pav. tIwI ....,
.". the larger works, preparing the pupil'. mind ft>r tbelr more eompreltelllllYe <'Om.
'I'i ..... tenlng In It a dea1re ft>r further kDowledge.
Value'. and Jewett', worb are eaaeJdtally the ame, thoup eorae-bt
, Utelr arranr;emont and til. additions thai haft been made 1& Pdtlnal. a-
MUtwtlona prefer one, aud othen the other; AlthP,li la w.ved. wUl
'MoIoqh acqualntanee with French, botIl IN"'m.t!ca' and --IMII. br_
.......... and wi. InRHttIe nu..' ..... _ ....
DigitIZed by Coogle .
Integral Kethod of French .I.D.81iructlon.
I. New and Comprehensive French
Infiructor,
..... _ u DD l'Im.o801'BJOAL MImIOD, UPLrCl4Jlr...., .. &nM
- .. 'Wl'I'II u IJrnoDVOl'IOlf _ x-
aD TIoA'rIU OIl FaDOU PaolfVlfClU.'1'JOII.
By 8ft1'JIlCN PEARL ANDREWS DD GEORGE BATOJIBLOa.
II. Practical Pronouncer and Key
TO AlIDaW8 .urn BATOHELOR'S nw FBBBCH INSTRUCTOR:
x...on _ 'ftQ hran_ .. WlTII 1'II01D'l'l0 Rmmunre ..
OoLVJIKII; FUlfOU OP Bs:amuI, 'l'04I1m1D
'W1'I'II D A.ftoaDIL
t VoL Umo. 34'7 papa. Price 11 H.
It Is claimed that the labor of teuhIDg II1ld leamIDg the French IaDguaae lain>
...-Iy reduced by this new method, II1ld the au_ of the pupU placed UPOIl
IIotIDg of eertaIDty never heretofore attalDecL The general characterlatiea of the
iy8tem for whIch this claim Is male are as tollows: 1. The Judicious eombluatiou 01
Theory and Practtce, Bule II1ld EzercIao, III their Jnat proportIonto each other. z..&
uew Analyala ot the Blementa of LaDguap. 8. The preaentatlcm of II PanOl'lllllN
VIew of the French LaDguase as II whole. 4. TeachIDa olle thing at II time, and pro-
eeedlng by InducUve Step&. I\. The thorough eumiDaUon of Complez Sentence.,
II1ld the peoullar force and relaUODS of Connect1Dg Worda. a. The fnrnIahlng of II
eomplete a Kev to the Pronunciation, that th .. American can teach It with thO' _
accuracy and I'acIIltyas the Dative Parlaian.
The Leuona are full; the Rule., clear; the BzercIaea, abort and IIImple. The,
_body II oomplet.e f)OlIl'II8 ot Comparative Grammar, while their peoullar uraqe.
.eat leavee the teacher tree as to the 1IC8 to be made of the theoreUoaI portiODL The
treatment of the CoDJugIlUOna, of the Gender of N ou .... the formation of the Plural
.f Nouns and AcijeeUvea, of th .. Feminine of Acijeetivea, and .Qf Adverba, win be
llOlld novel and ilJgeniOIl& The IntrodurUon, the TreaUae on ProD1IIlCIIa&IoD, the
leawb on tho Moods and TeDaea, and the PhUologioal Notes freely IIlteropened,
teIIl II mua of InformaUon on the Freach I..anguage which would be 8OII81al ...
__ here III TIIIn.
fte atudeDt who la without II teacher wUlllnd hlmaelt eompletely gulded, by .....
YW -tUd, tbroqla the IIltrt.mee of French G_ and ProDlIDIIatIft.
DigitIZed by Coogle
!'renoh Onmmatical Works.
Manual of French Verbs:
GIll ..... ftUI FOlUlATlON 01' l'naoD, Tuna, AlCD MooDli 01' ftUI Jt.a1l:.M
DD laaH"VU& VBBB8; ..L PUClTlOAL lbmOD TO Ta..Loa ftUllBntrrrrnI ..
..L v ... 01J'1' OI'..LJI"I' 01' I'l'I 1NrL1IoTI0n; MODlWI 01' 8BIftDtmI Ill _
__ FolUl&; ..LND ..L IlDIBI OJ'TlIJI lion 1IUI'1rL IDlOlI..LTlo.u. plIBAQI
By T. SIHONNE.
Umo. 101 pagel. Price 63 cent&.
'l'Ire Utle ofthla volume, glVeD In full above, shows Ita ICOpe and character. 'l'U
or the verba, regular .. well .. Irregular. Ie the great d11IlcultT tW til
. I'm1ch dudent h .. to encounter; and to aid him In mrmOUDtiug It, )f, 8tmonu h.
lpplled hta long uperteDoe ... teachel or the laDguap.

OOMPANION TO
Ollendorff's New Method
OJ'
',EAKNING TO READ. WRITE, .AND 8PEAK TIlE li'REliOH LANGUAS.
By GEQ. W. GREENE,
DIII'I'&lJO'l'O& III IIODBBN L,\I(GlJAGIII IN .&OWll' 1JNIVmIIIrrr.
Umo. 1'18 pages. l'rice 11 00.
b 10GB .. the French etudeDt bee learned eDough of the verb to enable 111m '-
lrtmelate, thta volume should be plaoed In hie banda. It embraoee nlnetT-two cue-
Iull7 aelected dta10gnee on every-dey II1lbJect8, ealculatod to familiarize the student
with the moet neoe.!lll&lY uplell8lona, and to enable him to oonvene with lIueu"".
The dtalognee are followed by an tmportlut chapter on dlffereneea of IdtOlllll, ..
.. hMh are aet forth thoae peeullartttee of the language that _ot be eluatAed lIIIIIII
...... mlea, aecomplDled by gnmmatteal hluta and ezplanAt1oJl&

fJlLUDAB FOB TEACHING ENGLISH TO FBENCII1L1IN.
Grammaire Anglaife
LII IlYIITi:xB D'OLLIINDOUI', 1 L'UBAGJ: DBS J'llAN!1.uL
PAR CHARLES BADOIB.
limo. IU l'&8II. l'rice 1116.
'1'IIe ... t of. condeDled Grammarforteaohtng Frenchmen the EDgltah
... upertenoed b:r reatdeDta .. well .. travellers In thta countr:r. bee heeD _t .,
.. lIIIdaIe with thta e1ear and PlICtteal Treattae, ou the OlleDdDrII' plan. In the
01. tI!w leaoDI, the earner Ie 10 tamtl1arlHd with the moat neoellllUJ' :EJIcUU. ......
........ tW he &an readtlr and &an unclerBtaDd orcllllal7-
.....
DigitIZed by Coogle
The beat l'reneh DictiOlW'J.
SPIERS AND SURENNE'S
nENOIl & ENGLISH AND ENGLISH & 'BDOB
Pronouncing Dictionarv.
BDITBD BY
G.P. QUACKENBOB,A.H
oal Jarp Vol Ivo., of 1318 pp., neat type, and be paper. Price: IhIIp
14 60, hal! morocco U 00.
THE PUBLl8l1EU CLAIM FOR Trus WORK.
\. That It Ia a revlalon and combination of (SPlDI,) the beet dellnlDg, &IL4 (h
.... '8) the moet IICC1Il'&te prononnc\ng dlotlonary emnt.
I. That In thIa work the numeroua errorllln Spiers' dlctlouary have b8en eaNfllll,
&IL4 tIIthfn11:r corrected.
&. That lOme three thoD8ll1ld new delbdtlona havo b.!(>n added.
" That nnmeroua d.oftlrltlons and construotlona are elucidated by gh&lnloaU_ re
_ka and \Ilnatratlv<, - ... _ and aenten-.
Go That aevom! tl!onsand new phraaes and IdloltS are embodied.
e. That npwarda or twelve b ... ed aynonfIDoua tt'rma are e"l,lalncd, by poI.t.
Ing out t1:elr dlstlnotlve shades of lIl_nlD&.
T. That the parts of.11 the Irregular verba are lnaerted In alphabetlea1 order, ..
that one reference gives the 111>04, tense, perIOD, and number.
a. That I O m ~ ronr Illousand new Frend! words, connected with ..,lonC8, art, u4
lteratnre, have been adtled.
t. That eve.,. FftDch word fa aeaompanled b:r II eDct a pronnnclation II CIIIl ..
IOJ'reaented by corresponding Engllah -cia, and .,. __
10. That It contains .. full vocabulary of the names of """"na and placell, myt
ogIea1and cIueIcaI, uelent imd modern. -
11. That the arr&npmellt fa the moe1conv8nlenttor reten1lC8 that can be adoptH
11. That It fa the moat complete, 1eO\ll'ate, and reUable dlotlonar;y of th_ ..
111"- publlahed.
I'rtwA W.l8IDlrG'IOlf hTJKG
.. Aa lIIr II I have had time to examine It, It appears to me that Mr. QuekellbGl, "
'" revlalon, corrections, and additions, baa rendered the P&rIa Btltlon, airead7 10 ..
e11ot, the moat complete and valuable lexicon now In print."
DigitIZed by Coogle
!'he beat Diotfonary J Abridged BditiO]J.
SPIERS AND SURENNE'S
rR'INOD & ENGLISH AND ENGLISH &; FRENOB
Pronouncing Dictionary.
One Vol.12mo. 973 pagel. Price DOO.
IT &lfDARD ABRIDGED EDITION. FROM NEW AND LAROB ftPB
The Firat Part of thIa well-mown and 11Divenally popular worlt eoaw.: ......
:a .... mon uae; Terma connHted with selenee; Tenna belonging to thebe uta;
5'ollr thou8&Dd historical names; Four tholl88lld geographlcalllAlll .. ;
Upwarda of eleven thoUAnd worda of recent origin;
The of word aeco!CIIng to the Freneh A...temy aDd u..
IlO8t eminent lexicographers and grammarians; also,
More than se\'en hundred critical remarka, In ",hlch tho varlona mothoda ofproo
..... "nelng employed by dllferent authors are Investigated and compared. .
The Second Part eontalD3: A coplona vocabulary of English worda, with theIJ
proper pronuncIation, The whole 18 preceded by a critical treatJae on Freneh pro-
Dnnel.tlon.
M It embraces all the wordain common ulWl,and those In selence and the be an..
historical and g>graphical names, etc., with the pronunciation of every word -.l-
Ing to the Freneh Academy, tOIIether with neh erIt1cal remarks as will be naefnl W
every learner. It eontalns so lUll a compilattoll of words, deJln1t1ol11, etc., II -lJ
to leave any thiUlf to be dea1red."-N..., Yor.l: ....
...
Pronouncing French Dictional y.
By GABRIEL SURENNE, F. A. S. B.
16mo. Gti8 pages. Price 11 IS.
POCJ[ET EDmON.
In the pnparattoa .., thIa Dew wort, due reprd baa been paid to tho I1ltrodae
,Ion of Inch Dew wordl and deJln1t1oDl II the progreM1ve changes iD the \anpIIp
oa". reDdered aecesa&r7; and for thIa (iurpoae the beat and moat _t II1lthoritl.
hn beeD care1I11ly conanlted. It fa therdne eonlI.dentl1 antlalpeted that the vel,
__ will prove not dilly naefnl II1Ild1Iary to the atudeDt, but aJeo eollTelllea;
Poek.t Companion to the traveller, wherever the Frenob. lupap fa .,-eL A.,.
abulary of proper 1WDe8 aooompanlea the wort.
.. II. 8_ fa very JIl'O!IIl1lent ]mil_in Edlnbui@ aacJ III w/lo _ IIio
.... !I'I\J.nlron havlq Wore thaiD the pureat IItyk ill:Ile I"HM1a ---..
...... 1",.,,_.
DigitIZed by Coogle
Spanish Dictionary.
,
SEOANE, NEUMAN, AND BARETTI'S
SPANISH AND ENGLISH, AND ENGLISH AND SPANISH
Pronouncing Dictionary.
BY MARIANO. VELAZQUEZ DE LA. CADENA,
PRor. or 'l"DIIRPAlfIIIa LAXOVUII AlID'L1'rDATUBII IX OOLUJlBLt. OOLLIIO., X. T.,
OOIlU8PO"DIlIO JIlUIBIIB or TIlII XATIOXAI. IXIrITVT., W.A.lDIlIG'l'O".
Lmge 8ft. 1800 JIIIIeIo Jr_ type, be paper, &1IIl1I:nIq blDdiDg. Prfee 16.
The pronunciation of the Castilian laugnage is so clearly set forth in
this Dictionary. 88 to render it well.nigh for any person who
can read English readily, to fail of obtainmg the true sounds of the
Spanish words at sight.
In the revision of the work, more than eight thousand words, idioms,
and familiar phrases have been added.
It I!i ves in both laugnages the exact equivalents of the worda in gen.
eral use, both in their literal and metaphorical acceptations.
Also, the technical terms most frequently ued in the arts, in chem-
istry, botany, medicine, and natural Listory, 88 well as nautical and
mercantile termR nnd phrases-most of which are not found in other
Dictionaries.
Also many Spanish words used only in .A mencan countries which
were formerly dependencies of Spain.
The names of many important articles of commerce, gleaned from
the price currents of Spanish and South American cities, are inserted for
the benefit of the merchant, who will here find all that he needs tor
carrying on a business correspondence.
The parts of the irregular verba in Spanish and Englis'll are here,
for the first time, given in full, in their alphabetical order.
The work likewise contains a grammatical synopsis of both Ian.
guages, arranged for ready and convenient reference.
The new and improved orthography sanctioned by the latest edition
of the Dictionary of the Academy-now universally adopted by the
pre_is here given for the first; time in a Spanish and Enclish Dic-
tiollary.
,.."( ABBIDGJU:IIT or VELAZQuEZ's L.UlGJ: DIODO!UllY, I!ITDDED JOR
COLLBGBB, AlID TBA VELLJ:II8,.
I. Two Perh I 1:. SpaDlala-EacUIIh J U. Eql .. h-S .........
BY:MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA.
1Smo. 888 pag8I. Price t1 ao.
DigitIZed by Coogle
German Tm-Boob.
GEBJ[!N AND ENGLISH, AND ENGLISH AND GERMAN
Dictionary.
BY G. J. ADLER, A.. lrf.,
0118 elepat Jarp Ito. voL 1400 JIII& Price iii 00.
The aim of the distinguished author of this work blls been to
embody all the valuable results of the most recent investigations in
a German Lexicon, wbich might become not only a reliable guide
for the practical acquisition of the language, but ono which would
Dot forsake the student in the higher walks of his pursuits, to which
its treasures would invite him.
In the preparation of the German and English Part, the basis
adopted has been the work or FIQgel, compiled in reality by Hei-
mann, Felling, and Oxenford. This was the most complete andju-
diciousIy prepared manual of the kind in England.
'l'he present work contains the accentuation of every German'
word, several hundred synonymes:together with a classification and
alphabetical list of the irreguIar verbs, and a Dictionarv of German
abbreviations.. '
The foreign words, likewise, which have not been completely
Gel'lDlUlized, and which often dift"er in pronunciation and inflection
from such as are pnreJy native, have been designated by particular
marks.
The vocabulary of foreign words, which now act 80 important a
part, not only in scientific works, but in the best classics, reviews,
journals, newspapers, -and even in conversation, has been copiously
Rupplied from the most complete and correct SOOrcell. It is believed,
that in the terminology of chemistry, mineralogy, the practical arts,
commerce, navigation, rhetoric, grammar, mythology, philosophy,
&c., soarcely a word wm be found to be wanting.
The Second or German-English Part of this volume has been
chiefly reprinted from the work of FI1lgeI. (The attention which
has been paid in Germany to the preparation of English dictiouries
for the German student has been such as to render these worn
very complete. The student, therefore, will scarcely find anythin,
deficient m this Second ParL)
An Abridgment of the Above.
limo. 844 JIIIIe& Price II 00.
DigitIZed by Coogle
I

.......

"

Standard Italian 'Works.
O1lelul011l". ......... Grammar. A New llethod of
LeamIDg to Bead, Write, and 8peak the 8p&D1ah l.aDguage; with
Pnctlcal Rules for 8p61llab. PronunelatlOD, and Models of 8oc1al
I\Dd Commercial CorreapoJUiellce. By H. VlIL4ZQ11lIZ and T.
8D1olilld. limo. IIeO pages, 1 00
KEY TO THE EXER0I8ES. 8epatate volume,
'I'll
Seoaae, NeUJDaD, _4 baret"'. 8paubh _4 BIlr
Uah, and English and 8p61llab. Pronouncing D1otl0Dar7. By
lUaalro VlIL4ZQ1IJIZ DB LA. C,U) ..... Proteuor 01 the 8panlsh
Langa.ap and Literature in Columbia College, N. Y., and Corre-
lpondIDg Member of the National InItttute, .WashIngton. Large
Svo. 1,800 pages. Neat type, he papar, and strong bIDding, II 00
In the revfaton of the work by Velazqnez, more than eight thoDlaDd
words, Idioms, and lamlliar phruea have been added. It gtvealD both
lantruaea the _t equlvafenta of the wordl In general nee, both ID
theIr Illerai and metapllorlcal acceptatlOD& Also, the technical terms
moat IN:tlT uaed ID the arts, in medicine, and
= whig'.: terms and phraiee-
8'-4arc1 ProD.o_elDg DletlOD....,.. An
Abridgment of Velazquez's Large D1otlonary, IDtended for 8ehoo!a,
Colleges, ad Travelen. In two Parts: L Bp&Diah-Engllsh; n
Engliah-BpanIah. By lUaalro PB LA. C,U)U'" ll1mo.
888 pages, 1 ISO
Velazquez'. Be..,. IDtroducUoD. to 8paDhh COD.-
venation. By!UlluJlo VlIL4ZQuD DB LA. C,U)..... lSmo.
100 pages, 88
Velazque". New .paabh Bea4er. CoDBiatlng of Ex
traota from the Worb of the moat approved Authm:a ID Prose and
Vene, arranged ID progressl.ve order; with notes Explanatory of
the Idioms and moat dlIB.cu1t Coutrnot1OD8, and a oopI0U8 Vocabu-
la1y. llImo. SlSl P.... 1 lIG

Italian Text-Books.
Po ..... '. BlelDeD.....,. Grammar the J:taIIaD.
Language. ProtIrellively arranged for the _ of 8ehoola and
Cones-. limo. lI88 pages, 1 15
DigitIZed by Coogle
I _ , . . , . . . . - w ~ _
)!oreAl,. Itall_ Reader. A Oolleatlcm of pi_in Italian
~ dealgned aa a ReadIng-book tor Students of the Italian
LaQcuge. limo. !198 pecea, 1 til
ODeDdorB"ta PrIIDalT L_Da ID LeandDlr to
Bead, Writs, and Speak the Italian Languap. Introductor)' to
the Larger Grammar. By G. W. GIIDIO. 18mo. 188 pip!, 88
OlleDdonl"a New lIIedaod o. Leana ...... Bead,
Write, and Speak the Italian Langaage. With Acld1ttOD8 and
OorrecttOIll. By E. hJ.r.J: FoBlll'lI, LL.D. limo.. 1 110
KEY TO TBB EXERCISES. Separate vol1lDl8, TIl
In OneDdor1r'a GramlD&!ll Is tor the flrat time presented a IJIItem
by which the StudBDt CIII1 acqlllm a eonvenattoDal knowledge of
Italian. This will recommeDd them to Practteal StudeDts; while
at the same time there Is no lack of rules and prlncll!lea for those who
would puraue aSy8tematic grammaUeal course with the vt_ of trans-
latIDg and wrlttDg the lang1iage.
lIIlllhoaae'a I&aIIaD DlcUolUU')'. N_ EdItion. With
the addition of ten thouaand new words, and many other Improve-
. menta. Volume L, Engllah and Italian; volume II., Italian and
EnglIsh. 8v!lo 1,901 pip!, I 00
.INm Vmouzo BorrA, ~ 'II .ltcIUGtt, New Tori: OIIV.
"I have II6eD with great gratUlcatlon your repubHcaUon of Jf1ll.
h01ll8'a Dictionary, a work which Is lndi8penable to all students of
the Italian languap. In Italy and In EDgland thla Dicttonary Is re-
garded 88 a etandard wort, nnlUDg great compreh8D8l._ with moat
oonveulent dimellBloDL Its orthography and ldlomatlc I:raDalattODS&r8
In strict oontormlty with the 1IAP of the beat Italian wrlten, whcJae
worb the author hae evtdftutiy lItudlad with great care. I meet ~
dlaUy reoommend it 88 the beet Italian and Engllah DlcttOJl&J)' In UII8."
...
D. APPLETON ~ 00
fAIl Ar 445 BROADWA.Y. N_ Y ..
P11JILJIB 1I1'W.t.ItDI or
200 SOHOOL TEXTBOOKS,
IncludlDg the departments of English, LaUD, Greet, French, Spanlah,
ItalIaD, Hebrew, and SyrIao; of which a complate
Descriptive Cataloeue
1nU H ...." /ree 'II poIkIge, to tAo. Gpp7plq for u.
. .

gle